DIVISION 10 – SPECIALTIES DIVISION 11 –EQUIPMENT DIVISION ...

Buckskin Sanitary District 2015

Phase 4 Wastewater Conveyance System and WWTP Improvements Specifications

Table of Contents Page i

TABLE OF CONTENTS

DIVISION 2 - SITE WORK

SECTION NO. TITLE

02072 Demolition, Cutting, and Patching

02200 Earthwork

02223 Trenching, Backfilling, and Compacting

02242 Stability of Excavations

02260 Finished Grading and Soil Treatment

02445 Chain Link Fence and Gate

DIVISION 3 – CONCRETE

SECTION NO. TITLE

03100 Concrete Work

03200 Concrete Reinforcement

03300 Cast-In-Place Concrete

03301 Epoxies

03302 Epoxy Resin Portland Cement Bonding Agent

03356 Tooled Concrete Finishes

03600 Grout

03605 Epoxy Bonding Reinforcing Bars and Rods in Concrete

DIVISION 4 – MASONRY

SECTION NO. TITLE

04810 Unit Masonry Assemblies

DIVISION 5 – METALS

SECTION NO. TITLE

05052 Anchor Bolts, Toggle Bolts, and Concrete Inserts

05501 Miscellaneous Metals

DIVISION 6 - WOOD & PLASTICS (NOT USED)

DIVISION 7 - THERMAL & MOISTURE PROTECTION

SECTION NO. TITLE

07900 Joint Sealers



Table of Contents Page ii

DIVISION 8 - DOORS & WINDOWS (NOT USED)

DIVISION 9 – FINISHES

SECTION NO. TITLE

09800 Special Coatings

09900 Paint

09970 Concrete Coating System

DIVISION 10 – SPECIALTIES

SECTION NO. TITLE

10400 Process Identification Devices, Stenciling and Tagging Systems

DIVISION 11 –EQUIPMENT

SECTION NO. TITLE

11005 Equipment General Requirements

11330 Vertically Mounted Headworks Screenings

DIVISION 12 – FURNISHINGS (NOT USED)

DIVISION 13 – SPECIAL CONSTRUCTION

SECTION NO. TITLE

13120 Fiberglass Plant Covers

13126 Odor Control System

DIVISION 14 - CONVEYING SYSTEM (NOT USED)

DIVISION 15 – MECHANICAL

SECTION NO. TITLE

15050 Basic Process Piping Materials and Methods

15075 Plastic Piping and Tubing

15110 Valves

15141 Mechanical Process Pipe Supports

DIVISION 16 – ELECTRICAL

SECTION NO. TITLE

16050 General

16051 Utility Work

16061 Grounding Systems

16100 Demolition

16121 Instrumentation Cable



Table of Contents Page iii

16122 600 Volt Cable

16131 Rigid Conduit

16132 Flexible Conduits

16135 Pull Boxes

16143 Disconnect Switches

16231 Diesel Engine Generator System

16401 Existing Service Meter and Power Distribution Equipment

16412 Automatic Transfer Switches

16442 Lighting Panelboards

16970 Panels and Enclosures

16980 Startup Commissioning and Testing

DIVISION 17 – INSTRUMENTATION (NOT USED)

APPENDIX A: MARICOPA ASSOCIATION OF GOVERNMENT DETAILS

DIVISION 2

SITEWORK

Division 2 - Sitework



Division 2: Sitework Section 02072-1

SECTION 02072

DEMOLITION, CUTTING AND PATCHING

PART 1 GENERAL

1.1 SUMMARY

A. Section Includes:

1. All demolition, cutting and patching.

B. Related Sections include but are not necessarily limited to:

1. Division 1 - General Requirements.

1.2 QUALITY ASSURANCE

A. Use only firms or individual trades qualified to perform work required

under this Section.

1.3 SUBMITTALS

A. Not Used.

1.4 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING

A. General:

1. Salvage items, designated for OWNER's salvage, as a unit. Clean,

list, and tag for storage. Protect from damage and store on site

where designated by OWNER. Salvage each item with auxiliary or

associated equipment required for operation.

1.5 PROJECT/SITE CONDITIONS

A. Perform preliminary investigations as required to ascertain extent of

work. Conditions which would be apparent by such investigation will

not be allowed as cause for claims for extra costs.

1.6 SEQUENCING AND SCHEDULING

A. Coordinate and reschedule work as required to preclude interference

with other operations.

1.7 PERMITS

A. Obtain and pay for all permits required by all authorities having jurisdiction

and notify all involved utility companies.




B. Obtain approval of authorities having jurisdiction for any work which

affects access to or exit from such areas. Obtain approval of authorities for

any temporary construction which affects such areas.

PART 2 PRODUCTS

2.1 ACCEPTABLE MANUFACTURERS

A. Subject to compliance with the Contract Documents, the following

manufacturers are acceptable:

1. Nonshrink grout:

a. Masterflow 713 by Master Builders.

b. Approved equal.

2. Epoxy bonding adhesive:

a. Euco No. 452 MV by Euclid Chemical Co.

b. Sikadur 32 Hi-Mod by Sika Corporation.

c. Or approved equal.

2.2 MATERIALS

A. Nonshrink Grout:

1. Nonmetallic, noncorrosive and nonstaining.

2. Premixed with only water to be added in accordance with

manufacturer's instructions at jobsite.

3. Grout to produce a positive but controlled expansion. Mass

expansion not to be created by gas liberation or by other means.

4. Minimum compressive strength at 28 days to be 6500 psi.

5. Coat exposed edges of grout with a cure/seal compound

recommended by grout manufacturer.

B. Epoxy Bonding Adhesive:

1. Two component, moisture insensitive adhesive manufactured for

the purpose of bonding fresh concrete to hardened concrete.

PART 3 EXECUTION

3.1 PREPARATION

A. Provide substantial barricades and safety lights as required.

B. Provide temporary weather protection as necessary.

3.2 INSTALLATION

A. Cutting and Removal:

1. Remove existing work indicated to be removed, or as necessary for

installation of new work.




2. Neatly cut and remove materials, and prepare all openings to

receive new work.

3. Remove masonry or concrete in small sections.

B. Modification of Existing Concrete:

1. Where indicated, remove existing concrete and finish remaining

surfaces as specified in Division 3:

a. Protect remaining concrete from damage.

b. Make openings by sawing through the existing concrete.

c. Concrete maybe broken out after initial saw cuts in the event

concrete thickness prevents cutting through.

d. Where sawing is not possible, make openings bydrilling

holes around perimeter of opening and then chipping out

the concrete:

1) Holes shall be sufficient in number to prevent

damage to remaining concrete.

2. Oversize required openings in existing concrete 1 IN on all sides

and build back to required opening size by means of nonshrink

grout epoxy bonded to the existing concrete.

3. Where oversized openings cannot be made, remove the

concrete to the required opening size and cut back exposed

reinforcing 1 IN from face of concrete and fill resulting holes

with nonshrink grout.

C. Matching and Patching:

1. Methods and materials:

a. Similar in appearance, and equal in quality to adjacent areas

for areas or surfaces being repaired.

b. Subject to review of ENGINEER.

D. Salvaged Items:

1. Thoroughly dry and clean all metal surfaces.

2. Prime all bare metal in accordance with Section 09800.

3. Dispose of items or materials not designated for OWNER's salvage

or reuse. Promptly remove from site.

4. Do not store or sell CONTRACTOR salvaged items or materials on

site.

E. Clean up:

1. Transport debris and legally dispose of off site.

END OF SECTION

Buckskin Sanitary District

Phase 4 Wastewater Conveyance Systems and WWTP Improvements

2015

Specifications


SECTION 02100

SITE PREPARATION

PART 1 GENERAL

1.1 SUMMARY

A. Section Includes: clearing, grubbing, and stripping project site.

1.2 DEFINITIONS

A. Clearing: Consists of removal of natural obstructions and existing foundations, fences, lumber, walls, stumps, brush, weeds, rubbish, trees, boulders, utility lines, and any other items which shall interfere with construction operations or are designated for removal.

B. Grubbing: Grubbing shall consist of the removal and disposal of wood or root matter below the ground surface remaining after clearing and shall include stumps, trunks, roots, or root systems.

C. Stripping: Stripping shall include the removal and disposal of all organic sod, topsoil, grass and grass roots, and other objectionable material remaining after clearing and grubbing from the areas designated to be stripped.


A. Regulatory Requirements: Verify and comply with applicable regulations regarding those governing noise, dust, nuisance, drainage and runoff, fire protection, and disposal.

B. Pre-Construction Conference: Meet with OWNER to discuss order and method of work.

1.4 PROJECT CONDITIONS

A. Environmental Requirements: 1. For suspected hazardous materials found, comply with current applicable

laws and consult OWNER for direction.

B. Existing Conditions: 1. Verify character and amount of clay, sand, gravel, quicksand, water, rock,

hardpan, and other material involved and work to be performed.


A. Clearing and Grubbing: Perform clearing and grubbing in advance of grading

operations.



2015

Specifications


PART 2 PRODUCTS (NOT USED)

PART 3 EXECUTION

3.1 EXAMINATION

A. Verification of Conditions: Examine site and verify existing conditions before beginning work.

3.2 PREPARATION

A. Protect existing improvements from damage by site preparation work.

3.3 INSTALLATION

A. Clearing: 1. Strip and remove existing vegetation, organize topsoils, debris, and any other

deleterious materials from the building and paved areas. All exposed surfaces should be free of mounds and depressions which could prevent uniform compaction.

2. Do not incorporate organic material from clearing and grubbing operations in fills and backfills.

3. Contractor’s Construction Facilities: Fill or remove pits, fill, and other earthwork required for erection of facilities, upon completion of the work, and level to meet existing contours of adjacent ground.

B. Grubbing: 1. Totally remove stumps and roots within area impacted by construction. 2. Backfill and compact cavities left below subgrade elevation by removal of

stumps or roots to density of adjacent undisturbed soil.

C. Stripping: 1. Remove soil material containing sod, grass, or other vegetation to depth of

6 inches from areas to receive fill or pavement and from area within 5 feet outside foundation walls.

2. Deposit stripped material in accordance with following requirements: a. At locations as requested by ENGINEER.

END OF SECTION




SECTION 02200

EARTHWORK

PART 1 GENERAL

1.1 SUMMARY


1. Loosening, excavating, filling, grading, borrow, hauling, preparing subgrade,

compacting in final location, wetting and drying, and operations pertaining

to structures and earthwork.

2. Backfilling and compacting around structures.

1.2 REFERENCES

A. Associated General Contractors (AGC):

1. Manual of Accident Prevention in Construction (Section 9).

B. American Society for Testing and Materials (ASTM):

1. ASTM C 117 - Test Method for Material Finer than Number 200 Sieve in

Mineral Aggregate by Washing.

2. C 131 - Test Method for Resistance to Degradation of Small-Size Course

Aggregate by Abrasion and Impact in the Los Angeles Machine.

3. C 136 - Method for Sieve analysis of Fine and Course Aggregates.

4. D 698 Standard Test Methods for Laboratory Compaction Characteristics

of Soil Using Standard Effort.

5. D1556-Test Method for Density of Soil in Place by the Sand Cone Method.

6. D 2419 - Standard Test Method for Sand Equivalent Value of Soils and Fine

Aggregate.

7. D 2922 - Test Methods for Density of Soil and Soil-Aggregate in Place by

Nuclear Methods (Shallow Depth).

8. D 3017 - Standard Test Method for Moisture Content of Soil and Rock in

Place by Nuclear Methods (Shallow Depth).

9. D 4318 - Standard Test Method for Liquid Limit, Plastic Limit and Plasticity

Index of Soils.

C. Institute of Makers of Explosives (IOMOE).

D. Occupational Safety and Health Act (OSHA).

E. American Association of State Highway & Transportation Officials (AASHTO).




1.3 DEFINITIONS

A. Excavation: Consists of satisfactory loosening, removing, loading, transporting,

depositing, and compacting in final location materials, wet and dry, necessary to be

removed for purposes of construction, or as required for ditches, grading,

embankments, roads, structures, and such other purposes as are indicated on the

Drawings.

B. Backfill Adjacent to Structures: Backfill within volume delimited by exterior

surfaces of structures, surface of undisturbed soil in excavation around structures,

and finish grade around structure.

C. In-Place Density of Compacted Backfill: Density determined in accordance with

ASTM D 698, and with ASTM D 2922 and ASTM D 3017.

D. Maximum Density: Is density obtained in laboratory when tested in accordance with

ASTM D 698.

E. Definitions Related to Compaction of Coarse Fill:

1. One Pass: Defined as one movement of roller over area being compacted.

2. Measurement Of Pass Width: Measure width of pass between centers of

outside tires or outside edge of roller wheel.

1.4 SYSTEM DESCRIPTION

A. Performance Requirements:

1. Where mud or other soft or unstable material is encountered, remove such

material and refill and compact space with approved backfill material which

shall be compacted with no perceptible movement under roller.

2. Embankments and Roadway Fills:

a. Material For Fills: Unless otherwise specified or indicated on the

Drawings, material may be surplus material from excavation for

structures or other construction or, if accepted by the OWNER,

borrow material excavated from source within Project site.

b. Whatever source is used, provide fill material conforming with

specified requirements.

c. Obtain acceptable material from other sources if surplus or borrow

materials obtained within Project site do not conform to specified

requirements or are not sufficient in quantity for construction of

embankments and roadway fills.

d. No extra compensation will be made for hauling of fill materials nor

for water required to compact fills.

3. Responsibility for Compacted Fills:

a. Assume responsibility for accomplishing specified compaction for




backfill, fill, and other earthwork.

b. Perform confirmation tests to verify and confirm that work has

complied, and is complying at all times, with requirements specified

in this Section concerning initial compaction demonstration, and field

quality control testing.

4. Borrow Area:

a. No borrow area has been indicated on the Drawings.

b. Where borrow material is required, provide such material from source

selected by the CONTRACTOR, but not necessarily from within

project site.

c. Use of imported borrow shall not cause additional cost to the

Contract.

1.5 SUBMITTALS

A. Property owner’s Permission Agreements: Submit copy of property owner’s

agreements to allow dumping surplus material on their private property.

B. Product Data: Submit material source, gradation, proctor, and testing data for all

imported materials and on site materials proposed to be used.


A. Initial Compaction Demonstration:

1. Adequacy of Compaction Equipment and Procedures: Demonstrate

adequacy of compaction equipment and procedures before exceeding any

of following amounts of earthwork quantities:

a. 200 linear feet of trench backfill.

b. 10 cubic yards of structural backfill.

c. 100 cubic yards of embankment work.

d. 50 cubic yards of base material.

2. Compaction Sequence Requirements: Until specified degree of compaction

on previously specified amounts of earthwork is achieved, do not perform

additional earthwork of the same kind.


A. Schedule earthwork operations to meet requirements as provided in this Section for

excavation and uses of excavated material.

B. If necessary, stockpile excavated material in order to use it in specified locations.

C. Excavation and Filling: Perform excavation and filling, during construction, in

manner and sequence that provides drainage at all times.




PART 2 PRODUCTS

2.1 MATERIALS

A. Water For Compacting Fills: Use water from source acceptable to OWNER.

B. Fill and Backfill Materials:

1. General:

a. Provide sand, aggregate base course, gravel, Class 2 permeable, drain

rock, select material, and native material, where required for fill and

backfill.

b. Obtain material for fills from cut sections or from borrow source.

c. Provide material having maximum particle size not exceeding 4

inches and that is free from frozen material, leaves, grass, roots,

stumps, and other vegetable matter.

d. Materials derived from processing demolished or removed asphalt

concrete are not acceptable.

2. Aggregate Base Course: As specified in Section 02235.

3. Class 2 Permeable:

a. Consist of hard, durable particles of stone or gravel, screened or

crushed to the specified size and gradation.

b. Provide free from frozen material, organic matter, lumps or balls of

clay, and other deleterious matter.

c. Durability Index: Percentage of wear not greater than 40 percent

when tested in accordance with ASTM C 131.

d. Sand Equivalent: Not less than 75 when tested in accordance with

ASTM D 2419.

e. Conform to size and grade within the limits as follow when tested in

accordance with ASTM C 136:

Sieve Size

(Square Openings)

Percent by Weight

Passing Sieve

1 inch 100

3/4 inch 90-100

3/8 inch 40-100

Number 4 25-40

Number 8 18-33

Number 30 5-15

Number 50 0-7




Number 200 0-3

4. Drain Rock:

a. Consist of hard, durable particles of stone or gravel, screened or

crushed to specified size and gradation.

b. Free from frozen material vegetable matter, lumps or balls of clay, or

other deleterious matter.

c. Crush or waste coarse material and waste fine material as required to

meet gradation requirements.

d. Durability Index: Percentage of wear not greater than 40 percent

when tested in accordance with ASTM C 131.

e. Conform to size and grade within the limits as follows when tested in

accordance with AASHTO T-27 or ASTM C 136:

Sieve Size

(Square Openings)

Percent By Weight

Passing Sieve

2 inch 100

1-1/2 inch 95-100

3/4 inch 50-100

3/8 inch 15-55

Number 4 0-25

Number 8 0-5

Number 200 0-2

5. Gravel:

a. Consist of hard, durable particles or fragments of stone or gravel,

screened or crushed to specified sizes and gradations.

b. Free from frozen material vegetable matter, lumps or balls of clay,

alkali, adobe, or other deleterious matter.

c. When sampled and tested in accordance with specified test methods,

material shall comply with following requirements:

1) Durability Index: Percentage of wear not greater than 40

percent after 500 revolutions when tested in accordance with

ASTM C 131.

2) Plasticity Index: Not greater than 5 when tested in accordance

with ASTM D 4318.

3) Liquid Limit: Not greater than 25 percent when tested in

accordance with ASTM D 4318.

d. Conform to sizes and grade within the limits as follows when tested

in accordance with ASTM C 136 and ASTM C 117.




Percent By Weight Sieve Size

(Square Openings) Type A Type B

3 inch 100 –

1-1/2 inch – 100

Number 4 30 - 75 30 - 70

Number 8 20 - 60 20 - 60

Number 30 10 - 40 10 - 40

Number 200 0 - 12 0 - 12

6. Native Material:

a. Clean onsite native soil with a maximum dimension of 4 inches, and

passing 1 inch sieve.

b. Percent of material by weight passing Number 200 sieve shall not

exceed 30 when tested in accordance with ASTM C 136.

7. Sand:

a. Clean, coarse, natural sand.

b. Nonplastic when tested in accordance with ASTM D 4318.

c. 100 percent shall pass a ½ inch screen.

d. No more than 20 percent shall pass a Number 200 screen.

PART 3 EXECUTION

3.1 EXAMINATION

A. Verification of Conditions:

1. Character and Amount of Material:

a. Verify character and amount of rock, gravel, sand, silt, water, and

other inorganic or organic materials to be encountered in work to be

performed.

b. Determine gradation and shrinkage of excavation and fill material,

and suitability of material for use intended in work to be

performed.

c. Determine quantity of material, and cost thereof, required for

construction of excavations and fills, whether from on site

excavations, borrow areas, or imported materials.

d. Include wasting of excess material, if required, in cost of work to

be performed under this Contract.

3.2 PREPARATION




A. Surface Preparation:

1. Preparing Ground Surfaces for Fill or Concrete:

a. After clearing is completed, scarify entire areas which underlie fill

sections or structures to a depth of 8 inches and until surface is free

of ruts, hummocks, wet zones, and other features which would

prevent uniform compaction by equipment to be used.

b. Recompact areas to density specified in Sub-paragraph 3.03.C.1,

titled “Compacted Fills” before placing of fill material or concrete.

c. Where cemented rock, cobbles, or boulders compose a large portion

of foundation material underlying structures, slabs, or paved areas, it

may not be advisable to scarify the top 8 inches prior to compaction.

If the CONTRACTOR deems it advisable not to scarify existing

natural ground, then moisten the native soil and compact it as

specified in Sub-paragraph 3.03.C.2, titled “Compaction of Coarse

Fill.”

3.3 APPLICATION

A. General:

1. The CONTRACTOR shall assume responsibility and expense of disposing

of excavated materials which are not required or unsuitable for fill and

backfill in lawful manner.

2. Do not dump surplus material on private property unless written permission

agreement is furnished by owner of property. Submit copies of such

agreements.

3. Obtain material required for fills in excess of that produced by excavation

from borrow areas as specified herein.

4. Rocks, Broken Concrete, or Other Solid Materials Larger Than 4 Inches in

Greatest Dimension: Do not place in fill areas but remove from project site

at no additional cost to the Contract.

5. Stabilization of Subgrade: Provide materials used or perform work to

stabilize subgrade so it can withstand loads which may be placed upon it by

CONTRACTOR’s equipment at no additional cost to Contract.

6. Engineered fill under structure foundations and slabs on grade shall consist

of native material that is conditioned and compacted as specified in this

Section.

7. Backfill around all structures that require hydrostatic testing shall not be

completed until after hydrostatic testing is completed, and the structures

have passed the hydrostatic test.

8. Undermining footings/slabs after they have been cast-in place is prohibited.

B. Excavation:

1. Excavations for Structures:

a. The building and slabs on grade shall be over excavated to a uniform




depth of two feet below the foundation or two feet below the existing

ground surface, which ever depth is greater. The over excavation shall

extend five feet beyond the footprint of the building and slab on

grade. The over excavated areas shall be filled with engineered fill.

Include trenching for adjacent piping and all work incidental thereto.

b. Where soil of Unsuitable Bearing Value is Encountered: The

CONTRACTOR may direct in writing that excavation be carried to

elevations above or below those indicated on the Drawings.

c. Unless directed by the ENGINEER, excavations shall not be carried

below elevations indicated on the Drawings.

d. Where excavations are made below elevations required for the

foundation, adjust elevations of excavations in accordance with

requirements following:

1) Under Slabs: Restore to proper elevation in accordance with

procedure specified for backfill in this Section.

2) Under Footings: Select one of the following:

a) Increase heights of walls or footings.

b) Refill space with Class C concrete, as specified in

Section 03300, at no additional cost to the Contract.

c) Excavation Width: Extend excavations at least 24

inches clear from walls and footings to allow for

placing and removal of forms, installation of services,

and inspection. Undercutting of slopes will not be

permitted.

e. Bottom of Excavations For Structures: Consist of native material with

top 8 inches compacted to 95 percent of maximum density and graded

to conform to outside limits of structures as indicated on the

Drawings, except where otherwise indicated on the Drawings or

specified.

f. Difficulty of Excavation: No extra compensation will be made for

removal of rock or any other material due to difficulty of excavation.

g. Location of Structures on Different Substrates: Where structure will

be located partially on fill and partially on undisturbed or natural

material, over-excavate entire area to depth of 12 inches below the

structure and re-compact to 95 percent maximum density.

2. Excavation of Ditches and Gutters:

a. Cutting: Cut ditches and gutters accurately to cross sections and

grades indicated on the Drawings.

b. Excavation: Take care not to excavate ditches and gutters below

grades indicated on the Drawings.

c. Over Excavation: Back fill excessive ditch and gutter excavation to

grade with suitable thoroughly compacted material to form adequate

gutter paving.

d. Depositing Of Material Adjacent To Ditches: Do not deposit any




material within three feet of edge of ditch unless otherwise indicated

on the Drawings.

3. Necessary Over Excavation:

a. General:

1) Where it becomes necessary to excavate beyond normal lines

of excavation in order to remove boulders or other interfering

objects, backfill voids remaining after removal as specified

below in “Backfilling Of Voids”, or as acceptable to the

ENGINEER.

2) With ENGINEER’s approval, perform necessary excavation

beyond normal lines as specified in Subparagraph above and

backfill such voids. Cost of such work shall be considered as

included in price bid for the work.

3) Backfilling of Voids:

a) Fill voids with suitable material acceptable to the

OWNER, placed in manner and to same uniform

density as surrounding material.

C. Compaction:

1. Compacted Fills:

a. Lines and Grades:

1) Construct fills, embankments, and backfills, designated herein

as fills, at locations and to lines and grades indicated on the

Drawings.

2) Borrow sources are not available within project site. Where

required, CONTRACTOR shall provide necessary imported

fill material from outside sources.

b. Compacted Fill Shape and Sections: Provide completed fill that

corresponds to shape of typical sections indicated on the Drawings or

that meets requirements for particular case.

c. Preparation of Areas Designated to Receive Fill Material: Scarify to

minimum depth of 8 inches, unless otherwise indicated on the

Drawings, and recompact to density of fill material as specified in

following Article.

d. Fills and Backfills and Upper 6 Inches in Cuts: Compact to

percentage of maximum density as follows:

1) Backfill Adjacent to Structures: 95 percent.

2) Under Present and Future Structures: 98 percent.

3) Under Roadways (aggregate base course, and dirt), Parking,

Curbs and Sidewalks: 95 percent.

4) Aggregate Base Below Pavement 100 percent.

5) Onsite or Imported Fill Below Exterior Slabs on Grade: 95

percent.

6) Aggregate Base other than Below Pavement: 95 percent.




7) Landscaped Areas: 90 percent unless otherwise noted.

8) Compacted Embankments: 95 percent.

9) Spoil Areas Indicated on the Drawings: No minimum

required.

e. Placing Compacted Fills:

1) Placement: Place loose material in successive layers that do

not exceed 8 inches before compaction.

2) Moisture Content: Bring each layer to optimum moisture

content for maximum density before compaction by rolling.

3) Defective Compacted Fills:

a) Remove and replace any placed material that does not

have correct moisture content.

b) Remove and replace fills with suitable material when

any one of the following 2 conditions exist as they

shall serve as sufficient evidence, without further

testing, that moisture content is not correct:

(1) Soft, spongy or stringy material causing areas

that “pump” when heavy loads pass over.

(2) Dry material that will not “ball”.

f. Mechanical Spreading and Rolling Layers of Fills:

1) Spreading: Spread each layer uniformly by use of road

machine or other accepted device.

2) Rolling: Roll with acceptable tamping roller, heavy

pneumatic roller, or power roller until thoroughly

compacted to not less than specified density.

3) Fill Required to be Compacted That is Inaccessible to Rollers:

Compact with pneumatic, vibrating, or other tamping

equipment.

4) Use of Other Equipment: Use of trucks, carryalls, scrapers,

tractors, or other heaving hauling equipment is not considered

as rolling in lieu of rollers, but distributed traffic of such

hauling equipment over fill in such manner as to make use of

compaction by use of rollers.

2. Compaction of Coarse Fill:

a. When Materials Are Coarsely Graded Such That Performance of

Field Density Tests Are Impossible:

1) Placement and Compaction: Place material in lifts so as to

obtain compacted thickness of 6 inches and roll with pneumatic

roller or power roller.

2) Moisture Content: Provide moisture content of fraction of

material passing 3/4 inch sieve within plus or minus 2.0

percent of optimum moisture as determined in accordance

with ASTM D 1557.

3. Compaction of Embankments and Roadway Fills:




a. Construction and Compaction of Fills:

1) Construct in layers of depths specified above.

2) Compact by rolling with power rollers, tamping rollers,

vibrating rollers or pneumatic tire rollers.

3) Moisture Content:

a) While and as each layer is deposited, apply water in

sufficient amount to ensure optimum moisture to

secure compaction specified.

b) Uniformly incorporate water with fill material in

amount sufficient to assure required density after

rolling.

c) If excess moisture is encountered in fill, manipulate

each layer so as to dry out excess moisture.

3.4 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL

A. Tests:

1. Confirmation Tests:

a. CONTRACTOR’s Responsibilities:

1) Accomplish specified compaction for backfill, fill, and other

earthwork.

2) Control operations by confirmation tests to verify and

confirm that compaction work complies, and is complying

at all times, with requirements specified in this Section

concerning compaction, control, and testing.

3) Copies of Confirmation Test Reports: Submit promptly to the

OWNER and ENGINEER.

b. Frequency of Confirmation Testing:

1) Perform testing not less than as follows:

a) For Structural Fill and Backfill: One every 30 cubic

yards, or each day’s production which ever is more

frequent.

b) In Embankment or Fill: One every 200 cubic yards.

c) Base Material: One every 50 cubic yards.

d) Subgrade of Structures, Footings, Structural Slabs

in cut situation: once per foundation area.

c. Cost: CONTRACTOR shall include cost of testing in his bid.

2. Retesting:

a. Costs of Retesting: Costs of retesting required to confirm and verify

that remedial work has brought compaction within specified

requirements shall be borne by the CONTRACTOR.

b. CONTRACTOR’s Confirmation Tests During Performance of

Remedial Work:




1) Performance: Perform tests in manner acceptable to the

ENGINEER.

2) Frequency: Double amount specified for initial confirmation

tests.

B. Tolerances:

1. Finish Grading of Excavations, Backfill and Fills:

a. Perform fine grading under concrete structures such that finished

surfaces are never above established grade or approved cross section

and are never more than 0.10 feet below.

b. Provide finish surface areas outside of structures that are not more

than 0.10 feet above or below established grade or accepted cross

section.

2. Of Areas Which are not Under Structures, Concrete, Asphalt, Roads,

Pavements, Walks, Dikes and Similar Type Items:

a. Provide finish graded surfaces of either undisturbed natural soil, or

cohesive material not less than 6 inches deep.

b. Intent of preceding is to avoid sandy or gravelly areas.

3. Finished Grading Surfaces:

a. Reasonably smooth, compacted, and free from irregular surface

changes.

b. Provide degree of finish that is ordinarily obtainable from blade

grader operations, except as otherwise specified.

c. Uniformly grade areas which are not under concrete.

d. Finish gutters and ditches so that they drain readily.

3.5 ADJUSTING

A. Finish Grades of Excavations, Backfilling and Fill:

1. Repair and reestablish grades to required elevations and slopes due to any

settlement or washing way that may occur from action of the elements prior

to final acceptance.

3.6 PROTECTION

A. Finish Grades of Excavations, Backfilling and Fill:

1. Protect newly graded areas from action of the elements.

B. Ditches and Gutters:

1. Keep ditches and gutters excavated under this Contract free from detrimental

quantities of debris that may inhibit drainage until final acceptance.

3.7 DISPOSAL OF EXCAVATED MATERIAL




A. Unusable material or excavated material in excess of that needed for backfill or fill

offsite shall become the property of the CONTRACTOR and shall be removed from

the project site and legally disposed of at no cost to the OWNER.

END OF SECTION




SECTION 02223

TRENCHING, BACKFILLING AND COMPACTING

PART 1 GENERAL

1.1 SUMMARY

A. Section Includes: Trench excavation, fine grading, pipe bedding, backfilling, and

compaction for the following, including requirements for ditch crossings: 1. Pipe and electrical conduits.

2. Manholes, valves, or other accessories.

3. Piping and appurtenances.

1.2 REFERENCES

A. American Society for Testing and Materials (ASTM):

1. C 117 - Standard Test Method for Material Finer Than Number 200 Sieve in

Mineral Aggregate by Washing.

2. C 131 - Standard Test method for resistance to degradation of small size

coarse aggregate by abrasion and impact in the Los Angeles machine. 3. C 136 - Standard Test Method for Sieve analysis of fine and coarse aggregate.

4. D 1556 - Standard Test Method for Density of Soil in Place by the Sand-

Cone Method.

5. D 698 - Standard Test Methods for Laboratory Compaction Characteristics

of Soil Using Standard Effort.

6. D 2922 - Standard Test Methods for Density of Soil and Soil-Aggregate in

Place by Nuclear Methods (Shallow Depth).

7. D 4318 - Standard Test Method for liquid limit, plastic limit, and plasticity

index of soils.

1.3 SUBMITTALS

A. Products Data: For all proposed bedding and backfill materials.

1. Material source.

2. Gradation.

3. Proctor.

4. Testing data.

PART 2 PRODUCTS

2.1 MATERIALS

A. General:




1. Provide material having maximum particle size not exceeding 4 inches and

that is free of frozen material, leaves, grass, roots, stumps, and other

vegetable matter.

2. Materials derived from processing demolished or removed asphalt concrete

are not acceptable.

B. Aggregate Base Course: As specified in Section 02235.

C. Gravel: MAG Specification Section 701.2.2.

D. Native Material:

1. Sound, earthen material passing the 1 inch sieve and free from organic

material.

2. Percent of material passing the Number 200 sieve by weight shall not exceed

30 when tested in accordance with ASTM C 136.

E. Sand: MAG Specification Section 701.3.2.

F. Select Material: Sound earthen material for which the sum of the plasticity index

when tested in accordance with ASTM D 4318 and the percent of material by weight

passing the Number 200 sieve shall not exceed 23 when tested in accordance with

ASTM C 136.

G. Native Fill Soils: Native soils can be used as engineered fill if the remolded swell is

less than 2 percent (2%), but must be screened prior to placement. Trash,

construction debris, and oversized aggregate must be removed.

H. Engineered Backfill: Engineered fill shall consist of native soils and/or import

material that is predominantly sand with clay or silt, low in plasticity, and with a

remolded swell less than 2.0%.

I. Corrosive Soils: Soils considered to be subject to concrete corrosion are based on

Table 1904.3 of the 2003 International Building Code.

PART 3 EXECUTION

3.1 PREPARATION

A. General:

1. Before laying pipes or electrical conduits in fill, place fill and compact it to

not less than 2 feet above top of pipe or conduit.

2. After placing and compacting fill, excavate through fill and fine grade as

required in this Section.

B. Protection: Stabilize excavation.




3.2 INSTALLATION

A. Trench Excavation:

1. General Requirements:

a. If, because of soil conditions, safety requirements or other reasons,

trench width at top of pipe is increased beyond width specified in this

Section, upgrade laying conditions or install stronger pipe designed

in conformance with Specifications for increased trench width,

without additional cost. b. Pipe And Electrical Conduits:

1) Lay pipe in open trench.

2) Where shown on Drawings, lay electric conduits in concrete

encased duct banks with a warning ribbon located 1'-0" above

the top of the duct bank. Do not use any rebar and dye. NEC

approved chairs shall be placed every 5' throughout the length

of the duct bank to provide support and separation of

conduits.

3) If bottom of excavation is found to consist of rock or any

material that by reason of its hardness cannot be excavated to

provide uniform bearing surface, as determined by

ENGINEER, remove such rock or other material to a depth

of not less than 4 inches below bottom of pipe and refill to

grade with aggregate base course material or sand placed at

uniform density, with minimum possible compaction, at no

additional cost.

4) If bottom of excavation is found to consist of soft or unstable

material which is incapable of properly supporting pipe,

remove such material to a depth and for the length required,

as determined by the OWNER, and then refill trench to grade

with aggregate base course or sand, compacted to 95 percent

of maximum density.

5) Where indicated on the Drawings, and where fill conditions

dictate, cradle pipe in concrete.

6) Minimum Clear Width of Trench for Pipe 4 Inches in

Diameter and Over (Measured At Top Of Pipe): Not less than

outside diameter of pipe plus 18 inches.

7) Maximum Clear Width of Trench for Pipe (Measured at Top

of Pipe):

a) For Pipe Sizes up to and Including 24 Inches: Not

exceed outside diameter of pipe plus 24 inches.

b) For Pipe Sizes Over 24 Inches: Not exceed outside

diameter of pipe plus 36 inches. c. For Manholes, Valves, or Other Accessories:




1) Provide excavations sufficient to leave at least 12 inches clear

between their outer surfaces and embankment or shoring

which may be used to hold banks and protect them.

2) Do not backfill with earth under manholes, vaults, tanks, or

valves.

3) Fill any unauthorized excess excavation below elevation

indicated on the Drawings for foundation of any structure

with aggregate base material or concrete at no additional

cost.

4) Backfilling of Manhole Excavation: Conform to backfilling

requirements as specified for trenches in this Section. d. Potable Water Pipe and Appurtenances:

1) Lay in trench separate from those used for sewers.

2) Unless otherwise specified or indicated on the Drawings, lay

in trenches having cover of not less than 4 feet below surface

of ground and located at distance of not less than 10 feet from

any parallel sewer trench. e. At Road Crossings or Existing Driveways:

1) Make provision for trench crossing at these points, either by

means of backfills or tunnels.

B. Trench Fine Grading:

1. For Pipes 16 Inches in Nominal Diameter and Under:

a. Unless otherwise specified, accurately grade bottom of trench to

provide uniform bearing and support for each section of pipe, on

undisturbed soil at every point along pipe’s entire length, except for

portions of pipe where it is necessary to excavate for bells and for

proper sealing of pipe joints. 2. Bell or Coupling Holes:

a. Dig holes after trench bottom has been graded.

b. Provide holes of sufficient width to provide ample room for grouting,

banding, or welding.

c. Excavate holes only as necessary in making joints and to ensure that

pipe rests upon prepared trench bottom and not supported by any

portion of the joint.

3. Depressions for Joints, Other Than Bell-and-Spigot:

a. Make in accordance with recommendations of joint manufacturer for

particular joint used.

C. Pipe Bedding:

1. After Pipe Laid:

a. Place bedding material under and around pipe to level even with

spring line of pipe, and compact to 90 percent of maximum density.

Depth of bedding under pipe shall be 4 inches.




b. Fill section of trench from spring line to 12 inches above top of pipe

with bedding material and mechanically compact to 90 percent of

maximum density.

2. Pipe Displacement:

a. Take necessary precautions in placement and compaction of bedding

material to prevent displacement of piping.

b. In event there is movement, re-excavate, re-lay, and backfill the pipe.

3. Consolidation:

a. Use mechanical means.

D. Trench Backfill:

1. Place and compact backfill in accordance with following requirements:

a. From 12 inches above top of pipe to natural surface level.

b. Finish grade indicated on the Drawings as follows:

1) Backfill For Trench Cuts Across Roadways, Paved Streets,

Site Access Roads, and Site Road: Backfill trench to

underside of specified pavement replacement with aggregate

base course material compacted to 95 percent of maximum

density.

c. Trench Backfill for Trench Cuts in Areas Outside the Improved

Section of Roadways and within open spaces: Backfill trench from 12

inches above top of pipe to finish grade with native material

compacted to 90 percent of maximum density.

d. Trench Backfill through Earth Slopes or Embankments Supporting

Structures, through Structural Fill, or Adjacent to and/or Under

Structures: Backfill trench from 12 inches above top of pipe to finish

grade with ABC material or approved select material compacted to 95

percent of maximum density.

E. Compacting Native Material:

1. Assure that native material, when used as previously specified, is capable of

being compacted to degree specified.

2. If native material cannot be compacted to density as previously specified,

remove and dispose of material whether it has been placed in trench as

backfill or not, and utilize other backfill material from another source

acceptable to the ENGINEER.

F. Excess Material:

1. Remove excess excavated material from the project site.


A. Tests:

1. Confirmation Tests:

a. CONTRACTOR’s Responsibilities:




1) Accomplish specified compaction of trench backfill.

2) Control operations by confirmation tests to verify and

confirm that compaction work complies, and is complying at

all times, with requirements specified in this Section

concerning compaction, control, and testing.

3) Copies of Confirmation Test Reports: Submit promptly to the

OWNER and ENGINEER. b. Frequency of Confirmation Testing:

1) Perform testing not less than as follows:

a) For Trenches: At each test location include tests for

each type or class of backfill from bedding to finish

grade. b) In Open Fields: Two every 500 linear feet.

c) Along Dirt or Gravel Road or off Traveled Right-of-

Way: Two every 500 linear feet.

d) Crossing Paved Roads: Two locations along each

crossing.

e) Under Pavement Cuts or Within 2 Feet of Pavement

Edges: One location every 200 linear feet.

f) Under structures and slabs: minimum of one, and one

every 50 linear feet.

c. Contractor shall include cost of testing in his bid.

2. Retesting:

a. Costs of Retesting: Costs of retesting required to confirm and verify

that remedial work has brought compaction within specified

requirements shall be borne by the CONTRACTOR.

b. CONTRACTOR’s Confirmation Tests During Performance of

Remedial Work.

1. Performance: Perform tests in manner acceptable to the

ENGINEER.

2. Frequency: Double amount specified for initial confirmation

tests. 3. Water Testing Pipe:

a. After bedding the pipe, contractor shall water pressure and leak test

pipe.

b. If pipe does not pass test, locate leaks, repair and retest, repeating

until pipe section under test passes, then backfill.

B. As-builts:

1. CONTRACTOR shall survey the entire line prior to backfill.

3.4 SCHEDULES

A. Bedding Materials:




1. For Pipe Less Than 16 Inch Nominal Size: Other than plastic pipe, except as

otherwise specified, use sand, aggregate base course, or gravel. 2. For Polyvinyl Chloride or Other Plastic Pipe Less Than 2 Inches in Diameter:

Sand or gravel.

3. For polyvinyl chloride pipe larger than 2 inches in diameter: aggregate base

course.

END OF SECTION


Phase 4 WWTP Wastwater Conveyance System and WWTP Improvements

2015

Specifications

Division 2: Sitework Section 02235‐1

SECTION 02235

AGGREGATE BASE COURSE

PART 1 GENERAL

1.1 SUMMARY

A. Section Includes: Aggregate base course for applications as specified and shown on

Drawings.

1.2 REFERENCES

A. American Society of Testing and Materials (ASTM):

1. C 117 - Standard Test Method for Material Finer than 75 µM (Number 200)

Sieve in Mineral Aggregate by Washing.

2. C 136 - Standard Test Method for Sieve Analysis of Fine and Coarse

Aggregates.

3. D 4318 - Standard Test Method for Liquid Limit, Plastic Limit, and Plasticity

Index of Soils.

1.3 SUBMITTALS

A. Product Data:

1. Source, gradation, proctor, and testing data for aggregate base course.

B. Quality Control:

2. Test Reports.


A. Storage and Protection: Protect from segregation and excessive moisture during

delivery, storage, and handling.

PART 2 PRODUCTS

2.1 MATERIALS

A. Aggregate Base Course:

1. Consist of hard, durable particles or fragments of stone or gravel, screened

or crushed to required size and grading and free from frozen material,

vegetable matter, lumps or balls of clay, alkali, adobe, or other deleterious

matter.

2. Materials derived from processing demolished, removed asphalt concrete, or

Portland cement aggregate are not acceptable.

3. When sampled and tested in accordance with specified test methods, material

shall comply with following requirement:



2015

Specifications


a. Plasticity Index: Not be more than 5 when tested in accordance with

ASTM D 4318.

b. Liquid Limit: Not be more than 25 percent when tested in accordance

with ASTM D 4318.

4. Aggregate Base Course for Structures:

a. Consist of crushed or fragmented particles.

5. The following limits when tested in accordance with ASTM C 136 and

ASTM C 117:

Sieve Sizes1

(Square Openings)

Percent by Weight

Passing Sieve

1-1/8 inch 100

Number 4 38-65

Number 8 25-60

Number 30 10-40

Number 200 3-12

6. Aggregate shall have a percentage of fifty or less at 500 revolutions when

tested in accordance with AASTHO T96.

PART 3 EXECUTION

3.1 EXAMINATION

A. Verification of Conditions: Examine conditions upon which the work specified in

this Section depends for defects that may influence installation and performance.

B. Do not proceed with installation until unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.

3.2 PREPARATION

A. Subgrade Preparation: Prepare as specified in Section 02200, “Earthwork”,

paragraph 3.02 A.

3.3 INSTALLATION

A. Furnish, spread, and compact aggregate base course material to the lines, grades, and

dimensions indicated on the Drawings per Section 02200, unless specified otherwise.


A. Tests: CONTRACTOR to perform compaction tests every 50 cubic yards or each

days placement, whichever is more frequent.

B. CONTRACTOR shall include cost of testing in his Bid.



2015

Specifications


END OF SECTION



2015

Specifications


SECTION 02242

STABILITY OF EXCAVATIONS

PART 1 GENERAL

1.1 SUMMARY

A. Section Includes: Stability of excavations.

1.2 REFERENCES

A. American Institute of Steel Construction, Inc., (AISC):

1. Manual of Steel Construction (MSC).

1.3 DEFINITIONS

A. General Engineering Design Practice: General engineering design practice in area of

the Project, performed in accordance with recent engineering literature on subject of shoring and stability of mass excavations.

1. Where general engineering design practice is specified, provide drawings and

signed calculations and have design performed by civil or structural engineer registered in State where the Project is located:

a. Provide design calculations that clearly disclose assumptions made,

criteria followed, and stress valued used for various materials. b. Furnish acceptable references substantiating appropriateness of

design assumptions, criteria, and stress values.

B. Shoring: A temporary structural system designed to support vertical faces of soil or

rock for purposes of excavation. Shoring includes cantilevered sheet piling, internally braced sheet piling, slurry walls, soldier piles and lagging, and other similar shoring

systems. Sloping of the soil is not shoring.


A. Design Requirements:

1. Design means for safe and stable excavations in accordance with general engineering design practice.

2. Design steel members in accordance with AISC MSC.

3. Design shoring involving materials other than steel in accordance with International Building Code.

4. Perform design in accordance with soil characteristics and design recommendations contained in a written geotechnical report issued and

signed by a geotechnical engineer registered in the State where the Project

is located:

a. Make copy of geotechnical report available at project site for



2015

Specifications


ENGINEER’s review. b. Retain and pay for geotechnical engineer’s services.

c. Obtain report based on soil samples, field and laboratory tests, and borings performed for the geotechnical report for the design of

stability of excavations by the geotechnical engineer.

5. When electing to design with material stresses for temporary construction higher than allowable stresses prescribed in the reference publications,

increase in such stresses shall not exceed 10 percent of value of prescribed

stresses.

B. Performance Requirements: 1. General:

a. Support faces of excavations and protect structures and improvements in vicinity of excavations from damage and loss of function due to

settlement or movement of soils and alterations in ground water level

caused by such excavations, and related operations. b. Herein Specified Provision:

1) Complement, but do not substitute or diminish, obligations of CONTRACTOR for the furnishing of a safe place of work

pursuant to provisions of the Occupational Safety and Health

Act of 1970 and its subsequent amendments and regulations and for protection of the Work, structures, and other

improvements. 2) Represent minimum requirement for:

a. Number and types of means needed to maintain soil

stability. b. Strength of such required means.

c. Methods and frequency of maintenance and observation of means used for maintaining soil

stability. 2. Provide safe and stable excavations by means of sheeting, shoring, bracing,

sloping, and other means and procedures, such as draining and recharging

groundwater and routing and disposing of surface runoff, required to maintain the stability of soils.

3. Provide support for trench excavations for protection of workers from hazard

of caving ground. 4. Provide Shoring:

a. Where, as result of excavation work and analysis performed pursuant to general engineering design practice, as defined in this Section:

1) Excavated face or surrounding soil mass may be subject to

slides, caving, or other types of failures. 2) Stability and integrity of structures and other improvements

may be compromised by settlement or movement of soils. b. For trenches 5 feet and deeper. c. For trenches less than 5 feet in depth, when there is a potential for

cave-in. d. Where indicated on the Drawings.



2015

Specifications


5. For safe and stable excavations, use appropriate design and procedures for

construction and maintenance to minimize settlement of supported ground and to prevent damage to existing structures and other improvements,

including: a. Using stiff support systems. b. Following appropriate construction sequence. c. Preventing soil loss through or under support system:

1) Provide support system that is tight enough to prevent loss of soil and extend deep enough to prevent heave or flow of soils

from supported soil mass into the excavation.

2) Where sheet piling is used, drive sheet piles in interlock.

1.5 SUBMITTALS

A. Shop Drawings and Calculations: 1. Perform design pursuant to general engineering design practice.

2. For excavations other than trenches, submit, in advance of excavation work, design calculations as performed pursuant to general engineering design

practice, as specified in this Section, and detail drawing showing means for

safe and stable excavations. In design calculations and detail drawing, cover, and as a minimum: a. Excavations adjacent to structures, and

b. Excavations 5 feet or more in depth, or less than 5 feet in depth when

there is potential for cave-in, at other locations.

B. Control Points and Schedule of Measurements:

1. Submit location and details of control points and method and schedule of measurements in accordance with requirements of this section.

2. Promptly upon constructing control points and making measurements and such control points, as specified in this Section, submit copy of field report

with such measurements.

C. Detailed Sequence of Installation and Removal of Shoring:

1. Address the sequence of installation and removal of shoring in design

calculations.

2. Consider effects of ground settlement in the sequence of installation and removal of shoring.


A. For excavation, including trenchings, do not begin until excavation submittals have

been accepted by Engineer and until materials necessary for installation are on site.


PART 3 EXECUTION



2015

Specifications


3.1 INSTALLATION AND REMOVAL

A. Install means for providing safe and stable excavations as indicated in the submittals.

B. Remove shoring by completion of the Work. Pressure preservative treated wood

lagging may be left in place when acceptable to the ENGINEER.

3.2 MAINTENANCE

A. Where loss of soil occurs, plug gap in shoring and replace lost soil with fill material acceptable to ENGINEER.

B. Where measurements and observations indicate possibility of failure of excavation

support, determined in accordance with general engineering design practice, take

appropriate action immediately.

3.3 CONTROL POINTS

A. Establish control points on shoring and on structures and other improvement in vicinity of excavation for measurement of horizontal and vertical movement: 1. Set Control Points on Support System:

a. Set points at distances not exceeding 25 feet at each support level.

b. Support levels shall be levels of tie-backs, whales, bottom of excavation, and other types of supports.

2. Set control points in corners of structures and on curbs, manholes, and other

locations indicated on the Drawings.

B. Provide plumb bobs with horizontal targets indicating original position of plumb bobs in relation to shoring at control points and at locations indicated on the

Drawings.

C. Perform horizontal and vertical measurements of control points at least once every

week.

END OF SECTION



2015

Specifications


SECTION 02260

FINISHED GRADING AND SOIL TREATMENT

PART 1 GENERAL

1.1 SUMMARY

A. General work included in this Section:

1. All finished grading and soil treatment as indicated in the Contract

Documents.


1. Division 1.

2. Section 02100 - Site Preparation.

3. Section 02200 - Earthwork.

C. Location of Work: All areas within limits of grading and all areas outside limits of

grading which are disturbed in the course of the work. Soil treatment shall be limited

to areas under slabs, sidewalks, perimeter of structures, pavement, and areas to

receive ABC.

PART 2 PRODUCTS

2.1 MATERIALS

A. Soil Treatment:

1. Soil sterilization for vegetation control shall be Karmex 80W manufactured

by DuPont; Diuron 4L manufactured by Drexel chemical Corporation; or pre-

approved equal.

2.2 TOLERANCES

A. Finish Grading Tolerance: 0.1 ft plus/minus from required elevations.

PART 3 PREPARATION

A. Correct, adjust and/or repair graded areas:

1. Cut off mounds and ridges.

2. Fill gullies and depressions.

3. Perform other necessary repairs.

4. Bring all sub-grades to specified contours, even and properly compacted.

5. Loosen surface to depth of 2 in., minimum.

6. Remove all stone and debris over 2 in. in any dimension.



2015

Specifications


B. Prepare areas for soil treatment per manufacturer's recommendations.

3.2 ROUGH GRADE REVIEW

A. Reviewed by ENGINEER in Section 02100, Site Preparation.

3.3 TREATING SOIL

A. The CONTRACTOR shall provide all labor, material, equipment, and services

necessary to complete all work involved in soil sterilization for unwanted plant life.

The weed killer shall be applied according to the manufacturer's published

instructions.

END OF SECTION

Division 2: Chain Link Fence and Gate Section 02445‐1



SECTION 02445

CHAIN LINK FENCE AND GATE

PART 1 GENERAL

1.1 SUMMARY

A. This Section specifies chain link fence comprising fencing, gates, and appurtenances.

1.2 FACTORY TESTING

A. Wire fabric and barbed wire shall be tested for zinc coating weight by the method

specified in ASTM A90. Ferrous metal, except the fabric, shall be tested for zinc

coating uniformity by the method specified in ASTM A239; zinc coating shall

withstand six 1-minute dips.

1.3 REFERENCES


1. A90 - Standard Test Method for Weight of Coating on Zinc-Coated

(Galvanized) Iron or Steel Articles.

2. A53 - Standard Specification for Pipe, Steel, Black and Hot-Dipped Zinc-

Coated, Welded and Seamless.

3. A121 - Standard Specification for Zinc-Coated (Galvanized) Steel Barbed

Wire.

4. A123 - Standard Specification for Zinc (Hot-Dip Galvanized) Coatings on

Iron and Steel Products.

5. A153 - Standard Specification for Zinc Coating (Hot Dip) on Iron and Steel

Hardware.

6. A239 - Standard Practice for Locating the Thinnest Spot in a Zinc

(Galvanized) Coating on Iron or Steel Articles by the Preece Test (Copper

Sulfate Dip).

7. F567 Standard Practice for Installation of Chain Link Fence.

8. F668 - Specification for Polyvinyl Chloride Coated Steel Chain Link Fences.

B. UL325.

1.4 SUBMITTAL

A. Manufacturer's product information designating specific materials provided.

B. The layout of the chain link fence as it is to be provided illustrating fence height,

post sizes, bracing configurations, and accessories.

C. The layout and operation of the gates.




D. Weight of gates.

PART 2 PRODUCTS

2.1 MATERIALS

A. Chain Link Fabric:

1. Fabric to have 75,000 psi tensile strength. Chain link fabric shall be 2-inch

mesh 9-gauge core wire. Height of fabric shall be 8 feet 0 inch (plus or

minus 3/4 inch).

2. Fabric shall conform with the requirements of ASTM F668, Class 2b and

shall be hot dip galvanized after fabrication, and then covered with a

thermally fused and bonded vinyl coating. The vinyl coated fabric shall be 8-

gauge, finish.

B. Slates for Chain Link Fence and Gate:

1. Provide plastic slats that insert vertically through chain link fence and gate

with a bottom lock.

2. Provide wooden slates for 80% privacy factor.

3. Slat length shall be sufficient for secure bolting to the frame.

C. Bottom Tension Wire:

1. Bottom tension wire shall be at least 7-gage galvanized coil spring steel.

D. Barbed Wire:

1. Barbed wire shall be double strand 12 1/2-gage galvanized steel with 14-

gage barbs in 4-point pattern on 5-inch centers and shall have a Class 1

galvanized coating per ASTM A121.

E. Posts, Top Rail, and Braces:

1. Pipe used shall be ASTM A53, Schedule 40 steel pipe. Posts, rails, braces

and frames shall be hot-dip galvanized per ASTM A53, A123 or A153,

whichever is applicable. Galvanizing shall apply at least 2.0 ounces of zinc

per square foot of surface.

2. Line posts shall be 2-3/8-inch outside diameter pipe weighing 3.65 pounds

per foot. Corner and end posts shall be minimum 2-7/8-inch outside diameter

pipe weighing a minimum of 5.79 pounds per foot. Braces and top rails

where specified, shall be 1 5/8-inch outside diameter pipe weighing 2.27

pounds per foot.

3. Provide galvanized rampart.

4. End post at receiving end of gate leading edge shall have a catch bracket

both near the bottom and top to receive and stabilize the gate.

5. Truss Rods and Miscellaneous Fittings:

6. Truss rods shall be fabricated of 3/8-inch diameter steel rods and shall have




turnbuckles or similar means of adjustment. Extension arms for barbed wire

shall be steel or malleable iron. Fittings used shall be hot-dip galvanized iron

or steel with a minimum coating of at least 2.0 ounces of zinc per square foot

of surface in accordance with ASTM A123 or A153, whichever is

applicable.

F. Concrete:

1. Concrete for post foundations shall be Class C as specified in Section 03300.

G. Manually Operated Slide Gate:

1. The widths of any gates to be installed shall be indicated on the plans or the

special provisions.

2. The redwood slats on the gate shall be as shown on the Drawings. Slats shall

be attached to the gate frame by the use of bolts as indicated on the

Drawings.

3. The corners of gate frames shall be fastened together and reinforced with a

fitting, designed for that purpose, or by welding. All welds shall be ground

smooth.

4. The slide gate shall be supported by wheels that are suitable for use in non-

paved areas.

5. Slide gate shall be provided with a combination steel or malleable iron catch

and locking attachment of design approved by the Engineer.

H. The chain link fence Supplier shall design and provide the fence to meet the wind

load requirements due to addition of the plastic slats as described in Section 2.01B.

PART 3 EXECUTION

3.1 FENCE

A. Line posts shall be provided as shown on the Drawings. The base top shall be at

least 1 inch above grade and sloped for drainage. Posts shall be set vertical, shall be

accurately aligned, and shall have their tops level or at a constant slope between

changes in grade. Tubular posts shall be fitted with extension arms for barbed wire,

post top to permit passage of top rail or rainproof malleable iron caps as applicable.

B. Corner and end posts shall be braced to the nearest line post. Corner and end posts

shall be diagonally braced. Line posts shall be braced horizontally and trussed in

both directions with truss rods at 1000-foot minimum intervals. Top rails, where

specified, shall be in lengths not less than 18 feet and shall be fitted with couplings

for connecting lengths into continuous runs. Couplings shall be not less than 6

inches long and allow for expansion and contraction of the rail.

C. Chain link fabric shall be taut and shall be attached to posts, rails, and wires with

galvanized fabric bands or tie wires at a maximum spacing of 12 inches on posts and




18 inches on the rails and tension wires. Stretcher bars shall be provided at ends of

fabric. The bottom tension wire shall be stretched tight and shall be located 2 inches

maximum above finished grade and on a straight grade between posts by excavating

the high points of ground, and in no case shall depressions be filled.

D. Unless otherwise specified, three strands of barbed wire attached to extension arms

shall be provided along the fence top. Extension arms shall overhang the outside of

the fence at a 45-degree angle. The topmost strand of barbed wire shall be 12 inches

above the top of the fabric.

E. Provide top rail.

F. CONTRACTOR shall provide additional fence posts as necessary to install gates.

G. Install chain link fence in accordance with ASTM F567.

H. Repair of Damaged Coating: Welds made after galvanizing shall be ground smooth,

then wire brushed to remove loose or burned zinc coating, after which the cleaned

areas shall be repaired to the satisfaction of the Owner. Repairs to abraded or

otherwise damaged zinc coating shall be made in a similar manner.

END OF SECTION

DIVISION 3

CONCRETE

Division 3 - Concrete



Division 3: Concrete Section 03100-1

SECTION 03100

CONCRETE WORK

PART 1 GENERAL

1.1 SUMMARY

A. Section Includes: Concrete formwork.

B. Related Sections:

1. Section 03300 - Cast-In-Place Concrete.

2. Section 03600 - Grout.

1.2 REFERENCES

A. American Concrete Institute (ACI):

1. 117 - Standard Tolerances for Concrete Construction and Materials.


A. Design Requirements:

1. Design concrete forms, falsework, and shoring in accordance with local,

state, and federal regulations.

2. Design forms and ties to withstand concrete pressures without bulging,

spreading, or lifting of forms.

B. Performance Requirements:

1. Construct forms so that finished concrete conforms to shapes, lines, grades,

and dimensions indicated on the Drawings.

2. It is intended that surface of concrete after stripping presents smooth, hard,

and dense finish that requires minimum amount of finishing.

3. Provide sufficient number of forms so that the work may be performed

rapidly and present uniform appearance in form patterns and finish.

4. Use forms that are clean and free from dirt, debris, concrete, and similar type

items. Coat with acceptable form release oil if required, prior to use or reuse.


A. Qualifications of Formwork Manufacturers: Use only forming systems




manufactured by manufacturers having minimum 5 years experience, except as

otherwise specified.

B. Regulatory Requirements: Install work of this Section in accordance with local,

state, and federal regulations.


A. Requirements Due to Weather Condition:

1. Removal of Formwork: Do not remove forms from concrete which has been

placed when outside ambient air temperature is below 50 degrees Fahrenheit

until concrete has attained specified strength as determined by test cylinders

stored in field under equivalent conditions as concrete structure.

PART 2 PRODUCTS

2.1 MATERIALS

A. Form Ties:

1. General:

a. Provide form ties for forming system selected that are manufactured

by recognized manufacturer of concrete forming equipment. b. Do not use wire ties or wood spreaders of any form.

c. Provide ties of type that accurately tie, lock, and spread forms.

d. Provide form ties of such design that when forms are removed they

locate no metal or other material within 1-1/2 inches of the surface of

the concrete.

e. Do not allow holes in forms for ties to allow leakage during

placement of concrete. 2. ConSnap or Flat Bar Form Ties:

a. Cone-snap ties shall form a cone shaped depression in the concrete

with a minimum diameter of 1 inch at the surface of the concrete and

1-1/2 inches deep.

b. Provide neoprene waterseal washer which is located near the center

of the concrete. 3. Taper Ties:

a. Neoprene Plugs for Taper Tie Holes: Size so that after they are

driven, plugs are located in center third of wall thickeners. b. Drypack Mortar for Filling Taper Tie Holes:

1) Consist of mix of one part of Portland Cement to one part of

plaster sand.

2) Amount of water to be added to cement-sand mix is to be




such that mortar can be driven into holes and be properly

compacted. 3) Admixtures or additives: Are not to be used in drypack

mortar.

B. Built-Up Plywood Forms:

1. Built-up plywood forms may be substituted for prefabricated forming

system following minimum requirements:

a. Size and Material:

1) Full size 4 by 8 feet plywood sheets, except where smaller

pieces are able to cover entire area.

2) Sheet Construction: 5-ply plywood sheets, 3/4 inch nominal,

made with 100 percent waterproof adhesive, and having finish

surface that is coated or overlaid with surface which is

impervious to water and alkaline calcium and sodium

hydroxide of cement.

b. Wales: Minimum 2 by 4 inch lumber.

c. Studding And Wales: Contain no loose knots and be free of warps,

cups, and bows.

C. Steel or Steel Framed Forms:

1. Steel Forms: Provide forms that are:

a. Rigidly constructed and capable of being braced for minimum

deflection of finish surface.

b. Capable of providing finish surfaces that are flat without bows, cups,

or dents.

2. Steel Framed Plywood Forms:

a. Provide forms that are rigidly constructed and capable of being

braced.

b. Plywood Paneling: 5-ply, 5/8 inch nominal or 3/4 inch nominal, made

with 100 percent waterproof adhesive, and having finish surface that

is coated or overlaid with surface which is impervious to water and

alkaline calcium and sodium hydroxide of cement.

D. Incidentals:

1. External Angles:

a. Where not otherwise indicated on the Drawings, provide with 3/4

inch bevel, formed by utilizing true dimensioned wood or solid

plastic chamfer strip on walkways, slabs, walls, beams, columns, and

openings.




b. Provide 1/4 inch bevel formed by utilizing true dimensioned wood or

solid plastic chamfer strip on walkways, walls, and slabs at

expansion, contraction, and construction joints.

2. Keyways: Steel, plastic, or lumber treated with form coating, applied

according to label directions.

3. Inserts: Dovetail Anchors or Ties.

4. Pipe Sleeves: Refer to Drawings for type, location, and sizes. All sleeves

shall be made of cast iron, unless noted otherwise.

PART 3 EXECUTION

3.1 EXAMINATION


1. Do not place any concrete until all forms have been thoroughly checked for

alignment, level, strength, and to assure accurate location of all mechanical

and electrical inserts or other embedded items.

3.2 INSTALLATION

A. Forms and Accessories:

1. Vertical Forms:

a. Remain in place minimum of 24 hours after concrete is placed.

b. If, after 24 hours, concrete has sufficient strength and hardness to

resist surface or other damage, forms may be removed.

2. Other Forms Supporting Concrete And Shoring: Remain in place as follows:

a. Sides of Footings: 24 hours minimum.

b. Vertical Sides of Beams, Girders, And Similar Members: 48 hours

minimum.

c. Slabs, Beams, and Girders: Until concrete strength reaches specified

strength or until shoring is installed.

d. Shoring for Slabs, Beams, and Girders: Shore until concrete strength

reaches specified strength.

e. Wall Bracing: Until concrete strength of beams and slabs laterally

supporting wall reaches specified strength.

B. Form Ties:

1. Cone-Snap Rod and Bar Ties: Tie forms together at not more than 2 foot

centers vertically and horizontally. After forms are removed from wall, fill




tie holes as follows:

a. Remove form ties from surfaces.

b. Roughen cone shaped tie holes by heavy sandblasting before repair.

c. Dry pack cone shaped tie holes with drypack mortar as specified in

Section 03600.

2. Taper Ties:

a. Neoprene Plug in Taper Tie Holes: After forms and taper ties are




removed from wall, plug tie holes with neoprene plug as follows:

1) Heavy sandblast and then clean tie holes.

2) After cleaning, drive neoprene plug into each of taper tie

holes with steel rod. Final location of neoprene plug shall be

in center third of wall thickness. Bond neoprene plug to

concrete with epoxy.

3) Locate steel rod in cylindrical recess, made in plug, during

driving:

a) At no time are plugs to be driven on flat area outside

cylindrical recess.

b. Dry Pack of Taper Tie Holes: After installing plugs in tie holes:

1) Coat tie hole surface with epoxy bonding agent and fill with

drypack mortar as specified in Section 03600. a) Drypack Mortar: Place in holes in layers with

thickness no exceeding tie hole diameter and heavily

compact each layer. b) Drypack the outside of the hole no sooner than 7 days

after the inside of the hole has been dry packed.

c) Wall surfaces in area of drypacked tie holes: On the water side of water containing structures and the

outside of below grade walls: (1) Cover with minimum of 10 mils of epoxy gel.

(2) Provide epoxy gel coating on wall surfaces

that extend minimum of 2 inches past drypack mortar filled tie holes.

(3) Provide finish surfaces that are free from sand

streaks or other voids. 3. For water retaining structures, use taper ties. No other type of tie will be

allowed.

C. Built-Up Plywood Forms: 1. Studding:

a. Spaced at 16 inches or 24 inches on center.

b. Closer spacing may be required depending upon strength requirements of the forms, in order to prevent any bulging surfaces on

faces of finished concrete work. c. Install studs perpendicular to grain of exterior plys of plywood sheets.

2. Wales: Form wales of double lumber material minimum size as specified in this Section.

3. Number of Form Reuses: Depends upon durability of surface coating of




overlay used, and ability to maintain forms in condition such that they are

capable of producing flat, smooth, hard, dense finish on concrete when




stripped.

D. Steel or Steel Framed Forms: 1. Steel Forms:

a. Adequately brace forms for minimum deflection of finish surface. 2. Steel Framed Plywood Forms:

a. Rigidly construct and brace with joints fitting closely and smoothly.

b. Number of Form Reuses: Depends upon durability of surface coating or overlay used.

3. Built-Up Plywood Forms: As specified in this Section may be used in

conjunction with steel forms or steel framed plywood forms for special forming conditions such as corbels and forming around items which will

project through forms.

E. Bracing and Alignment of Forms:

1. Line and Grade: Limit deviations to tolerances which will permit proper installation of structural embedded items or mechanical and electrical

equipment and piping.

2. Formwork:

a. Securely brace, support, tie down, or otherwise hold in place to

prevent any movement.

b. Make adequate provisions for uplift pressure, lateral pressure on

forms, and defection of forms.

3. When Second Lift is Placed on Hardened Concrete: Take special precautions

in formwork at top of old lift and bottom of new lift to prevent:

a. Spreading and vertical or horizontal displacement of forms.

b. Grout “bleeding” on finish concrete surfaces.

4. Pipe Stubs, Anchor Bolts, and Other Embedded Items: Set in forms where

required.

5. Cracks, Openings, or Offsets At Joints in Formwork: Close those that are

1/16 inch or larger by tightening forms of by filling with acceptable crack

filler.

F. Incidentals:

1. Keyways: Construct keyways as indicated on the Drawings.

2. Reentrant Angles: May be left square.

3. Level Strips: Install level strips at top of wall concrete placements to maintain

true line at horizontal construction joints.

4. Inserts:

a. Encase pipes, anchor bolts, steps, reglets, castings, and other inserts,




as indicated on the Drawings or as required, in concrete.




b. Use dovetail anchors or ties in conjunction with slots or inserts for

various materials as specified under other sections of these

Specifications and as may be necessary for required work.

G. Pipe and Conduit:

1. Install pipe and conduit in structures as indicated on the Drawings, and seal

with materials as specified in Section 07900, unless otherwise specified.

H. Tolerances:

1. Finish concrete shall conform to shapes, lines, grades, and dimensions

indicated on the Drawings.

2. The maximum deviation from true line and grade shall not exceed tolerances

listed below at time of acceptance of project.

3. General: Comply with ACI 117, paragraphs 2.0 through 2.2 and paragraphs

4.0 through 4.5, except as modified in following:

a. Slabs:

1) Slope: Uniformly sloped to drain when slope is indicated on

the Drawings.

2) Slabs Indicated to be Level: Have maximum deviation of 1/8

inch in 10 feet without any apparent changes in grade.

b. Inserts: Set inserts to tolerances require for proper installation and

operation of equipment or systems to which insert pertains.

c. Maximum Tolerances: As follows:

Item Inches

Sleeves and Inserts Plus 1/8 Minus 1/8

Projected Ends of Anchor

Bolts

Plus 1/4 Minus 0.0

Anchor Bolt Setting Plus 1/16 Minus 1/16

END OF SECTION




SECTION 03200

CONCRETE REINFORCEMENT

PART 1 GENERAL

1.1 SUMMARY

A. Section Includes: Concrete reinforcement.


1. Section 03100 - Concrete Formwork.

2. Section 03300 - Cast-In-Place Concrete.

1.2 REFERENCES

A. American Concrete Institute (ACI):

1. SP-66-ACI - Detailing Manual.

2. 315 - Details and Details of Concrete Reinforcement.

3. 318 - Building Code Requirements for Reinforced Concrete.


1. A 143 - Standard Practice for Safeguarding Against Embrittlement of Hot-

Dip Galvanized Structural Steel Products and Procedure, for Detecting

Embrittlement.

2. A 185 - Standard Specification for Steel Welded Wire, Fabric, Plain, for

Concrete Reinforcement.

3. A615 - Standard Specification for Zinc-Coated (Galvanized) Steel Bars for

Deformed and Plain Billet-Steel Bars.

4. A 767 - Standard Specification for Zinc-Coated (Galvanized) Steel Bars for

Concrete Reinforcement.

5. ASTM E8 - Standard Test Methods for Tensile Testing of Metalic Materials.

6. ASTM A 706 - Standard Specification for Low-Alloy Steel Deformed and

Plain Bars for Concrete Reinforcement.

C. American Welding Society (AWS):

1. D1.4 - Structural Welding Code - Reinforcing Steel.


A. The Drawings contain general notes concerning amount of reinforcement and

placing, details for reinforcement at wall corners and intersections, and details of

extra reinforcement around openings in concrete.

1.4 SUBMITTALS




A. Shop Drawings:

1. Shop Drawings on Reinforcing Steel:

a. Submit to the ENGINEER reinforcing steel detail drawings in

accordance with Contract Documents.

b. Changes to Reinforcing Steel Contract Drawing Requirements:

1) Indicate in separate letter submitted with shop drawings any

changes of requirements indicated on the drawings for

reinforcing steel.

2) Such changes will not be acceptable unless the ENGINEER

has accepted such changes in writing.


A. Packing And Shipping:

1. Deliver bars bundled and tagged with identifying tags.

B. Acceptance At Site:

1. Reinforcing Bars: Deliver reinforcing bars accompanied by manufacturer’s

guarantee of grade.

C. Storage:

1. All rebar shall be stored on dunnage.


A. Bar Supports: Do not place concrete until samples and attached data of bar supports

has been accepted by the ENGINEER.

PART 2 PRODUCTS

2.1 MATERIALS

A. Reinforcement:

1. General: Provide reinforcing steel that is new material, of quality specified,

free from excessive rust or scale or any defects affecting its usefulness.

B. Reinforcing Bars:

1. Reinforcing Bars to be Embedded in Concrete or Masonry: Grade 60

deformed bars conforming to ASTM A 615 except as specified in the next

subparagraph.

2. Reinforcement resisting earthquake-induced flexural and axial forces in

concrete frame members and in concrete wall boundary members shall

comply with low alloy ASTM A 706. ASTM A 615 Grade 60 reinforcement

may be used in these members if the following requirements are met:

a. The actual yield strength based on mill tests does not exceed the

specified yield strength by more than 18,000 pounds per square inch




(retest shall not exceed this value by more than an additional 3,000

pounds per square inch).

b. The ratio of the actual ultimate tensile stress to the actual tensile yield

strength is not less than 1.25. 3. Hot-Dip Galvanized Reinforcing Bars:

a. When reinforcing bars are indicated on the Drawings to be hot-dip

galvanized, perform such galvanizing in accordance with ASTM A

767 and ATM A 143.

b. Galvanizing: Galvanize bars in conformance with Class 1 coating and

perform galvanizing after fabrication and shearing.

4. Thread Bars:

a. Provide thread bars having continuous rolled-in patter of thread-like

deformations along entire length.

b. Provide hex nuts and couplers for the thread bars that develop 125

percent of yield strength of bar.

c. Thread Bars:

1) Conform to ASTM A 615 Grade 60.

d. Do not substitute cut threads on regular reinforcing bars for thread

bars.

C. Bar Supports:

1. Reinforcement Support Chairs:

a. Hot-dip galvanized steel. Provide hot-dip galvanized steel with plastic

tips at surfaces which will be exposed to view. Use unless otherwise


b. Stainless Steel where indicated on the Drawings.

c. Provide concrete adobe blocks to support rebar associated with

building foundation slabs.

d. Other suitable material approved by ENGINEER.

D. Tie Wires: Annealed Steel.

2.2 FABRICATION

A. Shop Assembly:

1. Cut and bend bars in accordance with provisions of ACI 315 and ACI 318.

2. Bend bars cold.

3. Provide bars free from defects and kinks and from bends not indicated on the

Drawings.

PART 3 EXECUTION

EXAMINATION





1. Reinforcing Bars:

a. Verify that bars are new stock free from rust scale, loose mill scale,

excessive rust, dirt, oil, and other coatings which adversely affect

bonding capacity when placed in the work.

3.2 PREPARATION


1. Reinforcing Bars: Thin coating of red rust resulting from short exposure will

not be considered objectionable. Thoroughly clean any bars having rust

scale, lose mill scale, or thick rust coat.

2. Cleaning of Reinforcement Materials: Remove concrete of other deleterious

coatings from dowels and other projecting bars by wire brushing or

sandblasting before bars are embedded in subsequent concrete placement.

3.3 INSTALLATION

A. Reinforcing Bars:

1. No field bending of bars will be allowed on bars larger than #4.

2. Welding:

a. Weld reinforcing bars where indicted on the Drawings or acceptable

to the ENGINEER.

b. Perform welding in accordance with AWS D1.4.

B. Placing Reinforcing Bars:

1. Accurately place bars and adequately secure them in position.

2. Overlap bars at splices as specified or indicated on the Drawings.

3. Unless specifically otherwise indicated on the Drawings, install bars at lap

splices in contact with each other and fasten bars together with tie wire.

4. If lap splice length for bars in concrete is not specified or indicated on the

Drawings, bars shall be lap spliced in accordance with ACI 318.

5. Bar Supports:

a. Provide in sufficient number to prevent sagging and to support loads

during construction, but in no case less than quantities and at

locations as indicated in ACI 315.

b. Support reinforcing for concrete places on ground by standard

manufactured chairs, with steel plates for resting on ground.

c. Do not use brick, broken concrete masonry units, spalls, rocks, or

similar material for supporting reinforcing steel.

6. If not indicated on the Drawings, provide protective concrete cover in

accordance with ACI 318.

C. Tying of Bar Reinforcement:

1. Fasten bars securely in place with wire ties.




2. Tie bars sufficiently often to prevent shifting.

3. There shall be at least 3 ties in each bar length (does not apply to dowel lap

splices or to bars shorter than 4 feet, unless necessary for rigidity).

4. Tie slab bars at every intersection around periphery of slab.

5. Tie wall bar and slab bar intersections other than around periphery at not less

than every fourth intersection, but at not greater than following maximum

spacing:

Bar Size Slab Bars Spacing

(Inches)

Wall Bars Spacing

(Inches)

Bars Number 5 and Smaller 60 48

Bars Number 6 through Number 9 96 60

Bars Number 10 and Number 11 120 96

6. After tying wire ties, bend ends of wire ties in towards the center of the

concrete section. Wire ties shall conform to the cover requirements of the

reinforcing bars.

7. Above tying requirements do not apply to reinforcement for masonry. Refer

to Division 4 for tying requirements for masonry.

D. Lap Splices of Reinforcing Bars:

1. Where bars are to be lapped spliced at joints in concrete, ensure bars project

from concrete first placed, minimum length equal to lap splice length


2. Where lap splice length is not indicated on the Drawings, then provide lap

splice length as specified in ACI 318 and this Division.

E. Welded Wire Fabric Reinforcement:

1. Install necessary wiring, spacing chairs, or supports to keep welded wire

fabric in place while concrete is being placed.

2. Bend fabric as indicated on the Drawings or required to fit work.

3. Unroll or otherwise straighten fabric to make perfectly flat sheet before

placing in the Work.

4. Lap splice welded wire fabric as indicated on the Drawings.

5. If lap splice length is not shown on the Drawings, splice fabric in accordance

with ACI 318.

END OF SECTION




SECTION 03300

CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE

PART 1 GENERAL

1.1 SUMMARY

A. Section Includes: Cast-in-place concrete.


1. Section 03100 - Concrete Formwork. 2. Section 03200 - Concrete Reinforcement.

3. Section 03301 - Epoxies.

4. Section 03356 - Tooled Concrete Finishes.

5. Section 07900 - Joint Sealers.

1.2 REFERENCES

A. American Concrete Institute (ACI): 1. 318 - Building Code Requirements for Reinforced Concrete.

2. Manuals of Concrete Practice.

3. Recommended Practices.


1. C 31 - Test Methods for Making and Curing Concrete Test Specimens in the

Field. 2. C 33 - Specifications for Concrete Aggregates.

3. C 39 - Test Method for Compressive Strength of Cylindrical Concrete

Specimens. 4. C 40 - Test Method for Organic Impurities in Fine Aggregates for Concrete.

5. C 42 - Method of Obtaining and Testing Drilled Cores and Sawed Beams of

Concrete.

6. C 88 - Test Method of Soundness of Aggregates by Use of Sodium Sulfate

or Magnesium Sulfate. 7. C 94 - Specification for Ready-Mixed Concrete. 8. C 114 - Test Methods for Chemical Analysis of Hydraulic Cement.

9. C 117 - Standard Test for Materials Finer Than 75ìm (No. 200) Sieve in

Mineral Aggregate. 10. C 123 - Standard Test Method for Light Weight Particles in Aggregate.

11. C 131 - Test Method for Resistance to Degradation of Small-Size Coarse

Aggregate by Abrasion and Impact in the Los Angeles Machine. 12. C 136 - Test Method for Sieve Analysis of Fine and Coarse Aggregates.

13. C 142 - Standard Test Method for Clay Lumps and Friable Particles in




Aggregate.

14. C 143 - Test Method for Slump of Hydraulic Cement Concrete.

15. C 150 - Specification for Portland Cement.

16. C 157 - Test Method for Length Change of Hardened Hydraulic Cement

Mortar and Concrete. 17. C 172 - Practice for Sampling Freshly Mixed Concrete.

18. C 173 - Test Method for Air Content of Freshly Mixed Concrete by the

Volumetric Method.

19. C 203 - Test Methods for Breaking Load and Flexural Properties of Block-

Type Thermal Insulation. 20. C 227 - Test Method for Potential Alkali Reactivity of Cement-Aggregate

Combinations (Mortar-Bar Method).

21. C 260 - Specification for Air-Entraining Admixtures for Concrete.

22. C 289 - Test Method for Potential Alkali-Silica Reactivity of Aggregates

(Chemical Method). 23. C 295 - Standard Guide for Petrographic Examination of Aggregate for

Concrete.

24. C 309 - Standard Specification for Liquid Membrane-Forming Compounds

for Curing Concrete. 25. C 311 - Test Methods for Sampling and Testing Fly Ash or Natural

Pozzolans for Use as a Mineral Admixture in Portland Cement Concrete.

26. C 469 - Test Method for Static Modulus of Elasticity and Poisson’s Ratio of

Concrete in Compression. 27. C 494 - Specification for Chemical Admixtures for Concrete.

28. C 595 - Specification for Blended Hydraulic Cements.

29. C 618 - Specification for Coal Fly Ash and Raw or Calcined Natural

Pozzolan for Use as a Mineral Admixture in Portland Cement Concrete. 30. D 75 - Practices for Sampling Aggregates.

1.3 DEFINITIONS

A. Alkali: Is defined to mean sum of sodium oxide and potassium oxide calculated as

sodium oxide.

B. Hairline Crack: Crack with a crack width of less than 4 thousandths of an inch.


A. Performance Requirements: 1. General:

a. Except as otherwise specified, provide concrete composed of portland

cement, fine aggregate, coarse aggregate, and water so proportioned and mixed as to produce plastic, workable mixture in accordance with

requirements as specified in this Section and suitable to specific conditions of placement.




b. Proportion materials in manner such as to secure lowest water-cement

ratio which is consistent with good workability, plastic, cohesive mixture, and one which is within specified slump range.

c. Proportion fine and coarse aggregate in manner such as not to

produce harshness in placing nor honeycombing in structures. 2. Watertightness of Concrete Work: It is intent of this Section to secure for

every part of the Work, concrete and grout of homogeneous structure, which

when hardened will have required strength, watertightness, and durability.

a. It is recognized that some surface hairline cracks and crazing will

develop in the concrete surfaces. b. Construction, contraction, and expansion joints have been positioned

in structures as indicated on the Drawings, and curing methods specified, for purpose of reducing number and size of these expected

cracks, due to normal expansion and contraction expected from specified concrete mixes.

c. Class A and Class B Concrete: Watertight. Repair cracks which develop in walls or slabs and repair cracks which show any signs of

leakage until all leakage is stopped.

d. Pressure inject visible cracks, other than hairline cracks and crazing, in following areas with epoxy injection system:

1) Floors and walls of water bearing structures. 2) Walls and slabs which are exposed to weather or may be

washed down and are not specified to receive separate

waterproof membrane. 3) Epoxy used for Injection: Provide epoxy materials that are

new and use them within shelf life limitations set forth by

manufacturer. Water-insensitive 2 part type low viscosity epoxy adhesive material containing 100 percent solids and

meeting or exceeding the following characteristics when tested in accordance with standards specified Manufacturer:

a) Master Builders, Inc., Concressive Standard LVI. b) Sika Chemical Corp.’s, Sikadur 35, Hi-Mod LV.

e. Walls or Slabs, as Specified Above, That Leak or Sweat Because of

porosity or Cracks too Small for Successful Pressure Grouting: Seal

on water or weather side by coatings of surface sealant system, as specified in this Section.

f. Grouting and Sealing: Continue as specified above until structure is watertight and remains watertight for not less than one year after final

acceptance or date of final repair, whichever occurs later in time.

3. Workmanship and Methods: Provide concrete work, including detailing of reinforcing, conforming with best standard practices and as set forth in ACI

318, Manuals, and Recommended Practices.

1.5 SUBMITTALS

A. Product Data: Submit data completely describing products.




B. Information on Heating Equipment to be Used for Cold Weather Concreting: Submit information on type of equipment to be used for heating materials and/or new

concrete in process of curing during excessively cold weather.

C. For Conditions that Promote Rapid Drying of Freshly Placed Concrete Such as Low Humidity, High Temperature, and Wind: Submit corrective measures proposed for

use prior to placing concrete.

D. Copies of Tests of Concrete Aggregates: Submit certified copies in triplicate of

commercial laboratory tests of all samples concrete aggregates. 1. On tests of concrete aggregates, indicate as minimum all specified tests.

E. Concrete Mixes: Prior to placement of concrete, submit full details, including mix

design calculations for concrete mixes proposed for use for each class of concrete. 1. Include information on correction of batching for varying moisture contents

fo fine aggregate.

2. Submit source quality test records with mix design submittal.

F. If there is Change in Aggregate Source, or Aggregate Quality from Same Source:

Submit new set of design mixes covering each class of concrete.

G. Batch Test Data (from supplier): 1. Submit data for each test cylinder.

2. Submit data that identifies mix and slump for each test cylinder.

H. Repair of defective concrete: Submit mix design for grout.

I. Acceptance of Method of Concrete Repair: Do not make any repairs until the ENGINEER has accepted method of preparing surfaces and proposed method of

repair.

J. Quality Control Submittals:

1. Certificates of Compliance: a) Cement: Submit certified copy of mill tests, including alkali content,

representative of each shipment of cement for verification of

compliance with specified requirements.

b) Pozzolan:

1) Submit certificates by Pozzolan supplier.

2) Submit certificates that identify source of pozzolan and

certify compliance with requirements of ASTM C 618.


A. Packing And Shipping:




1. Deliver, store, and handle concrete materials in manner as to prevent damage

and inclusion of foreign substances. 2. Deliver and store packaged materials in original containers until ready for

use.

3. Deliver aggregate to mixing site and handle in such manner that variations in moisture content will not interfere with steady production of concrete of

specified degree of uniformity and slump.

B. Acceptance at Site: Reject material containers or materials showing evidence of

water or other damage.


A. Environmental Requirements:

1. Hot Weather Conditions: a. When Ambient Air Temperature is Above 90 Degrees Fahrenheit:

Prior to placing concrete, cool forms and reinforcing steel by water cooling to below 90 degrees Fahrenheit.

b. Temperature of Concrete Mix at Time of Placement: Keep

temperature below 90 degrees Fahrenheit by methods which do not impair quality of concrete.

2. Cold Weather Conditions: a. Concrete Placed Below Ambient Air Temperature of 45 degrees

Fahrenheit and falling or below 40 degrees Fahrenheit: Make provision for heating water.

b. If Material Have Been Exposed to Freezing Temperatures to Degree

That Any Material is Below 35 degrees Fahrenheit: Heat such materials.

c. Heating Water, Cement, or Aggregate Materials: 1) Do not heat in excess of 160 degrees Fahrenheit.

d. Protection of Concrete in Forms:

1) Protect by means of covering with tarpaulins, or other

acceptable covering. 2) Provide means for circulating warm moist air around forms in

manner to maintain temperature of 50 degrees Fahrenheit for at least 5 days.

3. For Conditions That Promote Rapid Drying of Freshly Placed Concrete Such

As Low Humidity, High Temperature, and Wind: Take corrective measures to minimize rapid water loss from concrete:

a. Furnish and use sufficient number of maximum and minimum self- recording thermometers to adequately measure temperature around

concrete.


A. Schedule placing of concrete in such manner as to complete any single placing

operation to construction, contraction, or expansion joint.




PART 2 PRODUCTS

2.1 MATERIALS

A. Aggregate:

1. General:Provide concrete aggregates that are sound, uniformly graded, and

free of deleterious material in excess of allowable amounts specified. a. Grade aggregate in accordance with ASTM D 75 and C 136.

b. Provide unit weight of fine and coarse aggregate which produces in

place concrete with weight of not less than 140 pounds per cubic foot.

B. Fine Aggregate:

1. Provide fine aggregate for concrete or mortar consisting of clean, natural sand

or of sand prepared from crushed stone or crushed gravel. 2. Do not provide aggregate having deleterious substances in excess of

following percentages by weight of contaminating substances. In no case

shall total exceed percent listed.

Item Test Method Percent

Removed by decantation (dirt, silt, etc.) ASTM C 117 3

Shale or Chert ASTM C 295 1

Clay Lumps ASTM C 142 1

3. Except as otherwise specified, grade fine aggregate from coarse to fine in

accordance with requirements of ASTM C 33.

C. Coarse Aggregate: 1. General: Provide coarse aggregate consisting of gravel or crushed stone made

up of clean, hard, durable particles free from calcareous coatings, organic

matter, or other foreign substances.

2. Weight: Not exceeding 15 percent, for thin or elongated pieces having length

greater than 5 times average thickness. 3. Deleterious Substances: Not in excess of following percentages by weight,

and in no case having total of all deleterious substances exceeding 2 percent.

Item Test Method Percent

Shale or chert ASTM C 295 1

Coal and Lignite ASTM C 123 1/4




Clay lumps and friable

particles

ASTM C 142 1/4

Materials finer than

Number 200 sieve

ASTM C 117 ½*

* Except when material finer than Number 200 sieve consists of

crusher dust, maximum amount shall be 1 percent.

4. Grading:

a. Aggregate: As specified in ASTM C 33, Size Number 57, except as

otherwise specified or authorized in writing by the ENGINEER. b. Aggregate for Class CE Concrete for Encasement of Electrical

Conduits:

1) Graded as specified in ASTM C 33, Size Number 8.

2) Provide concrete utilizing this aggregate equal to Class C

concrete in all other respects, and is designated as Class CE. D. Portland Cement:

1. General: Conform to specifications and tests for ASTM C 150, Types II or

III, Low Alkali, except as specified otherwise.

2. Low Alkali Portland: Have total alkali containing not more than 0.60 percent.

3. Exposed Concrete in Any Individual Structure: Use only one brand of

Portland cement. 4. Cement For Finishes: Provide cement from same source and of same type as

concrete to be finished.

E. Portland-Pozzolan Cement: 1. General: Conform to requirements of ASTM C 595, Type IP (MS).

2. Portland Cement Clinker Used In Manufacture of Portland-Pozzolan Cement: Type II low alkali as specified in Paragraph 2.01D.

3. Pozzolan Content of Portland-Pozzolan Cement: Not exceed 15 percent by

weight.

4. Exposed Concrete in Any Individual Structure: Use only one brand of portland-pozzolan cement.

F. Admixtures: 1. General:

a. Do not use admixtures of any type, except as specified, unless written

authorization has been obtained from the ENGINEER. b. Compatible with concrete and other admixtures.

c. Do not use admixtures containing chlorides calculated as chloride ion in excess of 5% by weight.

d. Use in accordance with manufacturer’s recommendations accordance

with manufacture’s recommendations and add each admixture to concrete mix separately.

e. A single manufacturer shall provide all concrete admixtures.




2. Air Entraining Admixture:

a. Provide all concrete with 5 percent, plus or minus 1 percent, entrained

air of evenly dispersed air bubbles at time of placement. b. Conform to ASTM C 260.

3. Fly Ash Pozzolan Admixture: a. Pozzolan:

1) Ad mixture shall conform to requirements of ASTM C618,

Class F in concrete made with Type II portland cement.

2) Pozzolan may replace portland cement at ratio of 1.0 pound

fly ash for each pound of portland cement replaced. 3) Maximum of 20 percent by weight of minimum quantities of

portland cement listed in Table A under paragraph 2.03E may

be replaced with pozzolan.

4) Do not use pozzolan as an admixture in concrete made with

portland-pozzolan cement.

b. Loss on Ignition for Pozzolan: Not exceed four percent. 4. Water Reducing Admixture:

a. May be used at the CONTRACTOR’s option in all areas.

b. Conform to ASTM C 494, Type A or Type D.

c. Not contain air entraining agents. d. Liquid form before adding to the concrete mix.

e. No decrease in cement is permitted as result of use of water reducing

admixture. 5. Superplasticizers: Are not to be used without acceptance by ENGINEER.

G. Water: 1. Water for Concrete, Washing Aggregate, and Curing Concrete: Clean and

free from oil and deleterious amounts alkali, acid, organic matter, or other

substances.

2. Chlorides and Sulfate Ions: a. Water for Conventional Reinforced Concrete: Use water not

containing more than 1,000 milligrams per liter of chlorides

calculated as chloride ion, nor more than 1,000 milligrams per liter of sulfates calculated as sulfate ion.

H. Nonslip Abrasive: 1. Type: Aluminum oxide abrasive of size 8/16, having structure of hard

aggregate, homogenous, nonglazing, rustproof, and unaffected by freezing, moisture, or cleaning compounds.

2. Manufacturers: One of the following or equal:

a. Exolon Company, Tonawanda, New York.

b. Abrasive Materials, Incorporated, Hillsdale, Michigan.

I. Concrete Sealer: 1. Manufacturers: One of the following or equal:




a. Hillyard Chemical Company, St. Joseph, Missouri, SEAL 341.

b. A. C. Horn, Inc., Horn Clear Seal EM-180.

J. Conduit Encasement Coloring Agent:

1. Color: Red color concrete used for encasement of electrical ducts, conduits,

similar type items. 2. Manufacturers: One of the following or equal.

a. Frank D. Davis Company, Red Oxide Number 1117.

b. I. Reiss Company, Inc., equivalent product.

K. Keyway Material: Steel, plastic, or lumber.

L. Sprayed Membrane Curing Compound: Clear type with fugitive dye conforming to

ASTM C 309, Type 1D, unless noted otherwise. After curing, and if subsequent

coatings or toppings are specified, the curing compound shall be removed per

manufacturer’s recommendations.

M. Surface Sealant System: Manufacturers: One of the following or equal:

1. Radcon Laboratories, Inc., Las Vegas, Nevada, Formula Number 7.

2. IPA Systems, Philadelphia, Pennsylvania, Duripal.

2.2 EQUIPMENT

A. Mixing Concrete: 1. Mixers may be of stationary plant, paver, or truck mixer type.

2. Provide adequate equipment and facilities for accurate measurement and control of materials and for readily changing proportions of material.

3. Mixing Equipment: a. Capable of combining aggregates, cement, and water within specified

time into thoroughly mixed and uniform mass and of discharging mixture without segregation.

b. Maintain concrete mixing plant and equipment in good working order and operated at loads, speeds, and timing recommended by

manufacturer or as specified.

c. Proportion cement and aggregate by weight.

B. Machine Mixing:

1. Batch plant shall be capable of controlling delivery of all material to mixer

within 1 percent by weight of individual material. 2. If bulk cement is used, weigh it on separate visible scale which will

accurately register scale load at any stage of weighing operation from zero to

full capacity.

3. Prevent cement from coming into contact with aggregate or with water until

materials are in mixer ready for complete mixing with all mixing water. 4. Procedure of mixing cement with sand or with sand and coarse aggregate for




delivery to project site, for final mixing and addition of mixing water will not be permitted.

5. Retempering of concrete will not be permitted.

6. Discharge entire batch before recharging.

7. Volume of Mixed Material Per Batch: Not exceed manufacturer’s rated

capacity of mixer.

8. Mixers:

a. Perform mixing in batch mixers of acceptable type.

b. Equip each mixer with device for accurately measuring and indicating

quantity of water entering concrete, and operating mechanism such

that leakage will not occur when valves are closed.

c. Equip each mixer with device for automatically measuring,

indicating, and controlling time required for mixing. d. Interlock device to prevent discharge of concrete from mixer before

expiration of mixing period. ransit-Mixed Concrete:

9. Mix and deliver in accordance with ASTM C 94. 10. Total Elapsed Time Between Addition of Water at Batch Plant and

Discharging Completed Mix: Not to exceed 90 minutes of elapsed time. At

project site shall not exceed 30 minutes.

11. Under conditions contributing to quick setting, total elapsed time permitted

may be reduced by the ENGINEER. 12. Equip Each truck mixer with device interlocked so as to prevent discharge of

concrete from drum before required number of turns and furnish such device that is capable of counting number of revolutions of drum.

13. Continuously revolve drum after it is once started until it has completely

discharged its batch: a. Do not admit water until drum has started revolving. b. Right is reserved to increase required minimum number of

revolutions or to decrease designated maximum number of

revolutions allowed, if necessary, to obtain satisfactory mixing. The Contractor will not be entitled to additional compensation because of

such increase or decrease.

C. Other Types of Mixers: 1. In case of other types of mixers, mixing shall be as follows:

a. Mix concrete until there is uniform distribution of materials, and

discharge mixer completely before recharging.

b. Neither speed nor volume loading of mixer shall exceed

manufacturer’s recommendations. c. Continue mixing for minimum of 1-1/2 minutes after all materials are

in drum, and for batches larger than one cubic yard increase minimum time 15 seconds for each additional cubic yard or fraction thereof.

2.3 MIXES




A. Measurements of Materials:

1. Measure materials by weighing, except as otherwise specified or where other

methods are specifically authorized in writing by the ENGINEER. 2. Furnish apparatus for weighing aggregates and cement that is suitably

designed and constructed for this purpose.

3. Accuracy of Weighing Devices: Furnish devices that have capability of




providing successive quantities of individual material that can be measured

to within on percent of desired amount of that material. 4. Measuring or Weighing Devices: Subject to review by the OWNER, and bear

valid seal of the Sealer of Weights and Measures having jurisdiction.

5. Weighing Cement: a. Weigh cement separately.

b. Cement in Unbroken Standard Packages (Sacks): Need not be

weighed. c. Bulk Cement and Fractional Packages: Weigh such cement.

6. Mixing Water: Measured by volume or by weight.

B. Concrete Proportions and Consistency:

1. Concrete Consistency and Composition: a. Provide concrete that can be worked readily into corners and angles

of forms and around reinforcement without excessive vibration and without permitting materials to segregate or free water to collect on

surface.

b. Prevent unnecessaryor haphazard changes in consistencyof concrete.

2. Ratio of Coarse Aggregate to Fine Aggregate: Not less than 1.0 nor more than 2.0 for all concrete Classes, with exception of Class CE.

3. Aggregate: a. Obtain aggregate from source which is capable of providing uniform

quality, moisture content, and grading during any single day’s operation.

4. Concrete Mix Water to Cement Ratio, Minimum Cement Content, and Slump Range: Conform to values specified in Table A in this Section unless

otherwise specified.

5. Concrete Batch Weights: Control and adjust so as to secure maximum yield,

and at all times maintain proportions of concrete mix within specified limits. 6. Mixture Modification: If required, by the OWNER, modify mixture within

limits set forth in this Section.

C. Concrete Mixes:

1. Proportioning of Concrete Mix: Proportion mixes with required average compressive strength (f’ cr) as defined in Subparagraph 2.04A.

2. Mixes: a. Adjusting of Water: After acceptance, do not change mixes without

acceptance by ENGINEER, except that at all times adjust batching of water to compensate for free moisture content of fine aggregate.

b. Total Water Content of Each Concrete Class: Not exceed those specified in Table A in this Section.

c. Checking Moisture Content of Fine Aggregate: Furnish satisfactory means at batching plant for checking moisture content of fine

aggregate.

3. Change in Mixes:

a. Undertake new trial batch and test program as specified in this




Section.

b. Each New Trial Batch and Test Program: Cost of such trail batches

and test program shall be borne by CONTRACTOR.

D. Hand Mixed Concrete:

1. Perform hand mixing of concrete only when requested by the

CONTRACTOR in writing and accepted by the OWNER.

2. Prepare hand mixed concrete on watertight, level platform in batches not to

exceed 1/3 cubic yard each. 3. Aggregate:

a. First spread required amount of coarse aggregate on platform in an

even and uniform layer, and then over such aggregate spread proper proportion of fine aggregate.

b. Combined Depth of Both Such Layers: Not be greater than one foot.

4. Cement: a. First evenly spread required quantity of cement over fine aggregate.

b. Then turn entire batch with shovels at least twice before adding water.

5. Water:

a. Then uniformly sprinkle or spray proper amount of water over

batched materials. b. Then turn with shovels not less than three times before being

removing from platform.

E. Classes of Concrete: 1. Provide concrete consisting of six classes, referred herein as Classes A, AAA,

B, C, D and CE specified in this Section and use where specified or indicated

on the Drawings.

2. Weight of Concrete Classes: Provide classes of concrete having minimum

weight of 140 pounds per cubic foot. 3. Class B Concrete: Class B concrete may be substituted for Class A concrete,

if high-early strength concrete is desired by the CONTRACTOR, only in those areas specifically accepted by ENGINEER and which do not require

sulfate resistant concrete.

4. Class C Concrete: Class C concrete may be used for fill for unauthorized excavation, for thrust blocks and ground anchors for piping, for bedding of

pipe, and where indicated on the Drawings.

5. Class D Concrete: Use Class D for precast concrete items.

6. Class CE Concrete: Use Class CE for electrical conduit encasements.

7. All other concrete, unless specified or otherwise indicated on the Drawings:

Use Class A concrete.

TABLE A - CONCRETE

Class 8.Specified Compressive

Strength f’c at 28 Days (Pounds per

Square Inch)

Maximum Net

Water to

Cement Ratio

Minimum Cement

per Cubic Yard

of Concrete by

Weight (Pounds)

Slump

Range

(Inches)




A 4,000 0.53 564 2 to 4*

AAA 3,000 0.57 470 2 to 4*

B

(Type III cement)

4,000 0.53 564 2 to 4*

C 2,500 0.71 423 3 to 6

D 4,500 0.45 658 2 to 4

CE 2,500 0.71 423 3 to 6

* NOTE: Slump for slabs, decks, walks, and beams shall be not more than 3-1/2 inches.

8. Pumped Concrete: Provide pumped concrete that complies with all

requirements of this Section.

9. Do not place concrete with slump outside limits indicated in Table A. 10. Classes:

a. Classes A, C, D, and CE Concrete: Make with Type II low alkali cement.

b. Class B Concrete: Make with Type III low alkali cement.

c. Admixtures: Provide admixtures as specified in this Section.

2.4 SOURCE QUALITY CONTROL

A. Tests: 1. Concrete Mixes:

a. After acceptance of concrete mixes, have trial batches of the accepted proposed concrete mix designs prepared by testing laboratory

acceptable to the ENGINEER.

b. Prepare trial batches by using specified cement and aggregates

proposed to be used for the Work. c. Trial Batches: Provide batches of sufficient quantity to determine

slump, workability, consistency and finishing characteristics, and to provide sufficient test cylinders.

d. Test Cylinders: Provide cylinders having six inch diameter by 12 inch length and that are prepared in accordance with ASTM C 31 for tests

specified in this Section.

e. Determine slump in accordance with ASTM C 143. f. Test Cylinders:

1) Test 4 cylinders for compressive strength in accordance with

ASTM C 39: a) Test 1 cylinder at 7 days and 2 at 28 days. b) Establish ratio between 7 day and 28 day strength for

mix. Seven day strength may be taken as satisfactory indication of 28 day strength provided effects on

concrete of temperature and humidity between 7 day and 28 day are taken into account.




2) Average Compressive Strength of 2 Test Cylinders Tested at 28 Days: Equal to or greater than required average

compressive strength f’cr on which concrete mix design is

based.

2. Pozzolan:

a. Sampling And Testing:

1) Sample and test pozzolan in accordance with ASTM C 311. 2) In Computing Water-Cement Ratio and Cement Content Per

Cubic Yard of Concrete: Consider cement weight to be

weight of portland cement plus 100 percent of weight of fly ash.

3. Aggregate: a. Testing of concrete aggregate is at CONTRACTOR’s expense.

b. Sieves:

a. Use sieves with square openings for testing grading of

aggregates. b. Sieve Analysis: If sieve analyses indicate significant change

in materials, the ENGINEER may require that new mix

design be submitted and accepted before further placing of

concrete.

c. Sample aggregate in accordance with ASTM D 75 and C 136. d. Fine Aggregate:

a. Provide fine aggregate not containing strong alkali nor organic matter which gives color darker than standard color

when tested in accordance with ASTM C 40. b. Provide aggregate having soundness complying with

requirements of ASTM C 33 when tested in accordance with

ASTM C 88.

c. Provide aggregate complying with reactivity requirements of

ASTM C 33 when tested in accordance with ASTM C 289. e. Coarse Aggregate:

a. Soundness when tested in accordance with ASTM C 88: Have

loss not greater than 10 percent when tested with sodium sulfate.

b. Abrasion Loss: Not exceed 45 percent after 500 revolutions

when tested in accordance with ASTM C 131. c. Reactivity: Not exceed limits specified in Appendix of ASTM

C 33 when tested in accordance with ASTM C 227.

f. Portland Cement:

1) Determination Alkali Content: Determine by method set forth in ASTM C 114.

PART 3 EXECUTION




3.1 INSTALLATION

A. Conduit Encasement Concrete: Mix into each cubic yard of concrete 10 pounds of

coloring agent.

B. Joints and Bonding: 1. As far as practicable construct concrete work as monolith.

2. Locations of contraction, construction, expansion, and other joints are

indicated on the Drawings or as specified in this Section. 3. Construction Joints:

a. Where construction joints are not indicated on the Drawings, provide

slabs and walls with construction joints at intervals not greater than 30 feet.

b. In order to preserve strength and watertightness of structures, make no other joints, except as authorized by the ENGINEER.

c. At construction joints, thoroughly clean concrete of laitance, grease,

oil, mud, dirt, curing compound, mortar droppings, or other objectionable matter by means of sandblasting, and wash surfaces

just prior to succeeding concrete placement.

d. At Horizontal Joints: Immediately prior to resuming concrete placing

operations, thoroughly spread bed of grout not less than ½ inch in thickness nor more than 1 inch in thickness over horizontal joint

surfaces.

4. Keyways in Joints: a. Provide keyways in joints as indicated on the Drawings.

b. Treat lumber keyway material with form release coating, applied in

accordance with manufacture’s instructions. 5. Take special care to ensure that concrete is well consolidated around and

against waterstops and that waterstops are secured in proper position.

6. Cleaning of Construction Joints:

a. Wash construction joints free of sawdust, chips, and other debris after forms and built and immediately before concrete or grout placement.

b. Should formwork confine sawdust, chips, or other loose matter in such manner that it is impossible to remove them by flushing with

water, use vacuum cleaner for their removal, after which flush cleaned surfaces with water.

c. Provide cleanout hole at base of each wall and column for inspection

and cleaning. 7. Expansion, Contraction, and Construction Joints:

a. Constructed where and as indicated on the Drawings. b. Waterstops, Expansion Joint Material, Synthetic Rubber Sealing

Compound, and Other Similar Materials: As specified in Sections 03250 and 07900.

8. Repair of Concrete: Where it is necessary to repair concrete by bonding

mortar or new concrete to concrete which has reached its initial set, first coat




surface of set concrete with epoxy bonding agent as specified in Section

03301.

C. Conveying and Placing Concrete:

1. Convey concrete from mixer to place of final deposit by methods which

prevent separation or loss of materials. 2. Use equipment for chuting, pumping, and conveying concrete of such size

and design as to ensure practically continuous flow of concrete at delivery end without separation of materials.

3. Design and use chutes and devices for conveying and depositing concrete that

direct concrete vertically downward when discharged from chute or conveying device.

4. Keep equipment for conveying concrete thoroughly clean by washing and

scraping upon completion of any day’s placement.




D. Delivery of Concrete: 1. Delivery time of concrete from batch to site of placement shall not exceed 90

minutes at 90° F. The ENGINEER has the right to reject the load if it fails

to meet this criteria.

E. Placing Concrete:

1. Do not place concrete without prior authorization of the ENGINEER. 2. Do not place concrete until:

a. Reinforcement is securely and properly fastened in its correct

position and loose form ties at construction joints have been

retightened. b. Dowels, bucks, sleeves, hangers, pipes, conduits, bolts, and any other

fixtures required to be embedded in concrete have been placed and

adequately anchored.

c. Forms have been cleaned and oiled prior to placement around rebar

so as to prevent form oil from pelting on rebar. 3. Placement of concrete in which initial set has occurred, or of retempered

concrete, will not be permitted.

4. Do not place concrete during rainstorms or high velocity winds.

5. Protect concrete placed immediately before rain to prevent water from

coming in contact with such concrete or winds causing excessive drying. 6. Keep sufficient protective covering on hand at all times for protection of

concrete.

7. After acceptance, adhere to proposed sequence of placing concrete, except

when specific changes are requested by the CONTRACTOR and accepted by the ENGINEER.

8. Notify the ENGINEER in writing of readiness, not just intention, to place concrete in any portion of the work: a. Provide this notification in such time in advance of operations as the

ENGINEER deems necessaryto make final inspection of preparations

at location of proposed concrete placing.

b. Place forms, steel, screeds, anchors, ties, and inserts in place before

notification of readiness is given to the ENGINEER. c. Depositing Concrete:

1) Deposit concrete at or near its final position to avoid

segregation caused by rehandling or flowing.

2) Do not deposit concrete in large quantities in one place and work along forms with vibrator or by other methods.

3) Do not drop concrete freely into place from height greater

than 4 feet.

4) Use tremies for placing concrete on slopes, at bottom of

slope. 5) Commence placement of concrete on slopes, at bottom of

slope.

9. Place concrete in approximately horizontal layers not to exceed 24 inches in




depth and bring up evenly in all parts of forms.




10. Continue concrete placement without avoidable interruption, in continuous operation, until end of placement is reached. The ENGINEER reserves the

right to reject the placement if a cold joint is determined to affect the

structural integrity. 11. If more than 20 minutes lapse prior to placement of new concrete over

concrete previously places, reduce depth of layers being placed at one time,

and/or increase placing operation to previously placed concrete within 20

minutes.

12. If concrete is to be placed over previously placed concrete and more than 20 minutes have elapsed, then spread layer of grout not less than ½ inch in

thickness nor more than 1 inch in thickness over surface before placing

additional concrete.

13. Placement of Concrete for Slabs, Beams, or Walkways:

a. If cast monolithically with walls or columns, do not commence until

concrete in walls or columns has been allowed to set and shrink.

b. Allow set time of not less than one hour for shrinkage.

F. Consolidating Concrete: 1. Place concrete with aid of acceptable mechanical vibrators.

2. Thoroughly consolidate concrete around reinforcement, pipes, or other shapes built into the work.

3. Provide sufficiently intense vibration to cause concrete to flow and settle

readily into place and to visibly affect concrete over radius of at least 18 inches.

4. Vibrators:

a. Keep sufficient vibrators on hand at all times to vibrate concrete as

placed.

b. In addition to vibrators in actual use while concrete is being placed, have on hand minimum 1 spare vibrator in serviceable condition.

c. Do not place concrete until it has been ascertained that all vibrating

equipment, including spares, are in serviceable condition.

5. Take special care to place concrete solidly against forms so as to leave no voids.

6. Take every precaution to make concrete solid, compact, and smooth, and if

for any way defective, repair such concrete in manner acceptable to the ENGINEER.

G. Footings and Slabs on Grade:

1. Do not place concrete on ground or compacted fill until subgrade is in moist

condition acceptable to the ENGINEER. 2. If necessary, sprinkle subgrade with water not less than 6 nor more than 20

hours in advance of placing concrete.

3. If it becomes dry prior to actual placing of concrete, sprinkle again, without

forming pools of water. 4. Do not place concrete if subgrade is muddy or soft.




H. Curing Concrete - General: 1. Cure concrete by methods specified in this Section.

2. Cure concrete minimum of 7 days. 3. Cure concrete that is to be painted or coated with water or plastic membrane.

4. Do not use curing compound on any concrete surface that is to receive paint

or upon which any material is to be bonded.

5. Water cure or plastic membrane cure concrete slabs which are specified to be sealed by concrete sealer.

6. Cure other concrete by water curing or sprayed curing membrane at the

CONTRACTOR’s option.

I. Water Curing:

1. Keep surfaces of concrete being water cured constantly and visibly moist day

and night for period of not less than 7 days.

2. Each day forms remain in place may count as 1 day of water curing.

3. No further curing credit will be allowed for forms in place after contact has

once been broken between concrete surface and forms. 4. Do not loosen form ties during period when concrete is being cured by

leaving forms in place.

5. Flood top of walls with water at least 3 times per day, and keep concrete

surfaces moist at all times during 7 day curing period.

J. Sprayed Membrane Curing:

1. Apply curing compound to concrete surface after repairing and patching, and

within 1 hour after forms are removed. 2. If more than one hour elapses after removal forms, do not use membrane

curing compound, but apply water curing for full curing period.

3. If surface requires repairing or painting, water cure such concrete surfaces. 4. Curing Compound:

a. Do not remove curing compound from concrete in less than 7 days. b. Curing compound may be removed only upon written required by the

CONTRACTOR and acceptance by the ENGINEER, stating what

measures are to be performed to adequately cure structures. c. Take care to apply curing compound in area of construction joints to

see that curing compound is placed within construction joint silhouette.

d. Remove curing compound placed within construction joint silhouette by heavy sandblasting prior to placing any new concrete: 1) CONTRACTOR’s Option: Instead of using curing compound

for curing of construction joints such joints may be water

cured. e. Apply curing compound by mechanical, power operated sprayer and

mechanical agitator that will uniformly mix all pigment and

compound.




f. Apply compound in at least 2 coats. g. Apply each coat in direction 90 degrees to preceding coat. h. Apply compound in sufficient quantity so that concrete has uniform

appearance and that natural color is effectively and completely

concealed at time of spraying.

i. Continue to coat and recoat surfaces until specified coverage is

achieved and until coating film remains on concrete surfaces. j. Thickness And Coverage Of Compound: Provide compound having

film thickness that can be scraped from surfaces at any and all points

after drying for at least 24 hours. k. The CONTRACTOR is cautioned that method of applying curing

compound specified herein may require more compound than

normally suggested by manufacturer of compound and also more

than is customary in the trade. l. Apply amounts specified herein, regardless of manufacturer’s

recommendations or customary practice, if curing compound is used in place of water curing.

m. If the CONTRACTOR desires to use curing compound other than

specified compound, coat sample areas of concrete wall with proposed compound and also similar adjacent area with specified

compound in specified manner for comparison: 1) If proposed sample is not equal or better, in opinion of the

ENGINEER, in all features, proposed substitution will not be

allowed. n. Prior to final acceptance of the work, remove, by sandblasting or

other acceptable method, any curing compound on surfaces exposed

to view, so that only natural color of finished concrete is visible

uniformly over entire surface.

K. Plastic Membrane Curing:

1. Polyethylene film may be used to cure slabs. Seal joint and edges with small

sand berm. 2. Install plastic membrane as soon as concrete is finished and can be walked on

without damage. Keep concrete moist under plastic membrane.

3.2 CONCRETE FINISHING

A. Provide smooth troweled finish for all process basins and containment structures.

B. Edges of Joints: 1. Provide joints having edges as indicated on the Drawings.

2. Protect wall and slab surfaces at edges against concrete spatter and

thoroughly clean upon completion of each placement.





A. Cost: All materials testing shall be included in the CONTRACTOR’s bid.

B. Testing of Concrete: 1. During progress of construction, the CONTRACTOR shall have tests made

to determine whether the concrete, as being produced, complies with

requirements specified.

2. Tests will be performed in accordance with ASTM C 31, ASTM C 39, and

ASTM C 172. 3. The testing laboratory will make and deliver test cylinders to the laboratory

and testing expense will be borne by the CONTRACTOR.

4. Required Number Cylinders: a. Not less than four cylinder specimens, 6 inch diameter by 12 inch

long, will be tested for each 150 cubic yards of each class of concrete

with minimum of four specimens for each class of concrete placed and not less than four specimens for each half day’s placement.

b. One cylinder will be broken at 7 days and 2 at 28 days.

5. The CONTRACTOR shall:

a. Test slump of concrete using slump cone in accordance with

requirements of ASTM C 143.

b. Furnish test equipment.

c. Do not use concrete that does not meet specification requirements in

regards to slump, but remove such concrete from project site. d. Test slump at the beginning of each placement, as often as necessary

to keep slump within the specified range, and when requested to so by the ENGINEER.

e. Make provisions for and furnish concrete for test specimens, and

provide manual assistance to the testing laboratory in preparing said specimens.

f. Assume responsibility for care of and providing of curing conditions

for test specimens in accordance with ASTM C 31.

B. Air Entraining Admixture: a. Test percent of entrained air in concrete at beginning of each placement, as

often as necessary to keep entrained air within specified ranges, and when requested to do so by the ENGINEER.

b. Provide test equipment.

c. Do not use concrete that does not meet Specification requirements as to air

entrainment and shall remove such concrete from project site. d. Test air entrainment in concrete in accordance with ASTM C 173.

C. Enforcement of Strength Requirement:

1. Concrete is expected to reach higher compressive strength than that which is

indicated in Table A as specified compressive strength f’c.

2. Strength Level of Concrete: Will be considered acceptable if following conditions are satisfied.

a. Averages of all sets of 3 consecutive strength test results is greater or




equal to specified compressive strength f’c. b. No individual strength test (average of 2 cylinders) falls below specified

compressive strength f’c by more than 500 pounds per square inch.

c. Whenever one, or both, of 2 conditions stated above is not satisfied, provide additional curing of affected portion followed by cores taken in accordance with ASTM C 42 and

ACI 318 and comply with following requirements:

d. If additional curing does not bring average of 3 cores taken in affected area to at least

specified compressive strength f’c, designate such concrete in affected areas defective. 1) The ENGINEER may require the CONTRACTOR to strengthen defective

concrete bymeans of additional concrete, additional reinforcing steel, or replacement of defective concrete, all of the CONTRACTOR’s expense

3.4 ADJUSTING

A. Repair of Defective Concrete: 1. Remove and replace or repair defective work.

2. Correct defective work as specified in this Article.

3. Do not patch, repair, or cover defective work without inspection by the

ENGINEER. 4. Provide repairs having strength equal or greater than specified concrete for

area involved:

a. Chip out and key imperfections in the work and make them ready for

repair. 5. Dry-Pack Method:

a. Dry Pack Method: Use for holes having depth nearly equal to or greater than least surface dimension of hole, for cone-bolt, and

narrow slots cut for repair.

b. Smooth Holes: Clean and roughen by heavy sandblasting before

repair. 6. Mortar Method of Replacement: Use for following:

a. Holes too wide to dry pack and too shallow for concrete replacement.

b. Comparatively shallow depressions, large or small, which extend no

deeper than reinforcement nearest surface. 7. Concrete Replacement:

a. Use: When holes extend entirely through concrete section or when

holes are more than 1 square foot in area and extend halfway or more through the section.

b. Method of Repair For Surfaces of Set Concrete to be Repaired: First

coat with epoxy bonding agent. 8. Acceptable Method of Concrete Repair:

a. Make no repair until the ENGINEER has accepted method of

preparing surfaces and proposed method of repair.

END OF SECTION




SECTION 03301

EPOXIES

PART 1 GENERAL

1.1 SUMMARY


1. Epoxy.

2. Epoxy gel.

3. Epoxy bonding agent.

1.2 REFERENCES


1. D 638 - Test Method for Tensile Properties of Plastics.

2. D 695 - Test Method for Compressive Properties of Rigid Plastics.

3. D 790 - Test Methods for Flexural Properties of Unreinforced and Reinforced

Plastics and Electrical Insulating Materials.



1. Provide epoxy materials that are new and use them within shelf life

limitations set forth by manufacturer.

2. Perform and conduct work of this Section in neat orderly manner.

1.4 SUBMITTALS

A. Not Used.

PART 2 PRODUCTS

2.1 MATERIALS

A. Epoxy: Water-insensitive two-part type low viscosity epoxy adhesive material

containing 100 percent solids and meeting or exceeding following characteristics

when tested in accordance with standards specified: Manufacturers: One of the

following or equal:

1. Master Builders, Inc., Concressive Standard LVI.

2. Sika Chemical Corp.’s, Sikadur 35 Hi-Mod LV.




Physical

Characteristic Test Method Required Results

Tensile Strength ASTM D 638 8,000 pounds per square inch at 14 days and

77 deg. F cure.

Flexure Strength ASTM D 790 11,000 pounds per square inch at 14 days and

77 deg. F cure.

Compressive Strength ASTM D 695 16,000 pounds per square inch at 24 hours

and 77 deg. F cure.

Bond Strength N/A Concrete shall fail before failure of epoxy.

Gel Time in 5-Mil Film N/A Four hours maximum at 77 deg. F

Elongation ASTM D 638 1 percent minimum at 14 days and 77 deg. F

B. Epoxy Gel: Manufactures: One of the following or equal:

1. Sika Chemical Corp.’s, Sikadur 31 Hi-Mod Gel.

C. Epoxy Bonding Agent: Manufacturers: One of the following or equal:

1. Master Builders, Inc., Concressive 1001 Liquid LPL.

2. Sika Chemical Corp.’s, Sikadur 32 Hi-Mod.

PART 3 EXECUTION

3.1 INSTALLATION

A. Install and cure epoxy materials in accordance with manufacturer’s installation

instructions.

B. Epoxy:

1. Apply in accordance with manufacturer’s installation instructions.

C. Epoxy Gel:


2. Use for vertical or overhead work, or where high viscosity epoxy is required.

3. Epoxy gel used for vertical or overhead work may be used for horizontal

work.

D. Epoxy Bonding Agent:


2. Bonding agent will not be required for filling form tie hole or for normal

finishing and patching of similar sizes small defects.

END OF SECTION




SECTION 03302

EPOXY RESIN/PORTLAND CEMENT BONDING AGENT

PART 1 GENERAL

1.1 SUMMARY

A. Section Includes: Epoxy resin/portland cement bonding agent.

1.2 REFERENCES

A. American Society for Testing of Materials (ASTM):

1. C 109 - Test Method for Compressive Strength of Hydraulic Cement Mortars.

2. C 348 - Test Method for Flexural Strength of Hydraulic Cement Mortars.

3. C 496 - Test Method for Splitting Strength of Cylindrical Concrete

Specimens.

4. C 882 - Test Method for Bond Strength of Epoxy-Resin Systems Used with

Concrete.

PART 2 PRODUCTS

2.1 MANUFACTURERS

A. Sika Corporation, Lyndhurst, New Jersey, Sika Armatec 110.

B. Substitutions: The use of other than the specified product will be considered

providing the CONTRACTOR request its use in writing to the ENGINEER. This

request shall be accompanied by:

1. A certificate of compliance from an approved independent testing laboratory

that the proposed substitute product meets or exceeds specified test standards.

2.2 PERFORMANCE CRITERIA

A. Properties of the Mixed Epoxy Resin/Portland Cement Adhesive:

1. Pot life: 75-105 minutes.

2. Contact time: 24 hours.

3. Color: Dark gray.

B. Properties of the Cured Epoxy Resin/Portland Cement Adhesive:

1. Compressive strength in accordance with ASTM C 109:

a. 1 day: 810 pounds per square inch minimum.

b. 7 day: 6,000 pounds per square inch minimum.

c. 28 day: 8,000 pounds per square inch minimum.

2. Splitting tensile strength in accordance with ASTM C 496:




a. 28 days: 540 pounds per square inch minimum.

3. Flexural Strength:

a. 1,100 pounds per square inch minimum in accordance with ASTM C

348.

4. Bond strength in accordance with ASTM C 882 modified at 14 days:

a. 0 hours open time: 1,900 pounds per square inch minimum.

b. 24 hours open time: 1,500 pounds per square inch minimum.

5. The epoxy resin/portland cement adhesive shall not produce a vapor barrier.

6. Material must be proven to prevent corrosion of reinforcing steel when tested

under the procedures as set forth by the Federal Highway Administration

Program Report Number FHWA/RD86/193. Proof shall be in the form of an

independent testing laboratory corrosion report showing prevention for

corrosion of the reinforced area.

2.3 MATERIALS

A. Epoxy Resin/Portland Cement Adhesive:

1. Component “A” shall be an epoxy resin/water emulsion containing suitable

viscosity control agents. It shall not contain butyl glycidyl ether.

2. Component “B” shall be primarily a water solution of a polyamine.

3. Component “C” shall be a blend of selected portland cements and sands.

4. The material shall not contain asbestos.

PART 3 EXECUTION

3.1 MIXING AND APPLICATION

A. Mixing the Epoxy Resin: Shake contents of Components “A” and Component “B”.

Empty all of both components into a clean, dry mixing pail. Mix thoroughly for 30

seconds with a jiffy paddle on a low-speed with 400 to 600 revolutions per minute

drill. Slowly add the entire contents of Component “C” while continuing to mix for

3 minutes until uniform with no lumps. Mix only that quantity that can be applied

within its pot life.

B. Placement Procedure:

1. Apply to prepared surface with stiff-bristle brush, broom, or “hopper type”

spray equipment:

a. For hand applications: Place fresh, plastic concrete/mortar while the

bonding bridge adhesive is wet or dry, up to 24 hours.

b. For machine applications: Allow the bonding bridge adhesive to dry

for 12 hours minimum.

C. Adhere to all limitations and cautions for the epoxy resin/portland cement adhesive

in the manufacturers current printed literature.




3.2 CLEANING

A. Leave finished work and work area in a neat, clean condition without evidence of

spillovers onto adjacent area.

END OF SECTION




SECTION 03356

TOOLED CONCRETE FINISHES

PART 1 GENERAL

1.1 SUMMARY

A. Section Includes: Tooled concrete finishes.


A. Packing and Shipping:

1. Deliver and store packages materials in original containers until ready for

use.

PART 2 PRODUCTS

2.1 MIXES

A. Mortar Mix for F4 Finish: Consist of one part cement and 1-1/2 parts of fine sand

passing Number 100 screen, mixed with enough water emulsified bonding agent to

have consistency of thick cream.

PART 3 EXECUTION

3.2 CONCRETE FINISHING

A. Cement for Finishes:

1. Addition of white cement may be required to produce finish which matches

color of concrete to be finished.

B. Vertical Concrete Surfaces: Use Following Finishes for Vertical Concrete Surfaces

(use F4 finish if not otherwise indicated on drawings):

1. F1 Finish: No special treatment other than repair defective work and fill

depressions 1 inch or deeper and tie holes with mortar after removal of curing

membrane.

2. F2 Finish: No special treatment other than repair defective work, remove fins,

fill depressions ½ inch or deeper and tie holes with mortar after removal of

curing membrane.

3. F3 Finish: Repair defective work, remove fins, offsets, and curing membrane,

and grind projections smooth. Fill depressions 1/4 inch or larger in depth or

width and tie holes with mortar after removal of curing membrane.

4. F4 Finish:




a. Same as specified for F3 Finish, and in addition fill depressions and

holes 1/16 inch or larger in width with mortar.

b. “Brush-Off” sandblast surfaces prior to filling holes to expose all

holes near surface of the concrete.

c. Thoroughly wet surfaces and commence filling of pits, holes, and

depressions while surfaces are still damp.

d. Perform filling by rubbing mortar over entire area with clean burlap,

sponge rubber floats, or trowels.

e. Do not let any material remain on surfaces, except that within pits and

depressions.

f. Wipe surfaces clean and moist cure.

5. F5 Finish: Receive same finish specified for F3 Finish, and, in addition,

receive special stoned finish, in accordance with following requirements:

a. Remove forms and perform required repairs, patching, and pointing

as specified in this Section.

b. Wet surfaces thoroughly with brush and rub with hard wood float

dipped in water containing 2 pounds of portland cement per gallon.

c. Rub surfaces until form marks and projections have been removed.

d. Spread grindings from rubbing operations uniformly over surface

with brush in such manner as to fill pits and small voids.

e. Moist cure brushed surfaces and allow to harden for 3 days:

1) After curing, obtain final finish by rubbing with carborundum

stone of approximately Number 50 grit until entire surfaces

have smooth texture and are uniform in color.

2) Continue curing for remainder of specified time.

f. If any concrete surface is allowed to become too hard to finish in

above specified manner, sandblast and wash related surfaces exposed

to view, whether finished or not:

1) While still damp, rub over surface, plastic mortar, as specified

for brushed surfaces and hand stoned with Number 60 grit

carborundum stone, using additional mortar for brushed

surfaces until surface is evenly filled without an excess of

mortar.

2) Continue stoning until surface is hard.

3) After moist curing for 3 days, make surface smooth in texture

and uniform in color by use of Number 50 or Number 50 grit

carborundum stone.

4) After stoning, continue curing until 7 day curing period is

completed.

C. Horizontal Concrete: After proper and adequate vibration and tamping, use following

finishes for horizontal concrete surfaces as indicated on the Drawings (Use finish S4

unless otherwise indicated on Drawings):




1. S1 Finish: Screened to grade and leave without special finish.

2. S2 Finish: Smooth steel trowel finish.

3. S3 Finish: Steel trowel finish free from trowel marks. Provide smooth

finish free of all irregularities.

4. S4 Finish: Steel trowel finish, without local depressions or high points,

followed by light hair broom finish. Do not use stiff bristle brooms or

brushes. Perform brooming parallel to slab-drainage. Provide resulting

finish that is rough enough to provide nonskid finish. Finish shall be subject

to review and acceptance by the OWNER.

5. S5 Finish: Nonslip abrasive: After concrete has been screened level and

hardened enough to support man standing on a board, sprinkle abrasive from

shake screen into surface at uniform rate of 25 pounds for each 100 square

feet of surface area, wood float into finish, then trowel abrasive into surface

with steel trowel properly exposing abrasive in surface as required to provide

nonslip surface.

D. Concrete Floor Surfaces to Which Surfacing Material is Applied: Finish smooth with

tolerance within 1/8 inch in 10 feet in any direction from lines indicated on the

Drawings.

END OF SECTION




SECTION 03600

GROUT

PART 1 GENERAL

1.1 SUMMARY

A. Section Includes: Concrete mortar, grout, drypack mortar, nonshrink grout, and

epoxy grout.


1. Section 03301 - Epoxies.

1.2 REFERENCES


1. C 109 - Test Method for Compressive Strength of Hydraulic Cement Mortars.

2. C 157 - Test Method for Length Change of Hardened Cement Mortar and

Concrete.

3. C 191 - Test Method for Time Setting of Hydraulic Cement by Vicat Needle.

4. C 827 - Standard Test Method for Change in Height at Early Ages of

Cylindrical Specimens of Cementitious Mixtures.

B. U. S. Corps of Engineers (USCE):

1. CRD C-621 - Corps of Engineer Specifications Non-Shrink Grout.

PART 2 PRODUCTS

2.1 MATERIALS

A. Concrete Mortar:

1. General: Consist of concrete mixture with coarse aggregate removed and

water quantity adjusted as required.

2. At Exposed Concrete Surfaces not to be Painted or Submerged in Water:

White cement.

B. Grout:

1. Consist of mixture of Portland Cement and sand.

C. Dry-Pack Mortar:

1. Consist of mixture of Portland cement and sand.

D. Non-Shrink Grout:




1. Consist of hydraulic cement, which when mixed with water hardens rapidly

to produce permanent high strength material suitable for exterior use.

2. Nonmetallic and not contain calcium chloride or other chemicals which

accelerate corrosion of embedded steel.

3. Physical Characteristics:

a) When Tested in Accordance with ASTM C 827: Show no shrinkage

prior to initial setting.

b) When Tested in Accordance with ASTM C 157 and Corps of

Engineers CRD C-621: Show no shrinkage in hardened state.


a) Master Builders, Inc., Masterflow 928 Grout.

E. Epoxy Grout:

1. Consist of mixture of epoxy and sand.

2. Sand: Clean, bagged, graded, and kiln dried silica sand.

2.2 MIXES

A. Concrete Mortar Mix:

1. Use water-cement ratio that is no more than that specified for concrete being

repaired.

2. At Exposed Concrete Surfaces not to be Painted or Submerged in Water: Use

sufficient white cement to make color of finished patch match that of

surrounding concrete.

B. Grout Mix:

1. For Concrete Repair: Mix in same proportions used for concrete being

repaired, with only sufficient water to give required consistency for

spreading.

2. For Spreading over the Surfaces of Construction or Cold Joints: Mix with no

more water used than allowed by water-cement ratio specified for concrete.

3. For grout not specified in subparagraph 2.02B1 or 2.02B2, mix in proportions

by weight of one part cement to four part of concrete sand.

C. Dry-Pack Mortar Mix: Use only enough water so that resulting mortar will crumble

to touch after being formed into ball by hand.

D. Non-Shrink Grout: Mix accordance with manufacturer’s installation instructions such

that resulting mix has semi-fluid, flowable consistency and is suitable for placing by

pouring.

E. Epoxy Grout:

1. Mix in accordance with manufacturer’s installation instructions for mixing.

2. Proportioning:




a. For horizontal work, consist of mixture of one part epoxy as specified

in Section 03301 with not more than 2 parts sand.

b. For vertical or overhead work, consist of 1 part epoxy gel as specified

in Section 03301 with not more than 2 parts sand.

PART 3 EXECUTION

3.1 PREPARATION


1. Concrete Surfaces: Clean and roughen by heavy sandblasting. For portland

cement based mortars and grouts, concrete shall be saturated and surface

damp before mortar or grout is placed.

2. Epoxy Grout:

a. Wet contact surface with prepared grout as required to provide proper

adhesion.

b. Where required to wet the concrete surfaces, apply coat of epoxy for

horizontal work or epoxy gel for vertical or overhead work prior to

placing epoxy grout.

3.2 APPLICATION

A. Cement Mortar and Grout:

1. For Imperfect Concrete Repair:

a. Filling: Filling of voids around items through the concrete.

b. Grout Spreading: Spread over construction joints, cold joints, and

similar type items.

2. Concrete Surfaces:

a. Apply epoxy bonding agent to clean, roughened, and dry surface

before placing mortar or grout.

3. Placing:

a. Exercise particular care in placing portland cement mortar or grout

since they are required to furnish structural strength or impermeable

water seal or both.

b. Do not use cement mortar or grout that as not been placed within 30

minutes after mixing.

B. Epoxy Grout:


2. Use where specified herein or where indicated on the Drawings.


A. Tests:

1. CONTRACTOR shall include all materials testing in his bid.




2. Non-Shrink Grout:

a. A set of three specimens shall be made for testing. One at seven days,

one at 25 days, and the third of a later date if needed.

b. Compression test specimens shall be taken during construction from

the first day of placement of grout.

c. Compressive Strength When Tested In Accordance With ASTM C

109:

1) At One Day: Not less than 3,000 pounds per square inch. At

28 days: Not less than 6,000 pounds per square inch.

d. Setting Time when Tested In Accordance with ASTM C 191: Not

less than 30 minutes.

END OF SECTION




SECTION 03605

EPOXY BONDING REINFORCING BARS AND RODS IN CONCRETE

PART 1 GENERAL

1.1 SUMMARY

A. Section Includes: Bonding reinforcing bars and all thread rods in concrete using

epoxy adhesive.

1.2 REFERENCES

A. American National Standards Institute (ANSI):

1. Standard B212-15 - Carbide Tipped Masonry Drills and Blanks for Carbide

Tipped Masonry Drills.


1. C 881 - Standard Specification for Epoxy-Resin-Base Bonding Systems for

Concrete.

C. Steel Structures Painting Council (SSPC):

1. SP-10 Near-White Blast Cleaning.

1.3 SUBMITTALS

A. Product Data: Furnish technical data for epoxy adhesives, including installation

instructions, independent laboratory test results, and handling and storage

instructions.

B. Quality Control Submittals:

1. Special Inspection: Provide detailed step-by-step instructions for the special

inspection procedure as required by International Building Code.


A. Storage of Epoxy Components:

1. Store epoxy components on pallets or shelving in a covered-storage area.

2. Control temperature above 60 degrees Fahrenheit and dispose of product if

shelf life has expired.

3. If stored at temperatures below 60 degrees Fahrenheit, test components prior

to use to determine if they still meet specified requirements.

PART 2 PRODUCTS

2.1 GENERAL




A. Compatibilityof Materials: Use end products of one manufacturer in order to achieve

structural compatibility and singular responsibility.

2.2 EPOXY ADHESIVE FOR SELF-CONTAINED CARTRIDGE SYSTEM

A. Meet ASTM C 881, Type IV, Grade 3, Class B or C depending on site conditions.

B. Two-component, 100 percent solids, insensitive to moisture, and gray in color.

C. Cure Temperature, Pot Life, and Workability: Compatible for intended use and

environmental conditions.

D. Container Markings: Include manufacturer’s name, product name, batch number, mix

ratio byvolume, product expiration date, ANSI hazard classification, and appropriate

ANSI handling precautions.

E. Manufacturers: One of the following or equal:

1. Covert Operations, Long Beach, CA, CIA-Gel 7000 System.

2. Hilti, Tulsa, OK, RE 500 High Strength Epoxy Doweling System.

2.3 EPOXY ADHESIVE FOR METER AND MIXING PUMP SYSTEM

A. Meet ASTM C 881, Type IV, Grade 3, Class B or C depending on site conditions.

B. Two-component, 100 percent solids, insensitive to moisture, and gray in color.

C. Cure Temperature, Pot Life, and Workability: Compatible for intended use and

environmental conditions.

D. Container Markings: Include manufacturer’s name, product name, batch number, mix

ration by volume, product expiration date, ANSI hazard classification, and

appropriate ANSI handling precautions.

E. Manufacturers: One of the following or equal:

1. Sika, Sante Fe Springs, CA, Sikadur 31 Hi-Mod Gel.

2.4 ALL THREAD BARS

A. As specified in Section 05052.

2.5 REINFORCING BARS

A. As specified in Section

03200. PART 3 EXECUTION




3.1 GENERAL

A. Dispensing, Metering, or Mixing Epoxy Adhesive Components: Use portable,

automatic metering and mixing device or machine capable of maintaining prescribed

mix ratio within deviation of 5 percent or less, by volume.

B. Dispense epoxy components through specially designed static mixing nozzle that

thoroughly mixes epoxy components and places mixed epoxy at base of predrilled

hole.

C. Mixing Nozzles: Disposable and manufactured in several sizes to accommodate

different size and depth of holes.

D. Where large meter and mixing pumps are impractical, provide epoxy adhesive

packaged as follows:

1. Disposable, self-contained cartridges system capable of dispensing both

epoxy components in the proper mixing ratio, and fit into a manually or

pneumatically operated caulking gun.

2. Dispense components through a mixing nozzle that thoroughly mixes

components.

3.2 TESTING OF AUTOMATIC METERING AND MIXING PUMP SYSTEMS

A. Tests For Proper Ratio:

1. Retain small amount of dispensed adhesive for inspection after each time the

pump is refilled.

2. Operator shall check these samples for color change.

3. Should change in color occur, operator shall follow manufacturer’s service

instructions to obtain proper operation.

B. Frequency of Tests: Make full ratio check after each 10 gallons of adhesive is

dispensed or if color of mixed adhesive becomes noticeably darker or lighter.

C. Ratio Check Procedure:

1. Disconnect dispensing head behind ON/OFF valve.

2. Place a 1 cup volume container and a 2 cup volume container under the

“B” and “A” component hose ends.

3. Actuate the pump until both cups are filled to proper proportion as

recommended by epoxy manufacturer.

3.3 HOLE SIZING AND INSTALLATION

A. Drilling Holes:

1. Do not damage or cut existing reinforcing bars, electrical conduits, or other

items embedded in the existing concrete without acceptance by OWNER.

2. The location of reinforcing bars, or other obstructions shall be determined

with a non-destructive indicator device.




B. Hole Drilling Equipment:

1. Electric or pneumatic rotary impact type with medium or light impact.

2. Drill Bits: Carbide-tipped in accordance with ANSI B212-15.

3. Hollow drills with flushing air systems are preferred. Air shall be free of oil,

water, or other contaminants which will reduce bond.

4. Where edge distances are less than 2 inches, use lighter impact equipment to

prevent microcracking and concrete spalling during drilling process.

C. Hole Diameter:

1. Reinforcing bar diameter or all thread rod diameter plus 1/8 inch.

D. Obstructions in Drill Path:

1. If the drill hits an existing reinforcing bar or other obstruction, stop drilling

and fill the hole with drypack mortar. Relocate the hole to miss the

obstruction and drill another hole. Repeat the above until the hole has been

drilled to the required depth.

2. Avoid drilling an excessive number of holes in an area which would

excessively weaken the structural member being drilled and endanger the

stabilityof the structure. When required, drypack holes which hit obstructions

and allow drypack to reach strength equal to the existing concrete being

drilled before drilling adjacent holes. Epoxy grout may be substituted for

drypack when acceptable to ENGINEER.

3. When existing reinforcing steel is encountered during drilling and when

acceptable to ENGINEER, enlarge the hole by 1/8 inch, core through the

existing reinforcing steel at the larger diameter, and resume drilling at

original hole diameter.

4. Bent Bar Dowels: Where edge distances are critical, and striking reinforcing

steel is likely, and if acceptable to ENGINEER, drill hole at 10 degree angle

or less from axis of reinforcing bar or all thread rod being installed.

E. Install reinforcing bars and all thread rods to depth, spacings, and locations as


F. Cleaning Holes:

1. Insert long air nozzle into hole and blow out loose dust. Use air which is free

of oil, water, or other contaminants which will reduce bond.

2. Use a stiff bristle brush to vigorously brush hole to dislodge compacted

drilling dust.

3. Repeat step 1.

4. Repeat above steps as required to remove drilling dust or other material

which will reduce bond. The hole shall be clean and dry.

G. Cleaning Reinforcing Bars and All Thread Rods:

1. Degrease and sandblast reinforcing bars or all thread rods over embedment




length to near-white metal in accordance with Steel Structures Painting

Council, SP-10 finish. The reinforcing bar or all thread rod shall be free of

oil, grease, paint, dirt, mill scale, rust, or other coatings that will reduce bond.

H. Filling Hole with Epoxy:

1. Fill the hole with epoxy before inserting the reinforcing bar or all thread rod.

Fill hole with epoxy starting from back of the hole. Fill hole without creating

air voids.

2. Fill the hole with sufficient epoxy so that excess epoxy is extruded out of the

hole when the reinforcing bar or all thread rod is inserted into the hole.

END OF SECTION

DIVISION 4

MASONRY

Division 4 - Masonry



Division 4: Masonry Section 04810-1

SECTION 04810

UNIT MASONRY ASSEMBLIES

PART 1 GENERAL

1.01 SECTION INCLUDES

A. Concrete Block.

B. Mortar and Grout.

C. Reinforcement and Anchorage.

D. Accessories.

E. See Drawings.

1.02 REFERENCE STANDARDS

A. ACI 530/530.1/ERTA - Building Code Requirements and Specification for Masonry

B. Structures; American Concrete Institute International.

C. ASTM A82/A82M - Standard Specification for Steel Wire, Plain, for Concrete

Reinforcement.

D. ASTM A615/A615M - Standard Specification for Deformed and Plain Billet-Steel Bars

for Concrete Reinforcement.

E. ASTM A641/A641M - Standard Specification for Zinc-Coated (Galvanized) Carbon

Steel Wire.

F. ASTM A653/A653M - Standard Specification for Steel Sheet, Zinc-Coated (Galvanized)

or Zinc-Iron Alloy-Coated (Galvannealed) by the Hot-Dip Process.

G. ASTM C90 - Standard Specification for Loadbearing Concrete Masonry Units.

H. ASTM C144 - Standard Specification for Aggregate for Masonry Mortar.

I. ASTM C150 - Standard Specification for Portland Cement.

J. ASTM C207 - Standard Specification for Hydrated Lime for Masonry Purposes.

K. ASTM C270 - Standard Specification for Mortar for Unit Masonry.

L. ASTM C404 - Standard Specification for Aggregates for Masonry Grout.




M. ASTM C780 - Standard Test Method for Preconstruction and Construction Evaluation of

Mortars for Plain and Reinforced Unit Masonry.

N. ASTM C1357 - Standard Test Methods for Evaluating Masonry Bond Strength.

O. ASTM C897 - Standard Specification for Aggregate for Job-Mixed Portland Cement-

Based Plaster.

P. ASTM C926 – Standard Specification for Application of Portland Cement-Based Plaster.

1.03 ADMINISTRATIVE REQUIREMENTS

A. Preinstallation Meeting: Convene a preinstallation meeting one week before starting work

of this section; require attendance by all relevant installers.

1.04 SUBMITTALS

A. Product Data: Provide data for masonry units, fabricated wire reinforcement, mortar, and

masonry accessories.

B. Manufacturer's Certificate: Certify that masonry units meet or exceed specified

requirements.

C. Manufacturer's Certificate: Certify that water repellent admixture manufacturer has

certified masonry unit manufacturer as an approved user of water repellent admixture in

the manufacture of concrete block.

1.05 MOCK-UP

A. Construct a masonry wall as a mock-up panel sized 8 feet long by 6 feet high; include

mortar, accessories, and structural reinforcing in mock-up.

B. Mock-up may remain as part of the Work.


A. Deliver, handle, and store masonry units by means that will prevent mechanical damage

and contamination by other materials.

PART 2 PRODUCTS

2.01 CONCRETE MASONRY UNITS

A. Concrete Block: Comply with referenced standards and as follows:

1. Size: Standard units with nominal face dimensions of 16 x 8 inches and nominal

depth as indicated on drawings.




2. Load-Bearing Units: ASTM C90, normal weight.

a. Pattern: Smooth Face.

3. Units with Integral Water Repellent: Concrete block units as specified in this section

with polymeric liquid admixture added to concrete masonry units at the time of

manufacture.

a. Performance of Units with Integral Water Repellent:

1) Water Permeance: When tested per ASTM E514 and for a minimum of 72

hours.

a) No water visible on back of wall at the end of 2 hours.

b) No flow of water from flashing equal to or greater than 0.032 gallons per

hour at the end of 24 hours.

c) No more than 25% of wall area above flashing visibly damp at end of test.

2) Flexural Bond Strength: ASTM C1357; minimum 10% increase.

3) Compressive Strength: ASTM C1314; maximum 5% decrease.

4) Drying Shrinkage: ASTM C1148; maximum 5% increase in shrinkage.

a) Use only in combination with mortar and grout that also has integral water

repellent admixture.

2.02 MORTAR AND GROUT MATERIALS

A. Portland Cement: ASTM C150, Type I.

B. Hydrated Lime: ASTM C207, Type S.

C. Mortar Aggregate: ASTM C144.

D. Grout Aggregate: ASTM C404.

E. Water: Clean and potable.

F. Integral Water Repellent Admixture for Mortar and Grout: Polymeric liquid admixture

added to mortar and grout at the time of manufacture.

1. Performance of Mortar and Grout with Integral Water Repellent:

a. Water Permeance: When tested per ASTM E514 for a minimum of 72 hours.

1) No water visible on back of wall above flashing at the end of 24 hours.

2) No flow of water from flashing equal to or greater than 0.032 gallons per hour

at the end of 24 hours.

3) No more than 25% of wall area above flashing visibly damp at end of test.

b. Flexural Bond Strength: ASTM C1357; minimum 10% increase.

c. Compressive Strength: ASTM C1314; maximum 5% decrease.

d. Drying Shrinkage: ASTM C1148; maximum 5% increase in shrinkage.

2. Use only in combination with masonry units produced with integral water repellent

admixture.

2.03 REINFORCEMENT AND ANCHORAGE

A. Manufacturers of Joint Reinforcement and Anchors:




1. Blok-Lok Limited: www.blok-lok.com.

2. Hohmann & Barnard, Inc (including Dur-O-Wal brand): www.h-b.com.

3. WIRE-BOND: www.wirebond.com.

B. Reinforcing Steel: ASTM A615/A615M Grade 40 (280) deformed billet bars; galvanized.

C. Joint Reinforcement: Use ladder type joint reinforcement where vertical reinforcement is

involved and truss type elsewhere, unless otherwise indicated.

D. Single Wythe Joint Reinforcement: Truss type; ASTM A 82/A 82M steel wire, mill

galvanized to ASTM A 641/A 641M, Class 3; 0.1483 inch side rods with 0.1483 inch

cross rods; width as required to provide not more than 1 inch and not less than 1/2 inch of

mortar coverage on each exposure.

E. Flexible Anchors: 2-piece anchors that permit differential movement between masonry

and building frame, sized to provide not more than 1 inch and not less than 1/2 inch of

mortar coverage from masonry face.

2.04 STUCCO

A. Job-Mixed Portland Cement-Based Plaster per ASTM C897.

2.05 ACCESSORIES

A. Preformed Control Joints: Rubber material. Provide with corner and tee accessories,

fused joints.

1. Manufacturers:

a. Blok-Lok Limited: www.blok-lok.com.

b. Hohmann & Barnard, Inc (including Dur-O-Wal brand): www.h-b.com.

c. WIRE-BOND: www.wirebond.com.

B. Cleaning Solution: Non-acidic, not harmful to masonry work or adjacent materials.

2.06 MORTAR AND GROUT MIXES

A. Mortar for Unit Masonry: ASTM C270, using the Proportion Specification.

1. Exterior, loadbearing masonry: Type N.

B. Admixtures: Add to mixture at manufacturer's recommended rate and in accordance with

manufacturer's instructions; mix uniformly.

PART 3 EXECUTION

3.01 EXAMINATION

A. Verify that field conditions are acceptable and are ready to receive masonry.

B. Verify that related items provided under other sections are properly sized and located.




C. Verify that built-in items are in proper location, and ready for roughing into masonry

work.

3.02 PREPARATION

A. Direct and coordinate placement of metal anchors supplied for installation under other

sections

B. Provide temporary bracing during installation of masonry work. Maintain in place until

building structure provides permanent bracing.

3.03 COLD AND HOT WEATHER REQUIREMENTS

A. Comply with requirements of ACI 530/530.1/ERTA or applicable building code,

whichever is more stringent.

3.04 COURSING

A. Establish lines, levels, and coursing indicated. Protect from displacement.

B. Maintain masonry courses to uniform dimension. Form vertical and horizontal joints of

uniform thickness.

C. Concrete Masonry Units:

1. Bond: Running.

2. Coursing: One unit and one mortar joint to equal 8 inches.

3. Mortar Joints: Concave.

3.05 PLACING AND BONDING

A. Lay hollow masonry units with face shell bedding on head and bed joints.

B. Buttering corners of joints or excessive furrowing of mortar joints is not permitted.

C. Remove excess mortar and mortar smears as work progresses.

D. Interlock intersections and external corners.

E. Do not shift or tap masonry units after mortar has achieved initial set. Where adjustment

must be made, remove mortar and replace.

F. Perform job site cutting of masonry units with proper tools to provide straight, clean,

unchipped edges. Prevent broken masonry unit corners or edges.

G. Cut mortar joints flush where wall tile is scheduled or resilient base is scheduled.




3.06 REINFORCEMENT AND ANCHORAGE – GENERAL

A. Unless otherwise indicated on drawings or specified under specific wall type, install

horizontal joint reinforcement 16 inches on center.

B. Place masonry joint reinforcement in first and second horizontal joints above and below

openings. Extend minimum 16 inches each side of opening.

C. Place continuous joint reinforcement in first and second joint below top of walls.

D. Lap joint reinforcement ends minimum 6 inches.

E. Fasten anchors to structural framing and embed in masonry joints as masonry is laid.

F. Unless otherwise indicated on drawings or closer spacing is indicated under specific wall

type, space anchors at maximum of 36 inches horizontally and 24 inches vertically.

3.07 STUCCO COATING

A. Walls shall be finished with a stucco coating per Section 2.04.

B. Stucco shall be applied per ASTM C926.

C. Stucco shall be painted using an exterior latex enamel with a VOC content less than 250

supplied by Sherwin Williams, ICI Dulculax, or equal. Shine and color shall match the

existing exterior walls.

3.08 CONTROL AND EXPANSION JOINTS

A. Install preformed control joint device in continuous lengths. Seal butt and corner joints in

accordance with manufacturer's instructions.

3.09 BUILT-IN WORK

A. As work progresses, install built-in metal door frames and other items to be built into the

work and furnished under other sections.

B. Install built-in items plumb, level, and true to line.

C. Bed anchors of metal door frames in adjacent mortar joints. Fill frame voids solid with

grout.

D. Do not build into masonry construction organic materials that are subject to deterioration.


A. Mortar Tests: Test each type of mortar in accordance with ASTM C780.




B. All materials testing shall be included in the CONTRACTOR’s bid.

3.11 CLEANING

A. Remove excess mortar and mortar droppings.

B. Replace defective mortar. Match adjacent work.

C. Clean soiled surfaces with cleaning solution.

D. Use non-metallic tools in cleaning operations.

3.12 PROTECTION

A. Without damaging completed work, provide protective boards at exposed external

corners that are subject to damage by construction activities.

END OF SECTION

DIVISION 5

METALS

Division 5 - Metals



Division 5: Metals Section 05052-1

SECTION 05052

ANCHOR BOLTS, TOGGLE BOLTS AND CONCRETE INSERTS

PART 1 GENERAL

1.1 DESCRIPTION

A. Scope:

1. CONTRACTOR shall provide all labor, materials, equipment and

incidentals as shown on the Drawings, specified, and required to furnish and install anchor bolts, toggle bolts and concrete inserts.

B. This Section includes all anchor bolts, toggles and inserts required for the Work,

but not specified under other Sections.

C. The types of Work using the anchor bolts, toggles and inserts include, but are not

limited to the following: 1. Hangers and brackets.

2. Equipment. 3. Piping.

4. Grating and floor plate. 5. Electrical and Plumbing Work. 6. Metal and plastic fabrications.

7. Structural members and accessories.

D. Related Sections: CONTRACTOR shall coordinate the requirements of the Work in this Section along with the requirements of the Sections listed below which

includes, but is not necessary limited to, Work that is directly related to this

Section. 1. Section 05501 - Miscellaneous Metals.


A. Reference Standards: Comply with the applicable provisions and

recommendations of the following, except as otherwise shown and specified. 1. ASTM A 36 - Specification for Carbon Structural Steel.

2. ASTM A 123 - Specification for Zinc (Hot-Dip Galvanized) Coatings on Iron and Steel Products.

3. ASTM A 153 - Specification for Zinc Coating (Hot-Dip) on Iron and Steel

Hardware.

4. ASTM A 307 - Specification for Carbon Steel Bolts and Studs, 60,000 psi Tensile Strength.

5. ASTM A 484 - Specification for General Requirements for Stainless and

Heat-Resisting Steel Bars, Billets and Forgings.




6. ASTM A 536 - Specification for Ductile Iron Castings.

7. ASTM B 633 - Specification for Electrodeposited Coatings of Zinc on Iron and Steel.

8. ASTM F 593 - Stainless Steel Bolts; Hex Cap Screws, and Studs. 9. Federal Specification FF-S-325 for Concrete Expansion Anchors.

10. Federal Specifications WW-H-171E for Malleable Iron. 11. ICBO, International Conference of Building Officials.

12. International Building Code

B. Inserts shall be ICBO, UL or FM approved.

C. Toggle Bolts: Federal Specification FF-B-588C - Type I, Class A, Style 1.

1.3 SUBMITTALS

A. Shop Drawings: Submit for approval the following:

1. Copies of manufacturer's specifications, load tables, dimension diagrams

and installation instructions for the devices. 2. Copies of ICBO, UL or FM Reports certifying load carrying capacities

and installation requirements for the anchorage devices.

PART 2 PRODUCTS

2.1 DESIGN CRITERIA

A. When the size, length or load carrying capacity of an anchor bolt, toggle bolt, or

concrete insert is not shown on the Drawings, provide the following: 1. For anchor bolts (cast-in-place), provide the size, length and capacity

required to carry the design load based on the values and requirements

given in the International Building Code. 2. For concrete anchors (epoxy adhesive types), stud type expansion anchors,

and concrete inserts, provide the size, length, type, and capacity required

to carry the design load based on the values and requirements given in the ICBO Evaluation Report, or similar certifications by UL or FM, for the

anchor to be used. Alternately the capacity may be based on independent

testing lab capacities for tension and shear strength using a minimum safety factor of four. Consideration of reduced capacity due to spacing

and edge distance shall be made.

B. Determine design loads as follows:

1. For equipment anchors, use the design load recommended by the equipment manufacturer.

2. For pipe hangers and supports, use the total weight of: pipe, fittings, and

water contained in pipe, plus the full weight of valves and accessories located between the hanger or support in question.

3. Allowances for vibration shall be included.




4. Concrete anchors shall develop ultimate shear and pull-out loads of not less than the following values in 4,000 psi concrete:

Bolt Diameter

(Inches) Min. Shear (Pounds)

Min. Pull-Out Load (Pounds)

½ 5,000 7,600 5/8 8,000 12,000 3/4 11,500 17,000

7/8 15,700 20,400 1 20,500 28,400

2.2 APPLICATION

A. In masonry, only anchor bolts shall be used.

B. Anchor Bolts (cast-in-place):

1. Shall be used where indicated and may be used where concrete anchors are indicated.

2. Where an anchor bolt is indicated, only a cast-in-place anchor bolt shall be

used, unless another anchor type is accepted by the ENGINEER. 3. Provide anchor bolts as shown on the Drawings or as required to secure

structural steel to concrete or masonry.

C. Epoxy Adhesive Anchors: 1. Use where subject to vibration or where buried or submerged. 2. Use for pipe supports.

3. Use in concrete.

4. Shall not be used for pipe hangers.

D. Concrete Inserts: 1. Use only where indicated on the Drawings.

2. Use for pipe hangers and supports for the pipe size and loading

recommended by the insert manufacturer.

E. Toggle Bolts:

1. Use for fastening brackets and other elements onto masonry units.

F. Stud Type Expansion Anchors:

1. Use only when indicted on the Drawings.

2.3 MATERIALS

A. Anchor Bolts:

1. Provide carbon steel bolts complying with ASTM A 307 - headed or non-

headed type where indicated.

2. In buried or submerged locations, provide stainless steel bolts complete




with washers complying with ASTM F 593 - AISI Type 316 and with

nitronic 60 stainless steel nuts and locknuts.

3. For equipment, provide anchor bolts, which meet the equipment manufacturer's recommendations for size, material, and strength.

4. Provide anchor bolts as shown on the Drawings or as required to secure

structural steel to concrete or masonry. 5. Locate and accurately set the anchor bolts using templates or other devices

as required.

6. Protect threads and shank from damage during installation of equipment and structural steel.

7. Comply with manufacturer’s required embedment length and necessary

anchor bolt projection.

B. Epoxy Adhesive Anchors:

1. Provide stainless steel adhesive anchors complying with ASTM F 593 - AISI Type 316 with nitronic 60 stainless steel nuts and locknuts.

2. In buried or submerged locations, provide stainless steel adhesive anchors complying with ASTM F 593 - AISI Type 316 with nitronic 60 stainless

steel nuts and locknuts. 3. Anchors shall be of the size required for the concrete strength specified.

4. Adhesive anchors shall consist of threaded rods or bolts anchored with an

adhesive system into hardened concrete or grout-filled masonry. The adhesive system shall use a two-component adhesive mix and shall be

injected with a static mixing nozzle following manufacturer’s instructions.

The embedment depth of the rod/bolt shall provide a minimum allowable bond strength that is equal to the allowable tensile capacity of the rod/bolt,

unless noted otherwise on the Drawings. 5. Product and Manufacturer: Provide one of the following:

a. RE 500 Epoxy Injection Adhesive Anchor System, as

manufactured by Hilti. b. Or equal.

C. Concrete Inserts:

1. For piping, grating and floor plate, provide malleable iron inserts. Comply with Federal Specification WW-H-171E (Type 18). Provide

those recommended by the manufacturer for the required loading. 2. Finish shall be black. 3. Product and Manufacturer: Provide inserts by one of the following:

a. Figure 282, as manufactured by ITT Grinnell. b. No. 380, as manufactured by Hohmann and Barnard, Incorporated.

c. Or equal.

D. Toggle Bolts: 1. Provide spring-wing toggle bolts, with two-piece wings.

2. Provide carbon steel bolts with zinc coating in accordance with Federal Specification FF-S-325.




3. Product and Manufacturer: Provide toggle bolts by one of the following:

a. The Rawlplug Company, Incorporated. b. Haydon Bolts, Incorporated. c. Or equal.

E. Stud Type Expansion Anchors: 1. Product and manufacturer

a. Kwik-Bolt 3.

b. Or equal.

F. Powder activated fasteners and other types of bolts and fasteners not specified

herein shall not be used.

PART 3 EXECUTION

3.1 INSPECTION

A. CONTRACTOR shall examine areas and conditions under which anchor bolts, toggle bolts and concrete insert Work is to be installed.

3.2 INSTALLATION

A. Assure that embedded items are protected from damage and are not filled in with

concrete.

B. Use concrete inserts for pipe hangers and supports for the pipe size and loading

recommended by the insert manufacturer.

C. Use toggle bolts for fastening brackets and other elements onto masonry units.

D. For the epoxy adhesive anchors and adhesive material, CONTRACTOR shall comply with the manufacturer's installation instructions on the hole diameter and

depth required to fully develop the tensile strength of the adhesive anchor or

reinforcing bar. Contractor shall properly clean out the hole utilizing a wire brush and compressed air to remove all loose material from the hole, prior to installing

adhesive capsules or material.

3.3 CLEANING

A. After embedding concrete is placed, remove protection and clean bolts and

inserts.

END OF SECTION




SECTION 05501

MISCELLANEOUS METALS

PART 1 GENERAL

1.1 SUMMARY

A. Section Includes: Miscellaneous metal fabrications including:

1. Miscellaneous aluminum.

2. Miscellaneous cast iron.

3. Miscellaneous stainless steel.

4. Miscellaneous structural steel.

5. Associated accessories to the above items.


1. Section 05052 - Anchor Bolts, Toggle Bolts, and Concrete Inserts.

2. Section 09800 - Special Coatings.

3. Section 09900 - Painting.

1.2 REFERENCES

A. Aluminum Association (AA) - Specification M32-C22-A41 - Aluminum Finishes.

B. ANSI A12.1 - Safety Requirements for Floor and Wall Openings, Railings, and

Toeboards.

C. American Society for Testing and Materials (ASTM):

1. A 36/A 36M - Specification for Structural Steel.

2. A 48 - Specification for Grey Iron Castings.

3. A 53 - Specification for Pipe, Steel, Black and Hot-Dipped, Zinc-Coated,

Welded and Seamless.

4. A 123 - Specification for Zinc (Hot-Dip Galvanized) Coating on Iron and

Steel Products.

5. A 167 - Specification for Stainless and Heat-Resisting Chromium-Nickel

Steel Plate, Sheet, and Strip.

6. A 269 - Specification for Seamless and Welded Austenitic Stainless Steel

Tubing for General Service.

7. A 276 - Specification for Stainless and Heat-Resisting Steel Bars and Shapes.

8. A 307 - Specification for Carbon Steel Bolts and Studs, 60,000 per square

inch Tensile.

9. A 325 - Specification for High-Strength Bolts for Structural Steel Joints.

10. A 489 - Specification for Carbon Steel Eyebolts.A 490 - Specification for

Heat-Treated, Steel Structural Bolts, 150 ksi Tensile Strength.




11. A 500 - Specification for Cold-Formed Welded and Seamless Carbon Steel

Structural Tubing in Rounds and Shapes.

12. A 501 - Specification for Hot-Formed Welded and Seamless Carbon Steel

Structural Tubing.

13. A 554 - Specification for Welded Stainless Steel Mechanical Tubing.

14. A 635/A 635M - Specification for Steel, Sheet and Strip, Heavy Thickness

Coils Carbon, Hot-Rolled.

15. A 653/A 653M - Specification for Steel Sheet, Zinc-Coated (Galvanized) or

Zinc-iron Alloy-coated (Galvanized) by the Hot-Dip Process.

16. B 209 - Specification for Aluminum and Aluminum-Alloy Sheet and Plate.

17. B 429 - Specification for Aluminum-Alloy Extended Structural Pipe and

Tube.

18. B 308 - Specification for Aluminum Alloy 6061-T6 Standard Structural

Profiles.

19. B 221 - Specification for Aluminum and Aluminum Alloy Extruded Bars,

Rods, Wire, Profiles and Tubes.

D. AWS D 1.1 - Structural Welding Code.

E. OSHA Part 1910.23 - Guarding Floor and Wall Openings and Holes.

F. International Building Code (IBC).

1.3 SUBMITTALS

A. Shop Drawings: Submit fabrication drawings for approval.

PART 2 PRODUCTS

2.1 GENERAL

A. Materials: Unless otherwise specified or indicated on the Drawings, structural and

miscellaneous metals shall conform with the standards of the American Society for

Testing and Materials, including the following:

Item ASTM Standard No. Class, Grade Type or Alloy No.

Cast Iron

Cast Iron A 48 Class 40B

Steel

Galvanized sheet iron or steel A 653 Coating G90

Black steel, sheet or strip A 569 –

Coil (plate) A 635 –

Structural plate, bars, rolled shapes, and A 36 –




Standard bolts, nuts, and washers A 307 –

High strength bolts, nuts and hardened flat washers A 325, A 490 –

Eyebolts A 489 Type 1

Tubing, cold-formed A 500 –

Tubing, hot-formed A 501 –

Steel pipe A 53 Grade B

Stainless Steel

Plate, sheet and strip A 167 Type 304 or 316*

Bars and shapes A 276 Type 304 or 316*

Aluminum

Sheet aluminum-flashing B 209 Alloy 5005-H14, 0.032 inches

minimum thickness

Sheet aluminum-structural B 209 Alloy 6061-T6

Structural aluminum B 308

B 209 Alloy 6061-T6

Extruded aluminum B 221 Alloy 6063-T42

* Use Type 304L or Type 316L if material will be welded.

B. Stainless steels are designated by type or series defined by ASTM.

C. Where stainless steel is welded, use low-carbon stainless steel.

2.2 MISCELLANEOUS ALUMINUM

A. General: Fabricate aluminum products, not covered separately herein, in accordance

with the best practices of the trade and field assemble by riveting or bolting. Do not

weld or flame cut.

2.3 MISCELLANEOUS CAST IRON

A. General:

1. Tough, gray iron, free from cracks, holes, swells, and cold shuts.

2. Quality such that hammer blow will produce indentation on rectangular edge

of casting without flaking metal.

3. Before leaving the foundry, clean castings and apply 16 mil dry film

thickness coating of coal-tar epoxy, unless otherwise specified in or indicated

on the Drawings.

2.4 MISCELLANEOUS STAINLESS STEEL




A. Provide miscellaneous stainless steel items not specified herein as indicated on the

Drawings or specified elsewhere. Fabricate and install in accordance with the best

practices of the trade.

2.5 MISCELLANEOUS STRUCTURAL STEEL

A. Provide miscellaneous steel items not specified herein as indicted on the Drawings

or specified elsewhere. Fabricate and install in accordance with the best practices of

the trade.

2.6 RAILING

A. General: Design and fabricate assemblies to conform to current local, State, and

Occupational Safety and Health Administration standards and requirements.

B. CONTRACTOR shall provide aluminum or stainless steel railing.

C. Aluminum Railings (Nonwelded Pipe):

1. Rails, Posts, and Fitting-assembly Spacers:

a. ASTM B 429, 6063-T5, minimum Schedule 40, extruded aluminum

pipe of minimum 1.89 inch outside diameter and 0.14-inch wall

thickness.

b. Alloy 6063-T6 may be used for pieces requiring bending only.

c. Railing shall be attached to concrete structure with sidemount

brackets as indicated on Drawings.

2. Kick Plates: 6061-T6 aluminum alloy.

3. Fastening and Fasteners: As recommended or furnished by the manufacturer.

4. Other Parts: 6063 extruded aluminum, or F214 or F514.0 aluminum castings.

a. Fabrications: ASTM B 209 or ASTM B 221 extruded bars.

1.) Bases: 6061 or 6063 extruded aluminum alloy.

b. Plus Screws or Blind Rivets: Type 305 stainless steel.

c. Other Parts: Type 300 series stainless steel.

5. Finish of Aluminum Components:

a. Anodized finish, 0.7 mil think, applied to exposed surfaces after

cutting. Aluminum Association Specification M32-C22-A41.

b. Pretreat aluminum for cleaning and removing markings before

anodizing.

6. Fabrication and Assembly:

a. Fabricate posts in single, unspliced pipe length.

b. Perform without welding.

c. Do not epoxy bond the parts.

d. Maximum clear opening between assembled railing components as

indicted on the Drawings.





a. Moultrie Manufacturing Company, Wesrail.

b. Julius Blum and Company, Inc., Connectorail.

c. Craneveyor Corporation Enerco Metals, C-V Rail.

D. Stainless Steel Pipe Railing:


a. R & B Wagner, Inc.

b. Julius Blum and Company.

2. General: Prefabricated shop-assembled type, field welded type, or

mechanically joined type.

3. Materials: Type 304 or Type 316 stainless steel posts, rails, brackets, and

accessory parts.

a. Railings and Posts: Nominal 1-1/2 inch, Schedule 5 pipe with

minimum 1.900 inch outer diameter and 0.065 inch wall thickness,

b. Post Insert Reinforcing for All Posts: 1.750 inch outside diameter

pipe, of 0.083 inch wall thickness, and 26 inches long.

c. Fasteners, Connection Plates, Splice Bars, and Fittings: Type 304 or

Type 316 stainless steel.

d. Stainless Steel Finish: Number 4 NAAMM finish.

4. Fabrication:

a. Fabricate rails and posts to be in same plane.

b. Fabricate posts in single, unspliced pipe length.

c. Make railing sections between splices 20 feet maximum.

d. Form bends in pipe without use of fittings where practical. Form with

internal madrels on power benders.

e. Where railing is welded, make intersections and joints with

continuous 360 degree welds and grind welds smooth.

f. Where railing is mechanically joined, make joints with mechanical

connections utilizing stainless steel machine screws with lock

washers and threaded tubular rivets.

E. Fastenings and Fasteners: As recommended or furnished by railing manufacturer for

use with this system.

PART 3 EXECUTION

3.1 EXAMINATION

A. Verification of Conditions: Examine Work in place to verify that it is satisfactory to

receive the Work of this Section. If unsatisfactory conditions exist, dot not begin this

Work until such conditions have been corrected.

3.2 INSTALLATION, GENERAL

A. Install products as indicated on the Drawings, and in accordance with shop drawings




and manufacturer’s printed instructions, as applicable except where specified

otherwise.

3.3 RAILING

A. During construction, keep exterior surfaces of railing covered with 0.4 millimeters,

minimum, heat shrink polyethylene film.

B. Do not remove protective film before railing have been accepted by OWNER nor

before other Work in proximity of handrails and guardrails has been completed.

C. Discontinue railing at lighting fixtures.

D. Provide 1/8 inch diameter weep hole at base of each post.

E. Where protection is applied for prevention of dissimilar materials electrolysis, make

application such that none of the protective material is visible in the completed

assembly.

F. Space posts as indicated on the Drawings.

G. Anchor post into concrete by grouting posts into core drilled holes in concrete, into

stainless steel sleeves cast in concrete; or bracket mount to face of concrete surfaces;

as specified and indicated on the Drawings.

H. Space rails as indicated on the Drawings.

I. Make adequate provision for expansion and contraction of kickplates and rails.

Make provisions for removable sections where indicated on the Drawings.

J. Make lower rails a single, unspliced length between posts, or continuous.

K. Make top rails continuous whenever possible, and attach single, unspliced length to

3 posts minimum.

L. Draw up fasteners tight with hand wrench or screw driver.

M. Space attachment brackets as indicated on shop drawings or in manufacturer’s

installation instructions.

N. Completed installation shall have railing rigid and free of play at joints and

attachments.

O. Protect railing finish from scratches, gouges, dents, stains, and other damage.




P. Replace damaged or disfigured railing with new.

Q. Shortly before final acceptance of the Work, and after removal of protective

polyethylene film, clean railing with mild detergent or with soap water.

R. After cleaning, thoroughly rinse railing and wipe with soft cloth.

S. Erect railing straight, level, plumb, and true to the positions as indicated on the

Drawings. Correct deviations from true line of grade which are visible to the eye.

3.4 MISCELLANEOUS ALUMINUM

A. Coat aluminum angles cast into concrete with bituminous materials.

END OF SECTION

DIVISION 7

THERMAL AND MOISTURE PROTECTION

Division 7 - Thermal and Moisture Protection


Phase 4 Wastewater Conveyance System and WWTP Improvements

2015

Specifications

Division 7: Thermal and Moisture Protection Section 07900-1

SECTION 07900

JOINT SEALERS

PART 1 GENERAL


A. Sealants and joint backing.

B. Precompressed foam sealers.

1.2 REFERENCES

A. ASTM C 834 - Standard Specification for Latex Sealants.

B. ASTM C 920 - Standard Specification for Elastomeric Joint Sealants.

C. ASTM C 1193 - Standard Guide for Use of Joint Sealants.

D. ASTM D 1667 - Standard Specification for Flexible Cellular Materials--Poly (Vinyl Chloride) Foam (Closed-Cell).

1.3 SUBMITTALS

A. See Section 01340 for submittal procedures.

B. Product Data: Provide data indicating sealant chemical characteristics, performance criteria, substrate preparation, limitations, and color availability.

C. Product Schedule: Provide schedule indicating manufacturer's products matched to the same Sealant Types (Type ES-1 and Type ES-2, etc.) listed in Part 2 of this Section. 1. Failure to provide product schedule will result in immediate rejection of the

submittal.

D. Manufacturer's Installation Instructions: Indicate special procedures, surface preparation, and perimeter conditions requiring special attention.


A. Manufacturer Qualifications: Company specializing in manufacturing the Products specified in this section with minimum five years documented experience.

B. Applicator Qualifications: Company specializing in performing the work of this section with minimum five years experience.



2015

Specifications


1.5 ENVIRONMENTAL REQUIREMENTS

A. Maintain temperature and humidity recommended by the sealant manufacturer during and after installation.

1.6 COORDINATION

A. Coordinate the work with all sections referencing this section.

1.7 WARRANTY

A. Correct defective work within a one year period after Date of Substantial Completion.

B. Warranty: Include coverage for installed sealants and accessories which fail to achieve watertight seal, exhibit loss of adhesion or cohesion, or do not cure.

PART 2 PRODUCTS

2.1 SEALANTS

A. Type ES-1: General Purpose Exterior Sealant: Polyurethane; ASTM C 920, Grade NS, Class 25, Uses NT, M, G, A and O; multi-component. 1. Color: Standard colors matching finished surfaces. 2. Product: Sonolastic NP 2 manufactured by Sonneborn Building Products

Div., ChemRex, Inc: www.chemrex.com or equal.

B. Type ES-2: Self-leveling polyurethane; ASTM C 920, Grade P, Class 25, Uses T and M; multi-component. 1. Color: Standard colors matching finished surfaces. 2. Product: Sonolastic SL2 manufactured by Sonneborn Building Products Div.,

ChemRex, Inc: www.chemrex.com or equal.

C. Type AE-1 - General Purpose Interior Sealant: Acrylic emulsion latex; ASTM C 834, Type OP, Grade NF single component, paintable. 1. Color: Standard colors matching finished surfaces. 2. Product: AC-20 manufactured by Pecora Corporation: www.pecora.com or

equal.

2.2 ACCESSORIES

A. Primer: Non-staining type, recommended bysealant manufacturer to suit application.

B. Joint Cleaner: Non-corrosive and non-staining type, recommended by sealant manufacturer; compatible with joint forming materials.

C. Joint Backing: Round foam rod compatible with sealant; ASTM D 1667, closed cell PVC; oversized 30 to 50 percent larger than joint width.



2015

Specifications


D. Bond Breaker: Pressure sensitive tape recommended by sealant manufacturer to suit application.

PART 3 EXECUTION

3.1 EXAMINATION

A. Verify that substrate surfaces and joint openings are ready to receive work.

B. Verify that joint backing and release tapes are compatible with sealant.

3.2 PREPARATION

A. Remove loose materials and foreign matter which might impair adhesion of sealant.

B. Clean and prime joints in accordance with manufacturer's instructions.

C. Perform preparation in accordance with manufacturer's instructions and ASTM C 1193.

D. Protect elements surrounding the work of this section from damage or disfigurement.

3.3 INSTALLATION

A. Perform work in accordance with sealant manufacturer's requirements for preparation of surfaces and material installation instructions.

B. Completely seal joints indicated on Drawings and as required to render weathertightness, close openings, and allow movement of materials.

C. Perform installation in accordance with ASTM C 1193.

D. Measure joint dimensions and size joint backers to achieve width-to-depth ratio, neck dimension, and surface bond area as recommended by manufacturer, except where specific dimensions are indicated.

E. Install bond breaker where joint backing is not used.

F. Install sealant free of air pockets, foreign embedded matter, ridges, and sags.

G. Apply sealant within recommended application temperature ranges. Consult manufacturer when sealant cannot be applied within these temperature ranges.

H. Tool joints in accordance with manufacturer's instructions.

I. Do not lap or feather onto adjacent surfaces.



2015

Specifications


J. Joint Backing: Do not stretch; avoid joints except at corners, ends, and intersections; install with face 1/8 to 1/4 inch below adjoining surface.

3.4 CLEANING

A. Clean adjacent soiled surfaces.

B. Repair or replace defaced or disfigured finishes caused by work of this Section.

3.5 PROTECTION OF FINISHED WORK

A. Protect sealants until cured.

3.6 SCHEDULE

A. Exterior Joint Sealants: 1. Exterior Joints for Which No Other Sealant Type is Indicated: Type ES-1;

colors as selected. 2. Expansion Joints in Paving Sloped 1:50 or Less: Type ES-2. 3. Expansion Joints in Paving Sloped More than 1:50: Type ES-1. 4. Joints Between Piping and Walls: Type ES-1. 5. Joints Between Exterior Metal Frames and Adjacent Work: Type ES-1.

B. Interior Joint Sealants:

1. Interior Joints for Which No Other Sealant is Indicated: Type ES-1; colors as selected.

2. Joints Between Metal Frames and Adjacent Work: Type AE-1. 3. Joints Between Piping and Walls: Type ES-1.

C. Colors: Except for interior sealants to be painted and as may otherwise be indicated, provide colors that match adjacent surfaces.

END OF SECTION

DIVISION 9

FINISHES

Division 9 - Finishes

Division 9: Finishes Section 09800-10



SECTION 09800

SPECIAL COATINGS

PART 1 GENERAL

1.1 SUMMARY

A. Section Includes: All factory applied and field applied coatings shall follow the provisions of this Section unless other coating requirements are referenced in other specific equipment specification sections. Equipment vendors shall conform to this specification section for factory applied coatings. All exposed surfaces of process equipment, process piping, process piping supports, and other related materials shall be shop primed and field finished, unless specifically stated otherwise. Under all circumstances, stainless steel piping shall not be painted.

1.2 REFERENCES

A. American National Standards Institute (ANSI): 1. A159.1 - Surface Preparation Specifications.

2. Z54.1 - Safety Color Code for Marking Physical Hazards.

B. American Society for Testing and Materials (ASTM): 1. E84 - Standard Test Method for Surface Burning Characteristics of Building

Materials.

C. National Fire Protection Association (NFPA): 1. 101 - Life Safety Code.

D. Steel Structures Painting Council (SSPC): 1. SP-1 - Solvent Cleaning. 2. SP-2 - Hand Tool Cleaning. 3. SP-3 - Power Tool Cleaning. 4. SP-5 - White Metal Blast. 5. SP-6 - Commercial Blast Cleaning. 6. SP-7 - Brush-Off Blast Cleaning. 7. SP-10 - Near White Blast Cleaning. 8. SP-11 - Power Tool Cleaning to Near White Metal. 9. SSPC 13 - Preparation of Concrete. 10. Steel Structures Painting Manual, Volumes 1 and 2. 11. Pictorial Standards for Surface Preparation - SSPC-VIS 1. 12. Measurement of Dry Paint Thickness With Magnetic Gages - SSPC SP A2.

1.3 DEFINITIONS




A. Submerged Metal: Steel or iron surfaces below tops of channel or structure walls which will contain water even when above expected water level.

B. Submerged Concrete Surfaces: Surfaces which are or will be: 1. Underwater. 2. In structures which normally contain water. 3. Below tops of walls or water containing structures.

C. Dry Film Thickness: Thickness of fully cured coating, measured in mils.

1.4 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS

A. Coating materials for concrete and metal surfaces shall be especially adapted for use in wastewater treatment plants.

1.5 SUBMITTALS

A. Product Data: Submit in accordance with Sections 01340 and 09900.

B. Certificates: Submit in accordance with Article 1.06.

C. Manufacturer’s Instructions: Submit in accordance with requirements for Product Data and Section 09900.


A. Qualifications of Applicator: 1. Experienced with at least 3 years experience applying type or types of

coatings under conditions similar to those of the Work. 2. Manufacturer approved applicator when manufacturer has approved

applicator program. 3. Approved and licensed bypolymorphic polyester resin manufacturer to apply

polymorphic polyester resin coating system.

B. Regulatory Requirements: Include requirements concerning the following: 1. Volatile organic compound limitations. 2. Coatings containing lead compounds. 3. Abrasives and abrasive blast cleaning techniques, and disposal. 4. NSF certification of coatings for use in potable water supply systems.

C. Certification: Certify that applicable pigments meet the specifications.

D. Compatibility of Coatings: Use products by same manufacturer for prime coats, intermediate coats, and finish coats on same surface, unless specified otherwise.





A. Regulatory Requirements: In accordance with Section 09900.

1.8 MAINTENANCE

A. Extra Materials: Provide one extra gallon of each type of coating.

PART 2 PRODUCTS


A. Products specified are manufactured by Tnemec.

B. Subject to compliance with the Contract Documents, the following manufacturers are acceptable: 1. Ameron Protective Coatings Division 2. Carboline Protective Coatings. 3. Porter Coatings. 4. Sherwin Williams. 5. Tnemec.

2.2 MATERIALS

A. All materials used must not contain more than 3.5 LBS/GAL VOC as applied (in thinned state) unless noted otherwise.

B. For unspecified materials such as turpentine or linseed oil, provide manufacturer’s recommended products.

C. Paint Systems - General:

1. P=prime coat. I=intermediate coat. F1, F2,. Fn = first finish coat, second finish coat . . . nth finish coat, color as selected by OWNER.

2. If two finish coats of same material are required, CONTRACTOR may, at his option and by written approval from paint manufacturer and ENGINEER, apply one coat equal to mil thickness of two coats specified.

3. Paint thickness specified are minimum dry mil thickness.

D. Paint Systems: 1. System No. 1 - Polyamide Epoxy - For ferrous metals and metals located at

and above a line 6 inches above the high liquid level and other non- submerged areas (except galvanized steel):

2. Surfaces include but are not limited to process steel and ductile iron piping,

pumps, equipment and pipe supports, and process mechanical equipment.

Tnemec




P1=Series 66-1211 VOC=3.42 LBS/GAL thinned 1 coat, 3-5 mils DFT (Dry Film Thickness) F1=Series 66 1 coat, 4-6 mils DFT F2=Series 66

1 coat, 4-6- mils DFT F2E=73 Series 1 coat, 2.5-3.5 mils DFT VOC=3.5 LBS/GAL thinned Alternate Tnemec system P1=Series N140I, 1 coat, 4-6 mils F1=Series 73, 1 coat, 3-3.5 mils DFT

3. System 2 - Not Used.

4. System No. 3 - Polyamide Epoxy - For all assembled galvanized steel items; and all plastic including PVC and CPVC surfaces. Exposed PVC and CPVC piping shall be painted.

Tnemec

P1=Series 66 VOC=3.42 LBS/GAL thinned 1 coat, 3-5 mils DFT *F1=Series 66 1 coat, 4-6 mils DFT

F1E=73 Series VOC=3.5 LBS/GAL thinned 1 coat, 2.5-3.5 mils DFT * Replace F1 with F1E at exterior

5. System No. 4 - Polyamide Epoxy - For field cut edge of galvanized steel where top coat is required.

Tnemec

P1=Series 66 VOC=3.42 LBS/GAL thinned 1 coat, 3-5 mils DFT *F1=Series 66 VOC=3.42 LBS/GAL thinned 1 coat, 4-6 mils DFT F1E=73 Series VOC=3.50 LBS/GAL thinned 1 coat, 2.5-3.5mils DFT * Replace F1 with F1E at exterior

6. System No. 5 - Polyamide Epoxy - For bituminous coated pipe and materials.

Tnemec

P1=Series 66 VOC=3.42 LBS/GAL thinned 1 coat, 3-5 mils DFT F1=Series 66




1 coat, 4-6 mils DFT *F2=Series 73 VOC=3.50 LBS/GAL thinned 1 coat, 2 .5-3.5 milsDFT * Add F2 at exterior

E. Sandblast Abrasive:

1. Sandblast media shall be clean copper slag of the proper particle size to produce the specified profile. Media shall not contain any extraneous matter.

2. Use proper equipment and abrasives when blast cleaning to produce the mil profile, within the range of 2.0 to 3.5 or as recommended by the coating manufacturer. Do not reuse sand or flat abrasives.

PART 3 EXECUTION

3.1 GENERAL PREPARATION

A. Prepare surfaces in accordance with coating manufacturer’s instructions, unless more stringent requirements follow.

B. Protect following surfaces from abrasive blasting by masking, or other means: 1. Threaded portions of valve and gate stems. 2. Machined surfaces for sliding contact. 3. Surfaces to be assembled against gaskets. 4. Surfaces of shafting on which sprockets are to fit. 5. Surfaces of shafting on which bearings are to fit. 6. Machined surfaces of bronze trim, including those slide gates. 7. Cadmium-plated items except cadmium-plated, zinc-plated, or sherardized

fasteners used in assembly of equipment requiring abrasive blasting. 8. Galvanized items, unless scheduled to be coated.

C. Protect installed equipment, mechanical drives, and adjacent coated equipment from abrasive blasting to prevent damage caused by entering sand or dust.

D. Concrete: Clean concrete surfaces of dust, mortar, fins, loose concrete particles, form release materials, oil, and grease. Fill voids so that surface is smooth. Etch or brush off-blast clean (SSPC SP-7) as recommended by coating manufacturer.

E. Ferrous Metal Surfaces: 1. Remove grease and oil in accordance with SSPC SP-1. 2. Remove rust, scale, and welding slag and spatter, and prepare surfaces in

accordance with SSPC SP-10. 3. Abrasive blast surfaces within 12 hours of coating.

4. When abrasive blasted surfaces rust or discolor before coating, abrasive blast surfaces again to remove rust and discoloration.

5. Do not coat surfaces before abrasive blasting. 6. When metal surfaces are exposed because of coating damage, abrasive blast

surfaces before touching-up.




F. Ferrous Metal Surfaces not to be Submerged: Abrasive blast in accordance with SSPC SP-10, unless blasting may damage adjacent surfaces, prohibited or specified otherwise. Where not possible to abrasive blast, power tool clean surfaces in accordance with SSPC SP-11.

G. Ferrous Metal Surfaces to be Submerged: Unless specified otherwise, abrasive blast in accordance with SSPC SP-10 or better to clean and provide roughened surface profile of not less than 2 mils and not more than 4 mils in depth when measured with Elcometer 123, or as recommended by the coating manufacturer.

H. Sherardized, Aluminum, Copper, and Bronze Surfaces: Prepare in accordance with paint manufacture’s instructions.

I. Galvanized Surface: 1. Degrease or solvent clean to remove oily residue. 2. Power tool or hand tool clean or whip abrasive blast.

3. Apply metal pretreatment within 24 hours before coating galvanized surfaces that cannot be thoroughly abraded physically, such as bolts, nuts, or preformed channels.

J. Shop Primed Metal: 1. Correct abrades, scratched or otherwise damaged areas of shop prime coat by

sanding or abrasive blasting in accordance with SSPC SP-6 for metal surfaces not to be submerged and SSPC SP-10 for metal surfaces to be submerged.

2. When entire shop priming fails or has weathered excessively, or when recommended by paint manufacturer, abrasive blast shop prime coat to remove entire coat and prepare surface in accordance with SSPC SP-10.

3. When incorrect prime coat is applied, remove incorrect prime coat by abrasive blasting in accordance with SSPC SP-10.

K. Non-metallic surfaces: Prepare surface per manufacturer’s recommendation.

L. Abrasive blast cadmium-plated, zinc plated, or sherardized fasteners in same manner as unprotected metal when used in assembly of equipment designated for abrasive blasting.

M. Abrasive blast components to be attached to surfaces which cannot be abrasive blasted before components are attached.

N. Grind sharp edges to approximately 1/8 inch radius.

3.2 GENERAL PROTECTION

A. Protect adjacent surfaces not to be coated from spatter and droppings with drop cloths and other coverings. 1. Mask off surfaces of items not to be coated or remove items from area.




3.3 GENERAL APPLICATION REQUIREMENTS

A. Apply coatings in accordance with manufacturer’s instructions.

B. Paint metal unless specified otherwise.

C. Verify metal surface preparation immediately before applying coating in accordance with SSPC Pictorial Surface Preparation Standard.

D. Allow surfaces to dry, except where coating manufacturer requires surface wetting before coating.

E. Wash coat and prime sherardized, aluminum, copper, and bronze surfaces, or prime with manufacturer’s recommended special primer.

F. Prime shop primed metal surfaces. Spot prime exposed metal of shop primes surfaces before applying primer over entire surface.

G. Apply minimum number of specified coats.

H. Apply coats to thicknesses specified, especially at edges and corners.

I. Apply additional coats when necessary to achieve specified thicknesses.

J. Coat surfaces without drops, ridges, waves, holiday, laps, or brush marks.

K. Remove spatter and droppings after completion of coating.

L. When multiple coats of same material are specified, tint prime coat and intermediate coats with suitable pigment to distinguish each coat.

M. Dust coatings between coats. Lightly sand and dust surfaces to receive high gloss finishes, unless instructed otherwise by coating manufacturer.

N. Spray Application:

1. When using sprayapplication, apply coating to thickness not greater than that suggested in coating manufacturer’s instructions for brush coat application.

2. Use airless spray method, unless air spray method is required by coating manufacturer’s instruction or these Specifications.

3. Conduct spray coating under controlled conditions. 4. Protect adjacent construction and property from coating mist or spray.

O. Drying and Recoating:

1. Limit drying time to that required by these Specifications or coating manufacturer’s instructions.

2. Do not allow excessive drying time or exposure which may impair bond




between coats. 3. Recoat epoxies within time limits recommended by epoxy manufacturer. 4. When time limits are exceeded, abrasive blast coat prior to applying another

coat. 5. When limitations on time between abrasive blasting and coating cannot be

met before attachment of components to surfaces which cannot be abrasive blasted, coat components before attachment.

6. Ensure primer and intermediate coats of coating are unscarred and completely integral at time of application of each succeeding coat.

7. Touch up suction spots between coats and apply additional coats where required to produce finished surface of solid, even color, free of defects.

8. Leave no holidays. 9. Sand and recoat scratched, contaminated, or otherwise damaged coating

surfaces so damages are invisible to naked eye.

P. Dry film thickness (DFT) readings of the coating are to be taken to provide reasonable assurance that the specified minimum DFT has been achieved. A minimum of five (5) separate spot measurements shall be made over every 100 square feet in area. Each spot measurement shall consist of an average of three (3) gage readings next to each other no further than six (6) inches apart. Each spot measurement must be within the specified minimum thickness. The single gage readings, however, making up the spot measurement, are permitted to be no less than 80 percent of the specified minimum thickness.

3.4 EPOXY AND POLYURETHANE COATING SYSTEM

A. Preparation: 1. Prepare surfaces in accordance with general preparation requirements, unless

more stringent requirements follow. 2. Prepare concrete surfaces per general preparation requirements unless more

stringent requirements are required by the manufacturer. 3. Touch up shop primed steel and miscellaneous iron. 4. Coating shall be applied to ferrous metal surfaces that have been abrasive

blasted at job site within twelve (12) hours of abrasive blasting. When cleaned surfaces rust or discolor, surfaces shall be re-blasted in accordance with Section 3.01.

5. Degrease or solvent clean, whip abrasive blast, power tool, or hand tool clean galvanized metal surfaces.

6. Lightly abrasive blast or sand fiberglass and plastic to be coated to roughen surfaces just prior to painting.

B. Application:

1. Apply coatings in accordance with general application requirements, unless more stringent requirements follow.

3.5 HIGH SOLIDS POLYAMINE EPOXY SYSTEM




A. Preparation: 1. Prepare surfaces in accordance with general preparation requirements, unless

more stringent requirements follow. 2. Abrasive blast ferrous metal surfaces to be submerged at jobsite in

accordance with SSPC SP-10 within 12 hours of coating. When cleaned surfaces rust or discolor, abrasive blast surfaces in accordance with SSPC SP- 10.

3. Coating shall be applied to ferrous metal surfaces that have been abrasive blasted at job site within twelve (12) hours of abrasive blasting. When cleaned surfaces rust or discolor, surfaces shall be re-blasted in accordance with Section 3.01.

B. Application:

1. Apply coatings in accordance with general application requirements, unless more stringent requirements follow.

2. Recoat or apply succeeding epoxy coats within time limits recommended by manufacturer. Prepare surfaces for recoating in accordance with manufacturer’s instructions.

3. Coat metal to be submerged before installation when necessary, to obtain acceptable finish and to prevent damage to other surfaces.

4. Paint entire surface of support brackets, stem guides, pipe clips, fasteners, and other metal devices bolted to concrete.

5. Paint surface of items to be exposed and adjacent 1 inch to be concealed when embedded in concrete or masonry.

3.6 EPOXY, POLYURETHANE AND CLEAR COAT SYSTEM

A. Preparation: 1. Prepare surfaces in accordance with general preparation.

2. Aluminum surfaces must have a surface profile which can be created by either brush-off blast cleaning or chemical etching. Manufacturer’s representative shall determine acceptability of surface preparation prior to primer application.

3. All surfaces to be clean, dry and free of contaminants prior to coating application.

B. Application: 1. Apply coatings in accordance with general application requirements, unless

more stringent requirements follow.


1. Inspection will be performed prior to and following the abrasive blasting and following each coat. Strip and remove defective coats, prepare surfaces and recoat. When approved, apply next coat.

B. Control and check dry film thicknesses and integrity of coatings.




C. Measure dry film thickness with calibrated thickness gauge. D. Dry film thicknesses may be checked with Elcometer or Positector 2000.

E. Verify coat integrity with low-voltage holiday detector. Allow OWNER to use detector for additional checking.

F. Check wet film thickness before coal tar epoxy coating cures on concrete or nonferrous metal substrates.

3.8 SCHEDULES OF ITEMS NOT REQUIRING COATING

A. Items that have received final coat at factory and not listed to receive coating in the field.

B. Brass, bronze, copper, plastic, rubber, stainless steel, chrome, everdur or lead.

C. Buried or encased piping or conduit.

D. Galvanized pipe trays and cable trays.

E. Grease fittings.

F. Steel to be encased in concrete or masonry.

G. Nameplates.

H. Serial number tags.

I. Control Panels.

J. Instruments.

K. Electrical Conduit.

3.9 SURFACES TO BE COATED IN THE FIELD

A. In general, coat steel and iron surfaces unless specified or otherwise indicated on the Drawings or listed above in Section 3.08. Coat pvc and cpvc piping. Coat concrete surfaces and anodized aluminum only when specified or indicated on the Drawings.

END OF SECTION


Phase 4 Wastewater Conveyance Systems and WWTP Improvement

2015

Specifications


SECTION 09900

PAINT

PART 1 GENERAL


A. Surface preparation.

B. Field application of paints.

C. See Schedule - Surfaces to be Finished, at end of Section.

1.2 RELATED SECTIONS

A. Section 09800 - Special Coatings: Process piping and process equipment.

1.3 REFERENCES

A. ASTM D 16 - Standard Terminology for Paint, Related Coatings, Materials, and

Applications.

B. ASTM D 4442 - Standard Test Methods for Direct Moisture Content Measurement

of Wood and Wood-Base Materials.

1.4 DEFINITIONS

A. In addition to the following definitions, conform to ASTM D 16 for interpretation of

terms used in this section:

1. Buried - Covered with earth.

2. Exposed or Exposed Surfaces - Areas visible when permanent or built-in

fixtures, convector covers, covers for finned-tube radiation, grilles, and

similar components are in place. Extend coatings in these areas, as required,

to maintain the system integrity and provide desired protection.

1.5 SUBMITTALS

A. See Section 01340 for submittal procedures.

B. Product Data: Provide data on all finishing products.

1. Paint System Identification: Identify products according to the identification

numbers for each interior and exterior paint system, as indicated in Part 2 of

this Section.



2015

Specifications


C. Paint Samples: Submit two paper chip samples, 3 x 3 inches in size illustrating range

of colors and textures available for each surface finishing product scheduled.

D. Manufacturer's Instructions: Indicate special surface preparation procedures and

substrate conditions requiring special attention.

E. Maintenance Data: Submit data on cleaning, touch-up, and repair of painted and

coated surfaces.

F. Qualification Data: For firms and persons specified in the Quality Assurance Article

to demonstrate their capabilities and experience. Include lists of completed projects,

with project names and addresses, names and addresses of architects or engineers and

owners, and other specified information.


A. Manufacturer Qualifications: Company specializing in manufacturing the Products

specified in this section with minimum 10 years documented experience.

B. Applicator Qualifications: Company specializing in performing the work of this

section with minimum five years documented experience.

1.7 REGULATORY REQUIREMENTS

A. Conform to applicable code for flame and smoke rating and VOC requirements for

products and finishes.

B. Lead, Heavy Metals, Cadmium, and Chromates: Lead, Heavy Metals, Cadmium, and

Chromate content of painting materials shall not exceed amount permitted byfederal,

state, and local authorities.

C. Coatings for surfaces in contact with potable water or water being treated for potable

use shall not impart any taste or odor to the water or result in any organic or inorganic

content in excess of the maximum contaminant level established by applicable laws

or regulations.

D. Comply with governing code requirements for air quality and material disposal

regulations.

1.8 MOCK-UP

A. Provide mock-ups, for each of the following substrates, illustrating painting and

coating colors and finishes. 1. Metal: Provide panel equal to 4 square feet in size for each color and finish.

B. Locate where directed by ENGINEER.



2015

Specifications


C. Mock-up(s) may remain as part of the Work.

D. Work advanced without approved job mock-ups shall be completely removed and

re-installed without additional compensation to OWNER.

1.9 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND PROTECTION

A. Deliver products to site in sealed and labeled containers; inspect to verify

acceptability.

B. Container Label: Include manufacturer's name, type of paint, brand name, lot

number, brand code, coverage, surface preparation, drying time, cleanup

requirements, color designation, and instructions for mixing and reducing.

C. Paint Materials: Store at minimum ambient temperature of 45 degrees F and a

maximum of 90 degrees F, in ventilated area, and as required by manufacturer's

instructions.

D. Provide fire extinguishers and post caution signs warning against smoking and open

flame when working with flammable materials.

E. Protect work of other trades, whether being painted or not, against damage by

painting. Correct damage by cleaning, repairing or replacing, and repainting, as

approved by ENGINEER. Provide "Wet Paint" signs to protect newly painted

finishes. Remove temporary protective wrappings provided by others to protect their

work after completing painting operations.


A. Do not apply materials when surface and ambient temperatures are outside the

temperature ranges required by the paint product manufacturer.

B. Do not apply exterior coatings during rain or snow, or when relative humidity is

outside the humidity ranges required by the paint product manufacturer.

C. Minimum Application Temperatures for Latex Paints: 45 degrees F for interiors; 50

degrees F for exterior; unless required otherwise by manufacturer's instructions.

D. Provide lighting level of 80 ft candles measured mid-height at substrate surface.

PART 2 PRODUCTS

2.1 MANUFACTURERS

A. Manufacturers - Provide paint and coating products by one of the following:



2015

Specifications


1. AkzoNobel Inc.: www.interpon.com.

2. Benjamin Moore & Co. (Moore): www.benjaminmoore.com.

3. Carboline Company (Carboline): www.carboline.com.

4. Coronado Paint Company (Coronado): www.coronadopaint.com.

5. Diamond Vogel (DV): http://www.diamondvogel.com.

6. Glidden Professional: www.gliddenprofessional.com.

7. Kwal-Howells, Inc. (KH): www.kwalhowells.com.

8. Okon, Inc. (OKON): www.okoninc.com.

9. Sherwin- Williams Company (SW): www.sherwinwilliams.com.

10. Tnemec Company Inc (Tnemec): www.tnemec.com

11. Or equal.

2.2 PAINTS AND COATINGS - GENERAL

A. Paint exposed surfaces, except where the Paint Schedule indicates that a surface or

material is not to be painted or is to remain natural. If the Paint Schedules does not

specifically mention an item or a surface, paint the item or surface the same as

similar adjacent materials or surfaces whether or not the Schedules indicates color(s).

If the Schedule does not indicate color(s) or finishes, the ENGINEER will select

from standard colors and finishes available.

B. Surface preparation, priming, and finish coats specified in this Section are in addition

to shop priming and surface treatment specified in other Sections.

C. Paints and Coatings: Ready mixed, except field-catalyzed coatings. Prepare

pigments:

1. To a soft paste consistency, capable of being readily and uniformly dispersed

to a homogeneous coating. 2. For good flow and brushing properties.

3. Capable of drying or curing free of streaks or sags.

D. Material Compatibility: Provide block fillers, primers, undercoats, and finish-coat

materials that are compatible with one another and the substrates indicated under

conditions of service and application, as demonstrated by manufacturer based on

testing and field experience.

1. Review other Sections of these Specifications in which prime paints are to be

provided to ensure compatibility of the total coatings system for the various

substrates. CONTRACTOR shall be responsible for the compatibility of all

shop primed and field painted items.

2. Furnish information on the characteristics of the finish materials proposed to

use, to ensure that compatible prime coats are used. Provide Tie coats over

incompatible primers or remove and reprime as required. Notify ENGINEER,

in writing, of anticipated problems using the coating systems as specified

with substrates primed by others.

E. At completion of construction activities of other trades, touch up and restore

damaged or defaced painted surfaces.



2015

Specifications


2.3 PAINT SYSTEMS - EXTERIOR

A. Paint WE-OP-3A-1 - Not Used:

B. Paint CE-OP-3E-1 - Not Used:

C. Paint CE-OP-2AC-3 - Not Used:

D. Paint ME-OP-3E-4 - Ferrous and Galvanized Metals, Primed or Unprimed,

Opaque, 3 Coats: 1. Touch-up: Moore; Alkyd Metal Primer M06.

2. Primer: Moore; Alkyd Metal Primer M06; One coat, 1.3-1.5 dry mils.

3. Gloss Finish: Moore; Urethane Alkyd Gloss Enamel M22; Two coats, 2.0-2.2

dry mils.

PART 3 EXECUTION

3.1 EXAMINATION

A. Verify that surfaces are ready to receive Work as instructed by the product

manufacturer.

B. Examine surfaces scheduled to be finished prior to commencement of work. Report

any condition that may potentially affect proper application.

C. Test shop-applied primer for compatibility with subsequent cover materials.

D. Test previously painted surfaces for compatibility with subsequent cover materials.

E. Measure moisture content of surfaces using an electronic moisture meter. Do not

apply finishes unless moisture content of surfaces are below the following

maximums: 1. Interior Wood: 15 percent, measured in accordance with ASTM D 4442.

3.2 PREPARATION

A. Perform all preparation and cleaning procedures as specified herein and in strict

accordance with the paint manufacturer's instructions for each particular substrate

and atmospheric condition.

B. Clean surfaces to be painted before applying paint or surface treatments. Remove oil

and grease with clean cloths and cleaning solvents prior to mechanical cleaning.

Program the cleaning and painting so that dust and other contaminants from the

cleaning process will not fall in wet, newly painted surfaces.

C. Surface Appurtenances: Remove or mask electrical plates, hardware, light



2015

Specifications


fixture trim, escutcheons, and fittings prior to preparing surfaces or finishing.

D. Surfaces: Correct defects and clean surfaces which affect work of this section.

E. Marks: Seal marks which maybleed through surface finishes with tie coat

compatible with paint.

F. Impervious Surfaces: Remove mildew in accordance with paint

manufacturer's recommendations.

G. Galvanized Surfaces to be Painted: Remove surface contamination and oils and

wash with solvent.

H. Uncoated Steel and Iron Surfaces to be Painted: Remove grease, mill scale,

weld splatter, dirt, and rust. Where heavy coatings of scale are evident, remove

by hand wire brushing or sandblasting; clean by washing with solvent. Apply a

treatment of phosphoric acid solution, ensuring weld joints, bolts, and nuts are

similarly cleaned. Prime paint entire surface; spot prime after repairs.

I. Factory Finished Surfaces to be Field Painted: Lightly sand to create a dull

surface and as required by paint manufacturer. Provide tie coat over entire

factory-finished surfaces as required by paint manufacturer.

J. Shop-Primed and Non-Shop-Primed Ferrous Surfaces to be Finish Painted:

Clean and prepare in accordance with manufacturer's recommendations. Feather

edges to make touch-up patches inconspicuous. Prime bare steel surfaces.

K. Interior Wood Items to Receive Opaque Finish: Wipe off dust and grit prior

to priming. Seal knots, pitch streaks, and sappy sections with sealer. Fill nail holes

and cracks after primer has dried; sand between coats. Back prime concealed

surfaces before installation.

3.3 APPLICATION

A. Apply products in accordance with manufacturer's instructions:

1. Anyspot measurement found below the required minimum dryfilm

thickness shall be repainted by the CONTRACTOR in accordance

with the manufacturer's instructions, at no additional cost to the OWNER.

B. Where adjacent sealant is to be painted, do not apply finish coats until sealant is

applied.

C. Do not apply finishes to surfaces that are not dry. Allow applied coats to dry

before next coat is applied.

D. Apply each coat to uniform appearance. Apply each coat of paint slightly darker than



2015

Specifications


preceding coat unless otherwise approved.

E. Vacuum clean surfaces of loose particles. Use tack cloth to remove dust and particles

just prior to applying next coat.


A. The ENGINEER reserves the right to test surfaces, film thickness, and paint products

at any time and as often as the ENGINEER deems necessary during the period when

paint is being applied:

1. Anyspot measurement found below the required minimum dryfilm thickness

shall be repainted by the CONTRACTOR in accordance with the

manufacturer's instructions, at no additional cost to the OWNER.

2. Do not paint unsatisfactory surfaces until they have been corrected and are in

accordance with paint manufacturer's recommendations.

3.5 CLEANING

A. Collect waste material which may constitute a fire hazard, place in closed metal

containers, and remove daily from site.

3.6 SCHEDULE - SURFACES TO BE FINISHED

A. Do Not Paint or Finish the Following Items:

1. Items fully factory-finished unless specified herein or specifically noted.

2. Fire rating labels, equipment serial number and capacity labels.

3. Stainless steel, or chromium plated items.

4. Bronze and brass items.

5. Anodized aluminum items:

a. Paint concealed aluminum surfaces in contact with concrete, and

dissimilar materials as described below under Schedule - Paint

Systems. B. Paint the surfaces described below under Schedule - Paint Systems.

C. Process Piping and Process Equipment: Coat in accordance with Section 09800.

D. Mechanical and Electrical: Use paint systems defined for the substrates to be

finished.

1. Paint both sides and edges of plywood backboards for electrical and

telephone equipment before installing equipment.

3.7 SCHEDULE - PAINT SYSTEMS

A. Galvanized Metals for Which No Other Paint System is indicated: ME-OP-3E-4.

B. Ferrous Metals for Which No Other Paint System is indicated: ME-OP-3E-4.



2015

Specifications


3.8 SCHEDULE - COLORS

A. Colors: Provide colors as selected by ENGINEER from manufacturer's standards.

END OF SECTION




SECTION 09970

CONCRETE COATING SYSTEM PART 1 - GENERAL 1.01 SUMMARY

A. Section Includes: 1. This section specifies the coating system, surface preparation, and application

requirements for coating new and existing concrete surfaces. The coating schedule shall be as follows:

System Description Coating Surfaces Coating Requirement Coating System

1. Headworks Wetwell Interior wall & floor New coating CS-A 2. New Manholes Interior wall & floor New coating CS-A

1.02 REFERENCES

A. American Society for Testing Materials: 1. D4258: Standard Practice for Surface Cleaning Concrete for Coating. 2. D4260: Standard Practice for Liquid and Gelled Acid Etching of Concrete. 3. D4262: Standard Test Method for pH of Chemically Cleaned or Etched

Concrete Surfaces. 4. D16: Standard Terminology for Paint, Related Coatings, Materials, and

Applications. 5. D4541: Standard Test Method for Pull-Off Strength of Coatings Using

Portable Adhesion Testers. 6. E162: Standard Test Method for Surface Flammability of Materials Using a

Radiant Heat Energy Source 7. D3960: Standard Definitions and Terminology

B. Where standards of surface preparation are described by citing SSPC specification numbers reference is made to the “Steel Structures Painting Manual” Volume 2 published by the Steel Structures Painting Council.

1.03 DEFINITIONS

A. Dry Film Thickness (DFT): The thickness of one fully cured continuous application of coating.

B. Field Coat: The application or the completion of application of the coating system

after installation of the surface at the work site. C. Shop Coat: One or more coats applied in a shop or plant prior to shipment to the

site of erection or fabrication, where the field or finishing coat is applied. D. Tie Coat: An intermediate coat used to bond different types of paint coats.

Coatings used to improve the adhesion of a succeeding coat.




E. Photochemically Reactive Organic Material: Any organic material that sunlight will

cause to react with components in the atmosphere giving rise to secondary contaminants and reaction intermediates in the atmosphere which can have detrimental effects.

F. Volatile Organic Compound (VOC) Content: The portion of the coating that is a

compound of carbon, is photochemically reactive, and evaporates during drying or curing, expressed in grams per liter or pounds per gallon.

1.04 SUBMITTALS

A. Submit in accordance with Section 01340:

1. Product Data: Fully describe all products proposed for use. 2. For each primer and finish coating, the Contractor shall provide the

manufacturer's application instructions, which shall include the following: a. Surface preparation requirements.

b. Primer type, where required. c. Maximum dry and wet mil thickness per coat. d. Minimum and maximum curing time between coats, including

atmospheric conditions for each. e. Curing time before submergence in liquid. f. Thinner to be used, if any, with each coating.

g. Ventilation requirements. h. Minimum atmospheric conditions during which the coat shall be

applied. i. Allowable application methods. j. Maximum allowable moisture content. k. Maximum storage life.

3. Samples: Submit two 8-1/2- x 11-inch samples of the complete system. 4. Sample color selection chart. 5. Manufacturer’s certification attesting that the applicator is qualified and

approved to install the products specified herein. The certification shall include the following applicator qualifications:

a. Current Arizona contractor’s license or equivalent. b. The applicator shall demonstrate applicable experience and

performance history by submitting references from three other projects (within the past five years) using the same or similar corrosion protection system. Include project name, client name, date of work, engineer, and name and phone number of a contact person familiar with the project.

c. Qualifications for testing for holidays and other discontinuities. 6. The manufacturer’s field representative verification specified herein. 7. Warranty bond specified herein. 8. Provide Material Safety Data Sheets (MSDS) for all products.


A. Environmental Regulatory Requirements: 1. All work, material, procedures, and practices under this Section shall conform

to requirements of the local air quality requirements. Prime or finish coat




painting done in locations other than the project site shall be in accordance with air quality regulations in effect at the place the coating is applied. Products specified herein are, to the best of the ENGINEER’S knowledge, in compliance with the applicable volatile organic compounds (VOC)

1 levels

allowable at the date these Specifications were issued for bid. 2. If the CONTRACTOR applies coatings that have been modified or thinned

other than as recommended by manufacturer, he will be responsible for any fines, costs, remedies or legal actions that may result.

B. Manufacturer’s Recommendations: Comply with the disposal instructions of the

coating material manufacturer. 1.06 PRODUCT DELIVERY

A. Deliver materials in manufacturer's labeled, unopened containers. Each container shall bear the manufacturer's name, coating type, batch number, date of manufacture, storage life, and special directions.

B. Materials shall be stored in enclosed structures and shall be protected from weather

and excessive heat or cold. Materials shall be stored, delivered and handled in accordance with state and local codes. Materials exceeding storage life recommended by the manufacturer shall be removed from the site.

1.07 MANUFACTURER’S FIELD REPRESENTATIVE

A. The manufacturer’s field representative shall verify in writing that the proper

procedures and equipment are being used by the applicator and that the coating is being properly applied.

1.08 WARRANTY BOND

A. Provide a two (2) year materials and labor warranty bond covering the repair or replacement of the entire coating system to correct shrinkage cracks, bond failure or surface deterioration resulting from causes other than abuse. The two (2) year warranty period shall commence on the date of Substantial Completion.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.01 MATERIALS

A. GENERAL: 1. Coating system shall be compatible with the concrete surface preparation

methods as specified herein. Any limitations or deviations requested by the manufacturer shall be approved in writing by the ENGINEER prior to surface preparation.

2. Primer shall be as recommended by the manufacturer and shall be used for all

coatings applied to concrete.

1 Measured in grams per liter by weight of coating as applied, excluding water and color added to be base tint.




3. Epoxy based coatings shall be applied within two months (unless the

manufacturer’s requirements are more stringent) of their date of manufacture, unless otherwise approved in writing by the ENGINEER.

4. Thicknesses specified herein are the minimum dry film thicknesses required

and do not include the primer thickness, unless otherwise noted. Provide greater thickness where recommended by the manufacturer.

B. PRODUCT REQUIREMENTS FOR CONCRETE COATINGS:

1. One hundred percent (100%) solids hybrid novolac epoxy formulation except that only fillers that enhance the corrosion resistance, mechanical and application properties may be used.

2. Adhesive failures shall be in the concrete (substrate) in accordance with ASTM D-4541.

2.02 MANUFACTURER

A. The coating system shall be limited to the following manufacturers and suppliers:

1. Sewer Shield Liner SS150 by Environmental Coatings, Mesa, AZ, 480-986-1212.

2. SP2000R by Superior Environmental products, Addison, Texas, 972-

490-0566.

B. The caulk for the coating system shall be limited to the following manufactures and suppliers:

1. Sewer Shield Caulk by Environmental Coatings, Mesa, AZ, 480-986-1212.

2. ER1500R Caulk by Superior Environmental products, Addison, Texas, 972-490-0566.

PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.01 EXTENT OF WORK

A. The coating system shall be applied to all exposed interior concrete surfaces of the following locations: sanitary manholes, wetwell structure for mechanical screen, and existing sanitary manholes that are modified as part of this work.

B. The coating system shall not be applied to gates, gate frames and other

mechanical equipment.

C. The coating shall not be applied to any working or expansion joint face. However, an approved hybrid novolac epoxy formulation caulk shall be used at all working and expansion joints.

3.03 SURFACE PREPARATION OF CONCRETE SURFACES




A. Surface preparation shall be in strict accordance with the coating system manufacturer’s written requirements for the material used except that the following minimum surface preparation shall be completed:

1. All new concrete shall receive either a wet abrasive brush-off blast using

a minimum water pressure of 5,000 psi or a dry sandblast at 125 psi to lightly abrade the surface and open up subsurface holes and voids, plus etch the surface sufficiently to at least a 3 to 5 mil profile or more if recommended in writing by the manufacturer.

2. After establishing the profile, all abraded surfaces shall be pressure

washed at a minimum of 3,000 psi to remove any residual.

B. Fill all surfaces defects with an approved underlayment to obtain a void-free surface according to the manufacturer’s requirements. The coating shall not be applied within less than 30 days after placement of the concrete.

3.04 APPLICATION OF COATINGS

A. All coatings shall be applied in strict accordance with the manufacturer’s requirements and recommendations. Number of coats, excluding primers, to achieve the minimum required total mil thickness shall be as recommended by the manufacturer. A minimum of two coats shall be required, unless otherwise approved in writing by the ENGINEER.

B. Confirm that the ambient temperature, the prepared surface temperature, and

the temperature of the coating material to be applied are within the manufacturer’s recommended ranges. Coatings shall be applied at a time of day when the ambient temperature is expected to be steady or falling.

C. Each coat shall be a contrasting color. The color of the final coat shall be

chosen by the ENGINEER. D. Ensure that pump, hoses, gun, tip, and pressure are properly matched for the

coating to be applied. Ensure that the application equipment has been properly cleaned prior to application of coating. Test spray pattern for uniformity of distribution.

E. Protect surfaces from rapid drying due to heavy wind or hot sun.

F. Cure coatings in strict accordance with the manufacturer’s recommendations, prior to putting into service.

3.05 TESTING

A. After all coats have been applied, the area shall be checked for holidays utilizing a dry conductive brush and tester at a testing voltage of 1250 times the square root of the coating system thickness in mils to obtain volts.

B. All holiday testing shall be done in the presence of the ENGINEER.




C. All holidays discovered are to be marked, repaired and retested. D. In testing for continuity of coating at projections (such as bolts and nuts), and

crevices, the ENGINEER will determine the minimum conductivity for smooth areas of like coating where the dry mil thickness has been accepted. This conductivity shall then be taken as the minimum required for these rough or irregular areas. Pinholes and holidays shall be recoated to the required coverage.

3.06 CLEAN UP

A. Upon completion of coating, the CONTRACTOR shall remove surplus materials, protective coverings, and accumulated rubbish, and thoroughly clean all surfaces and repair any overspray, splashes, splatters or other coating-related damage. Surfaces damaged resulting from this clean up shall also be cleaned, repaired and refinished to the original or required condition.

B. Remove all tools, scaffolding, surplus materials, and debris from and around the

Work, leaving the area in a clean condition.

3.07 COATING SYSTEM A. COATING SYSTEM A (CS-A):

1. 125 mils of multi-layer spray applied Sewer Shield Liner SS150 by Environmental Coatings, or;

2. 125 mils of multi-layer spray applied SP2000R by Superior Environmental Products.

END OF SECTION

DIVISION 10

SPECIALTIES

Division 10 - Specialties



2015

Specifications

Division 10: Specialties Section 10400-1

SECTION 10400

PROCESS IDENTIFICATION DEVICES, STENCILING AND TAGGING SYSTEMS

PART 1 GENERAL

1.1 SUMMARY


1. All identification, stenciling, and tagging systems for process valves, process

piping, process equipment, etc.


1. Division 1

2. Section 09800 - Special Coatings


A. Referenced Standards:

1. American National Standards Institute (ANSI):

a. A13.1, Scheme for Identification of Piping Systems.

1.3 SUBMITTALS

A. Shop Drawings:

1. Product technical data including:

a. Acknowledgment that products submitted meet requirements of

standards referenced.

b. Manufacturer’s installation instructions.

c. Identification register listing all items to be identified, type of

identification system to be used, lettering, location and color.

d. Catalog information for all tagging systems.

e. Manufacturer’s illustration of safety and danger signs for selection by

OWNER.

f. Updated, complete, identification register with non-conflicting

numerical assignments submitted prior to project acceptance.

PART 2 PRODUCTS

2 .01 ACCEPTABLE MANUFACTURER’S

A. Subject to compliance with the Contract Documents, the following Manufacturer’s

are acceptable:

1. Tagging Systems:



2015

Specifications


16

a. W.H. Brady Co.

b. Seton Name Plate Corp.

c. T & B/Westline.

d. Safety Sign Co.

e. Pre-approved Equal.

2 .02 MATERIALS

A. Tags:

1. Aluminum.

B. Fasteners:

1. Stainless Steel Wire.

2 .03 FABRICATION

A. General:

1. Lettering Color: Black.

2. Lettering Style: Helvetica.

B. Round Aluminum Tags (Type 1):

1. 2 inch diameter.

2. 1/4/inch high engraved letters.

3. Brushed aluminum finish.

4. Imprint tags with item designation indicated on Drawings.

C. Rectangular Plastic Signs (Type 2):

1. 7 x 10 x 1/ inch.

2. 1 inch high black lettering.

3. Stainless steel grommets each corner.

D. Painted-On Stenciling System (Type 3):

1. Text as required for item being identified.

a. All text uppercase sized in accordance with ANSI A13.1.

E. Rectangular Plastic Signs (Type 4):

1. 10 x 14 1/16 inch 2. Text as required by schedule in Part 3:

a. Text shall be largest practicable size based on number of characters

required.

3. Rated indoor/outdoor.

F. Engraved Name Plates (Type 5).

2 .04 MAINTENANCE MATERIALS



2015

Specifications


A. Tags:

1. Aluminum.

PART 3 EXECUTION

3.1 EXAMINATION

A. Prior to installation, inspect and verify condition of substrate. Installation of product

constitutes installer’s acceptance of substrate condition for product compatibility.

3.2 PREPARATION

A. Correct defects which may interface with or prevent a satisfactory installation.

3.3 ERECTION, INSTALLATION, AND APPLICATION

A. Install tagging, stenciling, and identification items at required locations.

B. Provide arrows and markers on piping:

1. At 20 foot maximum centers along continuous lines.

2. At changes in direction (route) or obstructions.

3. At valves, risers, “T” joints, machinery or equipment.

4. Where pipes pass through floor, wall, and like obstruction.

a. Provide markers on both sides of obstruction.

C. Position markers on both sides of pipe with arrow markers pointing in flow direction.

If flow is in both directions use double headed arrow markers.

D. Apply stenciling in uniform manner parallel to piping.

E. Coat back of Type 1 aluminum tags with dissimilar metals protection when installed

on concrete.

F. Process piping shall be color coded. Color to be selected by ENGINEER.

G. For 3-inch and smaller piping, provide adhesive labels to indicate flow direction and

pipe service.

3.4 SCHEDULE

A. Identification Schedule.

ITEM ID TYPE FASTENER

Valves 1 Wire



2015

Specifications


Pumps, Pump Motors, and other Rotating Equipment, and

electrical powered equipment

3 or 5 Epoxy if Type

5

Instrumentation Flow (Primary Elements etc.) 5 Epoxy

Piping 3 --

Control panels, Motor Control Centers, Lightening Panels not

Factory Labeled

5 Epoxy

Safety Signs - Hazard Warning 4 Stainless Steel

Information and Caution Signs 4 See this

Section

Tanks 3 --

B. Piping Schedule (Colors based on Tnemec.):

1. Color Schedule:

Above Ground Pipe Labels Color of Pipe

Potable Water Safety Green

Sanitary Sewer Gray

Foul Air Amber Canyon

Odor Control Drain Safety Yellow

Chemicals Color

None

2. Lettering Size Schedule:

3/4 to 1-1/4 1/2

1-1/2 to 2 3/4

2-1/2 to 6 1-1/4

8 to 10 2-1/2

Over 10 3-1/2

3. Unless the line is in such a location that it can be seen only from one

OD of Pipe or Covering

(inches)

Height of

Letters (inches)



2015

Specifications


direction, such as pipes near a wall, two sets of the code designation shall be

applied at each location, placed in the two visible quadrants, with respect to

normal viewing positions. In general, pipe identification size, color, and

arrangements shall be in accordance with ANSI A 13.1 (latest edition).

C. Safety Signs and Miscellaneous:

1. Provide and install a minimum of 10 custom worded signs. Type 4 with text

and location to be provided by OWNER at later date. Five signs shall be

mounted on a galvanized post. Five signs shall be mounted on wall.

END OF SECTION

DIVISION 11

EQUIPMENT

Division 11 - Equipment



2015

Specifications

Division 11: Equipment Section 11005-1

SECTION 11005

EQUIPMENT: GENERAL REQUIREMENTS

PART 1 GENERAL

1.1 SUMMARY


1. Requirements of this Section apply to all equipment provided on the Project,

including that found in Divisions 11, 13, and 15, even if not specifically

referenced as a related section in those Specifications.

B. Related sections include, but are not necessarily limited to:

1. Division 1 - General Requirements.

2. Section 09800 - Special Coatings.

3. Section 10400 - Process Identification Devices, Stenciling and Tagging

Systems

4. Individual equipment specifications in Divisions 11, 13, and 15.

5. Refer to Division 16 for Control Panel specifications.


A. Referenced Standards:

1. American Society for Testing and Materials (ASTM):

a. A307, Standard Specification Carbon Steel Bolts and Studs, 60,000

psi Tensile Strength.

b. F593, Standard Specification for Stainless Steel Bolts, Hex Cap

Screws, and Studs.

2. Institute of Electrical and Electronics Engineers (IEEE):

a. 112, Standard Test Procedure for Polyphase Induction Motors and

Generators.

3. National Electrical Manufacturers Association (NEMA):

a. 250, Enclosures for Electrical Equipment.

b. ICS 6, Enclosures for Industrial Control and System.

c. MG1, Motors and Generators.

B. Unit Responsibility:

1. Where indicated in these documents, equipment systems made up of two or

more components shall be manufactured and assembled as a unit by the

responsible manufacturer. The responsible manufacturer shall select all

components of the system to assure compatibility, ease of construction and

efficient maintenance. The responsible manufacturer shall coordinate

selection and design of all system components, such that all equipment



2015

Specifications


furnished under the specification for the equipment system, including

equipment specified elsewhere, but referenced in the specification, is

compatible and operates properly to achieve the performance requirements

specified. Unless otherwise specified, the responsible manufacturer shall be

the manufacturer of the driven equipment. This requirement for unit

responsibility shall in no way relive CONTRACTOR of his responsibility to

the OWNER for performance of all systems.

2. CONTRACTOR shall assure that all equipment systems provided for the

Project are products for which unit responsibility has been accepted by the

responsible manufacturer. Where the detailed specification requires

CONTRACTOR to furnish a certificate from the Unit Responsibility

Manufacturer, such certificates shall be provided prior to Shop Drawing

review. No other submittal material will be processed until a Certificate of

Unit Responsibility has been received and has been found to be satisfactory.

Failure to provide acceptable proof that the unit responsibility requirement

has been satisfied will result in withholding approval of progress payments

for the subject equipment even though the equipment mayhave been installed

in the Work.

1.3 DEFINITIONS

A. Product: Manufactured materials and equipment.

B. Equipment: One or more assemblies capable of performing a complete function.

Mechanical, electrical, instrumentation or other devices requiring an electrical,

pneumatic, electronic or hydraulic connection. Not limited to items listed under

“Equipment” article within Specifications.

1.4 SUBMITTALS

A. Shop Drawings:

1. General for all equipment:

a. See Section 01340.

b. Acknowledgement that products submitted comply with the

requirements of the standards referenced.

c. Manufacturer’s delivery, storage, and handling instructions.

d. Equipment identification utilizing tagging system and name utilized

in the Construction Drawings.

e. Equipment installation details:

1) Location of anchorage.

2) Type, size, and materials of construction of anchorage.

3) Anchorage setting templates.

4) Manufacturer’s installation instructions.



2015

Specifications


4

f. Equipment area classification rating.

g. Shipping and operating weight.

h. Equipment physical characteristics:

1) Dimensions (both horizontal and vertical).

2) Materials of construction and construction details.

i. Equipment factory primer and painting and coating data.

j. Manufacturer’s recommended spare parts list.

k. Piping and duct connection size, type and location.

2. Mechanical and Process Equipment:

a. Operating characteristics:

1) Technical information including applicable performance

curves showing specified equipment capacity, rangeability,

and efficiencies.

2) Brake horsepower requirements.

3) Copies of equipment data plates.

b. Piping and duct connection size, type, and location.

c. Equipment bearing life certification.

d. Field noise testing reports if such testing is specified in specific

equipment sections.

e. Equipment foundation data:

1) Equipment center of gravity.

2) Criteria for designing vibration, special or unbalanced forces

resulting from equipment operation.

3. Electrical equipment:

a. Electric motor information:

1) Nameplate data.

2) Service factor on motors ½ HP and above.

3) Motor enclosure type.

4) NEMA frame size, if applicable.

5) NEMA design code, if applicable.

6) Insulation type.

7) Efficiency and power factor at full load, 3/ load, ½ load and 1

/4 load. b. Motor tests reports.

c. Certification that equipment has been installed properly, has been

initially started up, and is ready for operation.

B. Operations and Maintenance Manuals:

1. Section 01715.

PART 2 PRODUCTS


A. Subject to compliance with the Contract Documents, the following Manufacturers



2015

Specifications


are acceptable:

1. Motors:

a. U.S. Motors.

b. Baldor.

c. Or approved equal (U.S. manufacturers only).

2.2 MANUFACTURED UNITS

A. Electric Motors:

1. Provide motors designed and applied in compliance with NEMA, IEEE, and

the NEC for specific duty imposed by driven equipment.

2. Where used in conjunction with adjustable speed drives, provide motors fully

compatible with the variable speed controllers. These motors shall be

inverter duty.

3. Where frequent starting applications are specified, design for frequent

starting duty equivalent to duty service required by driven equipment.

4. Rate for continuous duty at 50 Deg C ambient. Design in accordance with

NEMA standards for Class F insulation with Class B temperature rise above

50 Deg C ambient on continuous operation or intermittent duty at nameplate

horsepower.

5. Design for full or reduced voltage starting, as appropriate.

6. Design bearing life based upon actual operating load conditions imposed by

driven equivalent.

7. Size for altitude of Project.

8. Size so that, under maximum continuous load imposed by driven equipment,

motor nameplate horsepower for continuous operation is minimum of 15

percent more than driven load.

9. Provide encapsulated windings in wet/corrosive and for outdoor applications:

a. Provide encapsulation using a silicone or epoxy seal after the

windings have been dried to less than 1 percent moisture.

10. Furnish with clamp-type grounding terminals inside motor conduit box.

11. Furnish with oversized external conduit boxes.

12. Furnish with stainless steel nameplates with information to include all data

as required by paragraph 430-7 of the National Electric Code, NFPA 70.

13. Totally Enclosed, Fan-Cooled (TEFC) unless specified otherwise.

2.3 ACCESSORIES

A. Guards:

1. Provide each piece of equipment having exposed moving parts with full

length, easily removable guards, meeting OSHA requirements.

2. Interior Applications:

a. Construct from expanded galvanized steel rolled to conform to shaft

or coupling surface.

b. Utilize non-flattened type 16 GA galvanized steel with nominal ½ IN



2015

Specifications


spacing.

c. Connect to equipment frame with hot-dip galvanized bolts and wing

nuts.

3. External Applications:

a. Construct from 16 GA stainless steel or aluminum.

b. Construct to preclude entrance of rain, snow, or moisture.

c. Roll to conform to shaft or coupling surface.

d. Connect to equipment frame with stainless steel bolts and wing nuts.

B. Anchorage:

1. Cast-in-place anchorage:

a. Provide ASTM F593, Type 316 stainless steel anchorage for exposed

equipment.

b. For continuously submerged anchorage, utilize ASTM A307

anchorage. For intermittently submerged applications, use 316

stainless steel.

c. Configuration and number of anchor bolts shall be per manufacturer’s

recommendations.

d. Provide two nuts for each bolt.

2. Drilled anchorage:

a. Epoxy grout per Section 03600.

b. Threaded rods same as cast-in-place.

C. Data Plate:

1. Attach a stainless steel data plate to each piece of rotary or reciprocating

equipment. Permanently stamp information on data plate including

manufacturer’s name, equipment operating parameters, serial number and

speed.

2.5 FABRICATION

A. Design, fabricate, and assemble equipment in accordance with best modern

engineering and shop practices.

B. Manufacture individual parts to standard sizes and gages so that repair parts,

furnished at any time, can be installed in field.

C. Furnish like parts of duplicate units to be interchangeable.

D. Assure that equipment has not been in service at any time prior to delivery, except

as required by tests.

E. Furnish equipment which require periodic internal inspection or adjustment with

access panels which will not require disassembly of guards, dismantling of piping or



2015

Specifications


equipment or similar major efforts. Quick opening but sound, securable access ports

or windows shall be provided for inspection of chains, belts, or similar items.

F. Provide common, lipped base plate mounting for equipment and equipment motor

where said mounting is a manufacturer’s standard option. Provide drain connection

for tubing.

G. Machine the mounting feet of rotating equipment.

H. Shop or Factory Finishes shall be in accordance with Section 09800.

PART 3 EXECUTION

3.1 ERECTION/INSTALLATION/APPLICATION

A. Install equipment as shown on Drawings and in accordance with manufacturer’s

directions.

B. Utilize templates for anchorage placement for slab mounted equipment.

C. For equipment having drainage requirements such as seal water, provide 3/4 IN PVC

or clear plastic tubing from equipment base to nearest floor or equipment drain.

Route clear of major traffic areas and as approved by OWNER.

D. Extend all non-accessible grease fittings using stainless steel tubing to a location which allows easy access of fittings.

E. Construct subbases, either concrete, steel or cast iron, level in both directions.

Particular care shall be taken at hold-down bolt locations so these areas are flat and

level.

F. Machine Base:

1. Mount machine bases of rotating equipment on subbases in manner that they

are level in both directions according to machined surfaces on base. Use

machinist level for this procedure. 2. Level machine bases on subbases and align couplings between driver and

driven unit using steel blocks and shims.

a. Size blocks and shims to provide solid support at each anchor bolt location. Area size of blocks and shims shall be approximately 1-1/2

times area support surface at each anchor bolt point.

b. Provide blocks and shims at each anchor bolt. Blocks and shims shall be square shape with “U” cut out to allow blocks and shims to be

centered on anchor bolts.

c. After all leveling and alignment has been completed and before grouting, tighten anchor bolts to proper torque value.



2015

Specifications


d. Do not use nuts below the machine base on anchor bolts for base leveling.

Grouting:

1. After machine base has been shimmed, leveled, couplings aligned and anchor

bolts tightened to correct torque value, a dam or formwork shall be placed around base to contain grouting. Dam or formwork shall extend at least ½ IN

above the top of leveling shims and blocks. 2. Grouting mixture shall be non-shrink grout per Division 3 requirements.

3. When the grout has sufficiently hardened, remove dam or framework and

finish the exposed grout surface to fine, smooth surface. Cover exposed grout surfaces with wet burlap and keep covering sufficiently wet to prevent too

rapid evaporation of water from the grout. When the grout has fully hardened

(after a minimum of 7 days) tighten all anchor bolts and recheck driver-driven unit for proper alignment.

H. Identification of Equipment and Hazard Warning Signs:

1. Identify equipment and install hazard warning signs in accordance with

Section 10400.

I. Field coat in accordance with Section 09800.

3.2 WIRING CONNECTIONS AND TERMINATION

A. Clean wires before installing lugs and connectors.

B. Coat connection with oxidation eliminating compound for aluminum wire.

C. Terminate motor circuit conductors with copper lugs bolted to motor leads.

D. Tape uninsulated conductors and connectors with electrical tape, 150 percent of

insulation value of conductor.

E. Connections to carry full ampacity of conductors without temperature rise.

F. Terminate spare conductors with electrical tape.


A. Furnish equipment manufacturer services as specified in the individual equipment

specifications.

B. Inspect wire and connections for physical damage and proper connection.

C. Check rotation of motor before connection to driven equipment, before couplings are

bolted or belts installed. Before motor is started to check rotation, determine that



2015

Specifications


motor is lubricated.

END OF SECTION




SECTION 11330

VERTICALLY MOUNTED HEADWORKS SCREENING

PART 1 – GENERAL

1.01 SUMMARY

A. The CONTRACTOR shall furnish, install, place into satisfactory operation, and

warrant the vertically mounted headworks screening system for receiving, separating,

washing, dewatering and transporting screenings material to the designated collection

container, as shown on the Drawings and described by the Specifications.

B. All items detailed in this section shall be provided by the same manufacturer.

C. Related Sections:

1. Section 13140: Technical Submittals

2. Section 11005: Equipment: General Requirements

3. Section 15050: Basic Process Piping Materials and Methods

4. Division 5: Metals

5. Division 16: Electrical

6. Section 02200: Earthwork

7. Section 02100: Site Preparation


A. American Society for Testing and Materials (ASTM) A536-84: Standard Specification

for Ferritic Ductile Iron Castings

B. American Society for Testing and Materials (ASTM) A48-83: Standard Specification for

Grey Iron Casting

C. American National Standards Institute (ANSI) B16.42-1979, Class 150 Flanges

D. American Iron and Steel Institute (AISI) 303 Stainless Steel

E. American Iron and Steel Institute (AISI) 304 Stainless Steel

F. American Iron and Steel Institute (AISI) 316 Stainless Steel

G. American Iron and Steel Institute (AISI) 4130 Heat Treated Alloy Steel

H. American Iron and Steel Institute (AISI) 4140 Heat Treated Alloy Steel

I. American Iron and Steel Institute (AISI) 17-4 Stainless Steel

J. Controllers shall, as applicable, meet the requirements of the following Regulatory

Agencies:

1. National Electrical Manufacturer’s Association (NEMA) Standards

2. National Electrical Code (NEC)

3. Underwriters Laboratory (UL and cUL)

4. International Electrotechnical Commission (IEC)

1.03 SUBMITTALS




A. Shop Drawings and Product Data: Submit the following as a single complete initial

submittal in accordance with Section 01340:

1. Product data fully describing all items proposed for use to demonstrate that the

equipment conforms to the drawings and specifications.

2. Performance data demonstrating the equipment is capable of operating at the required

solids load.

3. Manufacturer’s catalog data and operating literature on equipment used.

4. Utility and nutrient use calculations.

5. Specifications, performance data and calibration curves for fan, motor, and auxiliary

components.

6. System layouts and/or schematics.

7. Elementary and connection wiring diagrams clearly showing external connections to

other equipment.

8. Motor designation and horsepower.

9. NEMA starter sizes and overload types/sizes.

10. Enclosure type with interior and exterior elevations with dimensions.

11. Control transformer ratings.

12. Circuit breaker (or fuse) sizes.

13. Auxiliary contacts.

14. Control devices being utilized.

15. Point-to-point wiring diagram by an approved system integrator.

16. Bill of material including spare parts being furnished.

17. Warranty.

B. Performance Testing: Submit certified factory performance test results. Receive favorable

review of test results from ENGINEER prior to shipping the equipment.

C. Manuals: Furnish manufacturer’s installation, lubrication, operation and maintenance

manuals, bulletins, and spare parts list.

D. Affidavits: Submit affidavits from the manufacturer stating that the equipment has been

properly installed, adjusted, and tested and is ready for full-time operation.

E. If requested by the ENGINEER or OWNER, manufacturer shall provide a list of

reference sites for similar equipment for verification.


A. The products furnished under this section shall be by a manufacturer that has been

regularly engaged in manufacturing of the equipment and has a minimum of 5 years

experience in design, fabrication and testing of vertically mounted headworks screenings

systems. Demonstrate to the satisfaction of the ENGINEER that the quality is equal to

equipment made by those manufacturers named herein.

B. Inspection and Testing Requirements: The Client reserves the right to refuse delivery of

any or all pieces of equipment found, upon inspection, to have any defects in

workmanship or materials.




C. Upon completion of the installation each piece of equipment in each system shall be

tested for satisfactory operation without excessive noise, vibration, overheating, etc.

Compliance shall be as required in the Contract Documents and all applicable codes and

standards. All equipment shall be adjusted and checked for misalignment, clearances,

supports and adherence to safety standards.

D. The CONTRACTOR shall be responsible for the successful startup and testing of

headworks screenings system. The manufacturer shall provide supervisory assistance,

instrumentation and testing services required during this phase of the work.

E. Inspection and Testing Requirements: The ENGINEER reserves the right to reject

delivery of any or all pieces of equipment found, upon inspection, to have any or all of

the following: blisters, chips, crazing, exposed glass, cracks burned areas, dry spots,

foreign matter, surface porosity, sharp discontinuity or entrapped air on laminate

surfaces.

1.05 DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING

A. Place materials in area protected from weather immediately upon delivery to the job site.

Use non-marring slings for loading, unloading and handling units to prevent rope or cable

damage to surfaces and protective wrappings.

B. Equipment shall remain in the packaging provided by the supplier until it is installed.

C. Equipment shall be stored in a dry environment between 40 degrees F and 100 degrees F.

1.06 WARRANTY

A. CONTRACTOR shall provide a written warranty for the entire system, both in material

and workmanship for a period of eighteen months (18) months from the date of

Substantial Completion.

B. The equipment shall be warranted to be free from defects in workmanship, design and

materials. If any part of the equipment should fail during the warranty period, it shall be

repaired or replaced and the complete system restored to service at no expense to the

OWNER.

C. Manufacturer shall provide a written warranty.

1.06 WARNING SIGNS

A. Each piece of driven machinery which can be started manually by any control station not

within 15 feet of the machine, or which can be controlled automatically by any means,

shall be identified with a warning sign inscribed:

CAUTION




THIS MACHINE IS REMOTELY CONTROLLED

AND MAY START AT ANY TIME

The word “CAUTION” shall be in yellow block letters on black panel at the tip of the

sign which shall have yellow background and text in black block letters. Signs shall be

fabricated from 30-gauge copper-bearing steel and finish shall be high-baked enamel; the

finished signs shall be weather resistant. Signs shall be 10 inches wide by 7 inches high.

Signs shall be located in prominent locations at machines and shall be fastened to

surfaces previously specified for nameplates.

PART 2 – PRODUCTS

2.01 GENERAL

A. The system shall comprise of the following major components:

1. Wall Mount Frame.

2. Vertical Auger.

3. Auger Locator Supports.

4. Wash Water Control Assembly.

5. Discharge Chute.

6. Level Probe.

7. Motor Controller.

8. Factory Finishing.

9. The headworks screenings system shall be Model ALV01-285 by JWC

Environmental, LLC, or approved equal.

B. The system shall be designed for continuous, automatic operation and also be capable of

manual operation. Access ports shall be provided to allow access to the internals of the

system. The system shall be designed to withstand ambient temperatures up to 130

degrees F. The system and all accessories shall be factory mounted, piped, and wired to

the maximum extent possible.

2.02 PERFORMANCE AND DESIGN CRITERIA

A. The vertically mounted headworks screenings system shall receive wastewater flow into

a wet well or vault, collect and remove captured solids from the waste stream and

effectively wash, transport, compact, de-water and discharge the solids to a collection

container. The system shall incorporate wall-mounted frame assembly and vertical auger

with perforated screen segment, transport segment, dewatering discharge segment, drive

segment and rotating spiral. The system shall be configured to permit installation of a

future grinder pump that precedes the auger.

B. The system shall meet the following minimum criteria unless otherwise approved by the

ENGINEER:

1. Number of vertical headworks screening systems: 1

2. Number of motor controllers: 1




3. Capacity per system: 500 GPM

4. Wet well diameter: 6 ft

5. Nominal screen height: 24 in

6. Screen perforation size: 1/4”

7. Minimum perforated screen thickness: 11 gauge

8. Minimum screen open area: 51%

9. Automatic screen cleaning with pressurized wash water with explosion-proof

solenoid valve.

10. Nominal rotor diameter: 11-1/4”

11. Nominal rotor RPM: 11

12. Environment rating in wet well: Class 1, Div. 1, Groups C & D

13. Supply power characteristics: 230 volt / 3 phase

14. Auger installed horsepower: 1 hp minimum

15. Future grinder: 5 hp minimum.

16. Auger motor type: TEFC

17. Auger motor service factor: 1.15

18. Auger min. motor efficiency (at full load): 84%

19. Auger min. motor power factor (at full load): 72%

20. Motor controller enclosure rating: NEMA 4X

21. Selector switch, pushbutton & pilot lamp type: 22 mm, LED (pilot lamp)

22. Programmable Logic Controller type: Siemens S7-1200; Allen Bradley Micrologix

1400, or approved equal.

23. Human Machine Interface type: Siemens KTP-400 Comfort; Allen Bradley C400,

or approved equal.

24. Level probe: Endress & Hauser FMU 40-series; MEAS KPSI 700, or approved

equal.

2.03 MATERIALS

A. General: The system shall be fabricated from the following materials unless otherwise

approved by the ENGINEER:

1. Fabricated components: 304 stainless steel

2. Auger rotor: Corrosion-resistant alloy steel, or 304 stainless steel.

3. Spray bar frame, nozzles, and piping components: 304 stainless steel

4. Strainers & solenoid valves: Bronze

5. Motor controller enclosure: 304 stainless steel

6. Coating type: Polyamidoamide epoxy, or as required by Engineer

7. Coating color: Hunter green, or as required by Engineer.

2.04 SYSTEM COMPONENTS

A. Wall Mounted Frame

1. General: Frame shall be wall-mounted to suit the wetwell diameter listed in

Performance and Design Criteria, and provide a method for supporting the vertical

auger. Frame shall contain and guide wastewater flow through the equipment for




processing. An overflow barscreen shall be incorporated into the frame to allow

coarse screening of wastewater during high-flow events.

2. Components: Frame shall be of material type listed in Materials. Frame shall

incorporate a flange feature to allow for anchoring to the wall of a round or flat wall

wet well. Frame shall incorporate a pocket for mounting a future in-channel grinder,

as required by manufacturer. Frame shall incorporate a guide feature to accommodate

a removable slide gate-style interface adapter for mounting the auger. Frame shall be

designed to support the static and dynamic loads of both the grinder and the vertical

auger. Frame shall incorporate an overflow barscreen.

B. Vertical Auger

1. General: Vertical auger shall include a perforated screen trough with flanged inlet and

spray wash manifold, transport segment, discharge segment with dewatering feature,

rotor assembly, and drive assembly.

2. Components:

a. Perforated Screen Trough: Screen trough shall be constructed of stainless steel of

type listed in Performance and Design Criteria and electro-polished to remove

burrs.Pickling and passivation of stainless steel is acceptable. Perforations shall be

of diameter listed in Performance and Design Criteria. Screen trough shall be

cylindrical and have a 8” minimum diameter flanged inlet pipe. Spray water

manifold with nozzles shall be mounted to the screen trough to apply water spray

to help promote transport and washing of solids.

b. Auger Interface & Support Assembly: A slide gate-style auger interface and

separate flange-mounted support shall be fabricated from stainless steel of type

listed in Performance and Design Criteria and connected to both the screen trough

inlet flange and upper screen trough flange. Auger interface shall guide

wastewater flow from wall-mounted frame to perforated screen trough. Along

with the auger interface, the support assembly shall transfer all vertical loads from

the vertical auger to the wall-mount frame.

c. Transport Segment: Transport casings shall be fabricated of stainless steel sheet

of type listed in Materials. Minimum material thickness shall be 10 gauge.

Transport casings shall be fitted with anti-rotation or wear bars to bear the radial

loads from the auger. Number and size of wear bars shall be in accordance with

manufacturer’s specifications and approved by the Engineer. Wear bars shall be

fabricated from 17-4PH stainless steel. Individual transport casings 39” and

longer shall have removable inspection covers (optional). At least one flange of

the transport segment shall be fitted with an auger locator flange bracket for

connection to the auger locator supports.

d. Dewatering Discharge Segment: Discharge segment shall be fabricated of

stainless steel sheet of type listed in Materials. Minimum material thickness shall

be 10 gauge. Discharge segment shall be fitted with anti-rotation or wear bars to

bear the radial loads from the auger. Number and size of wear bars shall be in

accordance with manufacturer’s specifications and approved by the Engineer.

Wear bars shall be fabricated from 17-4PH stainless steel. Discharge segment

shall incorporate a dewatering feature including 0.12” holes, spray wash manifold




with high-impact spray nozzles, collection tray and gasketted shroud assembly.

Discharge segment shall have a radial discharge.

e. Auger Rotor: Auger Rotor: Auger rotor shall be either shafted or shaftless

steel. The auger shall have a brush attached to the outside of the spiral to be used

as a sacrificial wear item.

f. Lifting Brackets: Two lifting brackets shall be mounted to the drive end of the

vertical auger. Lifting brackets shall be fabricated from material type listed in

Materials. Lifting brackets shall be designed to bear to full weight of the vertical

auger, including any material that may not have been cleared from the unit.

g. Packing Gland and Housing: Packing shall be constructed of four (4) PTFE

impregnated cords. Packing housing shall be constructed of 4140 steel.

f. Speed Reducer: Reducer shall be manufactured by Nord Gear Corporation; Bauer,

or approved equal. Reducer shall be helical-parallel and shaft mounted with

nominal 160:1 reduction.

g. Motor: Motor shall be manufactured by Baldor Electric Company or approved

equal. Motor horsepower, power characteristics, service factor, power factor and

efficiency shall be as listed in Performance and Design Criteria.

C. Auger Locator Supports

1. General: Supports shall be provided above the wall-mounted frame to keep the auger

properly located. One auger locator support shall be provided for each 13 feet of

vertical auger above the wall-mount frame.

2. Components: Supports shall be constructed of stainless steel of type listed in

Materials and designed to accommodate horizontal loads only.

a. A bolted-style locator support shall be provided as close as possible to the top of

the wet well. Support shall use a beam for connection to the locator flange

mounted on the auger transport segment. Side wall brackets or front wall beam

supports shall be used to maintain the position of the beam.

b. Any additional locator supports provided below the bolted-style locator support

shall not require human contact in order to disconnect. A female locator flange

bracket shall be mounted on the auger transport segment. A corresponding male

locator shall be mounted on a beam. Side wall brackets or front wall beam

supports shall be used to maintain the position of the beam.

D. Wash Water Control Assembly

1. General: Wash water control assembly shall provide screenings and flow control of

spray water for washing and transport of the captured solids, as well as cleaning of

the perforations of the dewatering discharge segment.

2. Components

a. Basket strainer shall be of material type listed in Materials and include a 20-mesh

304 stainless steel screen.

b. Y-strainer shall be of material type listed in Materials above and include an 80-

mesh 304 stainless steel screen.

c. Electrically-actuated water control valves shall be of type listed in Performance

and Design Criteria above.

d. Ball valves shall be manual and constructed of 316 stainless steel and allow the

wash water to be regulated or shut off.




e. An integral mounting bracket shall be provided to attach the assembly to a wall or

a floor.

E. Discharge Chute

1. General: A discharge chute shall connect to the radial discharge of the discharge

segment and guide the ground, washed and dewatered wastewater solids to a

collection container.

2. Components

a. Discharge chute and supports shall be fabricated from stainless steel sheet of type

listed in Materials.

b. Discharge chute shall be removable to facilitate inspection and maintenance.

c. Additional supports shall be provided for discharge chutes allowing more than

36” of horizontal transport.

F. Level Probe

1. General: A level probe shall be mounted on the frame upstream of the headworks

intake. Level probe shall produce an analog output signal representative of the level

of the liquid contained in the frame. Analog signal shall be passed to the motor

controller.

2. Components: Level probe shall be rated NEMA 6P for temporary immersion and in

accordance with the environment rating listed in Performance and Design Criteria.

Level probe shall have 1-1/2” NPT process connection. Level probe shall be of make

and model listed in Performance and Design Criteria.

G. Motor Controller

1. General: Controller shall provide programmable operation of the Vertically Mounted

Headworks Screening. Controller shall have switches, indicator lights, and other

control devices. Operating parameters shall be adjustable via a Human Machine

Interface (HMI). Controller shall be designed to suit the supply power and motor

characteristics listed in Performance and Design Criteria.

2. Components:

a. Enclosure shall be of rating and material type listed in Materials. Enclosure shall

house motor starter, PLC, and control devices, and shall be latched and lockable.

b. Pilot shall be of type listed in Performance and Design Criteria, rated equal or

better than the enclosure. Lights shall indicate Power On, Compactor Run and

Fail.

c. Selector switches shall be rated equal to or better than the enclosure. Auger

selector switch shall be three-position and indicate On-Off-Auto.

d. Pushbuttons shall be rated equal to or better than the enclosure. Reset pushbutton

shall be momentary type and indicate Reset. Emergency stop pushbutton shall be

maintained type and indicate Emergency Stop.

e. Motor starters shall be full-voltage reversing with 120-volt operating coils.

Overload relays shall be adjustable and sized to full load amperes (FLA) of the

motor.

f. Current transducer shall have a discrete output. Current transducer shall have

selectable amperage range input and output contact.




g. Control transformer shall produce 120-volt AC power from the supply power.

Transformer shall be sized and fused in accordance with code to accommodate the

control power requirements.

h. Disconnect switch in addition to existing disconnect switch shown on Drawing E-

04 shall be provided to completely disconnect the motor controller from all phases

of the supply power.

i. Short-circuit protection shall be in accordance with the Electrical Drawings.

j. Programmable Logic Controller (PLC) shall be of type listed in Performance and

Design Criteria.

k. Human Machine Interface (HMI) shall be of type listed in Performance and

Design Criteria. HMI shall display alarms and statistical counters, and provide

controls for adjusting operating parameters. HMI devices exposed to direct

sunlight shall be protected with a thermal insulating cover.

3. Operation

a. Vertical auger control shall be in accordance with the setting of the auger ON-

OFF-AUTO selector switch. In the OFF position the auger shall not run. In the

ON position, the auger shall run forward continuously. In the AUTO position, the

auger shall operate as controlled by the status of the HMI programmable run cycle

settings.

b. HMI shall display operational messages, alarms and statistical counters, and

provide controls for adjusting operating parameters.

c. RESET pushbutton shall clear active alarms.

d. EMERGENCY STOP pushbutton shall de-energize PLC output circuits powering

motor starter, run indicator lamps and wash water control valves. Once the

emergency stop pushbutton is reset, the RESET pushbutton shall be pressed to

clear active alarms.

e. When a vertical auger jam condition occurs while the system is operating, the

controller shall de-energize the auger, then reverse the auger rotation to clear the

obstruction. If the jam is cleared, the controller shall return the auger to normal

operation. If two reversals occur within a 30-second interval, the controller shall

de-energize the auger motor and activate the FAIL indicator and de-energize the

FAIL relay (fail-safe).

f. When a motor overload, motor over-temperature or emergency stop condition

occurs, to motor shall be de-energized, the FAIL indicator lamp shall be

illuminated and the FAIL relay shall be de-energized (fail-safe).

g. When a power failure occurs while the system is operating, the system shall return

to normal operation when power is restored.

h. When a power failure occurs while the auger is in a “fail” condition, the system

shall return to a fail state when power is restored. The fail state shall not be

cleared until reset.

H. Factory Finishes

1. Passivation: Stainless steel components shall be cleaned and passivated to remove

surface contaminants and re-establish the corrosion-resistant passivation layer.

2. Paint Coatings (Ferrous Materials): Ferrous metal surfaces shall be prepared to SSPC-

SP6 (Commercial Blast Cleaning) and coated with minimum 6-8 mils TDFT (total

dry film thickness) paint of type and color listed in Materials.




2.05 SPARE PARTS

A. At a minimum, the following spare parts shall be supplied with the equipment:

1. One (1) set of fuses, one (1) for each fuse rating.

2. One (1) set of bearings.

3. Any other spare parts recommended by the Manufacturer.

B. The supplier shall identify and submit any applicable spare parts. Spare parts shall be

clearly labeled and packed for long term storage.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.01 SITE PREPARATION – NOT USED

3.02 FACTORY ACCEPTANCE TEST

A. Electrical control panel shall be inspected prior to shipping for conformance to the

following:

1. NEMA rating according to this specification.

2. PLC program shall be tested for proper communication and functionality.

3. PLC digital and analog inputs shall be electrically tested to ensure input recognition

in the proper area of the PLC program.

4. All wiring between panel components and terminal strips shall be checked for proper

labeling and connection.

B. All water panel piping and/or other pre-installed piping shall be tested prior to shipping

for conformance to the following:

1. System shall have no leaks when subjected to a pressure test at 1.5 times the

maximum operating pressure for a minimum of 1 hour.

2. All installed instruments, sensors, pumps, actuated valves, and other electrical

components shall be tested for proper operation.

3. All wiring from terminal strips to all electrical components shall be tested to ensure

proper wiring.

3.03 INSTALLATION & EQUIPMENT STARTUP

A. To the extent possible, all equipment shall be pre-assembled prior to shipment to

minimize the need for on-site assembly.

B. Installation of all equipment shall be in accordance with Manufacturer’s written

installation and startup instructions and by workers experienced in the handling of similar

equipment and materials, electrical work, plumbing and instrumentation. The final

installation shall be certified by the Manufacturer as complete and correct.

C. The Manufacturer shall provide the CONTRACTOR with required clearances, tolerances

and limitations, such as smoothness/flatness of concrete pad.




D. The CONTRACTOR shall coordinate installation of the compactor and controller in

accordance with the manufacturer’s installation instructions, Drawings and related

Specification sections, and in accordance with all OSHA, local, state, and federal codes

and regulations.

E. Once the installation has been certified by the Manufacturer, the CONTRACTOR, with

supervision from the Manufacturer, shall provide startup services of the system.

F. Any special tools or instruments required for this startup/acclimation period shall be

provided by the Manufacturer.

G. After satisfactory startup and the corresponding switch over to normal operation, the

CONTRACTOR shall conduct the performance test as detailed below.

3.04 FIELD COATING & CORROSION PROTECTION

A. If painted surfaces are damaged during shipment, off-loading or installation, as long as

the damage is surface only and in no way affects the integrity of the equipment or its

ability to perform, these blemishes, scratches or other imperfections shall be touched up

by the CONTRACTOR in accordance with instructions from the Manufacturer. Materials

used shall me compatible with the original coating material in quality and color.

3.05 FIELD PERFORMANCE TESTING

A. Performance testing shall not commence until the Manufacturer and OWNER agree that

the system has been satisfactorily started-up.

B. After the vertically mounted headworks screening system has been satisfactorily started-

up, the CONTRACTOR shall demonstrate that the system will perform as specified.

C. The CONTRACTOR shall provide the ENGINEER with a written test protocol for

approval prior to conducting testing.

D. The CONTRACTOR shall supply, install and operate all equipment, sensors and

instrumentation required to complete the performance testing.

E. The CONTRACTOR shall conduct testing of the compactor to demonstrate correct

alignment, smooth operation and freedom of excessive vibration and noise. Testing shall

demonstrate accurate measurement of sensors and function of the operating parameters.

3.06 MANUFACTURER’S SERVICES

A. Manufacturer, not manufacturer’s representative, shall include 2 full days to supervise

CONTRACTOR’s work prior to system delivery.

B. Start-up assistance, testing, and training: Manufacturer’s factory trained representative

for one (1) separate trip unless otherwise approved by the ENGINEER.




C. Performance testing assistance: Manufacturer’s factory trained representative for one (1)

separate trip unless otherwise approved by the ENGINEER.

D. The Manufacturer shall provide the services of a field technician to inspect the equipment

for proper installation, apply power for the first time and check for proper motor rotation,

oversee the initial introduction of material into the system and configure the equipment

operating parameters to optimize performance based on site-specific requirements.

E. Field training shall be provided for OWNER’s operations, maintenance and supervisory

staff members. Field instruction shall cover key components of the equipment, operating

and maintenance requirements and troubleshooting techniques.

3.07 EQUIPMENT NAME PLATES

A. Each separate piece of equipment shall be furnished with a unique name plate identifying

the Manufacturer, model & serial number, date of manufacture and, if applicable,

capacity and any performance limitations. The nameplates shall be engraved stainless

steel and firmly affixed to the exterior surface of the equipment and in a location that is

accessible and easily read.

END OF SECTION

DIVISION 13

SPECIAL CONSTRUCTION

Division 13 - Special Construction



Division 13: Special Construction Section 13120-1

SECTION 13120

FIBERGLASS PLANT COVERS

PART 1 – GENERAL

1.01 SUMMARY


Provide necessary EQUIPMENT and appurtenances for fully functional flat fiberglass

covers including all anchorage hardware required for proper installation for the following

locations:

1. Equalization Basin

2. Aerobic Sludge Digester

3. Aerated Sludge Holding

4. Mechanical Headworks Screening Wetwell






A. ASTM D 256 Standard Test Methods for Determining the Izod Pendulum Impact

Resistance of Plastics.

B. ASTM D 570 Standard Test Method for Water Absorption of Plastics.

C. ASTM D 638 Standard Test Method for Tensile Properties of Plastics.

D. ASTM D 695 Standard Test Method for Compressive Properties of Rigid Plastics.

E. ASTM D 696 Standard Test Method for Coefficient of Linear Thermal Expansion of

Plastics Between -30°C and 30°C With a Vitreous Silica Dilatometer.

F. ASTM D 790 Standard Test Methods for Flexural Properties of Unreinforced and

Reinforced Plastics and Electrical Insulating Materials.

G. ASTM D 2344 Standard Test Method for Short-Beam Strength of Polymer Matrix

Composite Materials and Their Laminates.

H. ASTM D 2583 Standard Test Method for Indentation Hardness of Rigid Plastics by

Means of a Barcol Impressor.

I. ASTM D 2584 Standard Test Method for Ignition Loss of Cured Reinforced Resins.




J. ASTM C 864-90 Standard Specifications for Preformed gasket and Sealing Material.

K. ASTM F593 Standard Specification for Stainless Steel Bolts, Hex Cap Screws, and Studs

L. ANSI/ASCE 7-10 Minimum Design Loads for Buildings and Other Structures

M. ANSI/AWWA F-102-91 Section 5 Standard Recommended Practice for Classifying

Visual Defects in Glass Reinforced Laminates.

1.03 SUBMITTALS




EQUIPMENT conforms to the drawings and specifications.

2. Shop drawings shall be complete with all dimensions, anchor locations, details of

connecting piping and the size and locations of any required openings.

3. Specifications for all components

4. Details of the major fabricated components showing the arrangement of components

and labeled with component sizes and materials of construction.

5. Structural design calculations for all components.

6. Manufacturer’s recommended procedures for job site storage of EQUIPMENT,

handling and erection.


8. Warranty.

B. Performance Testing: Submit certified factory performance test results. Receive favorable

review of test results from ENGINEER prior to shipping the EQUIPMENT.

C. Manuals: Furnish manufacturer’s installation, lubrication, operation and maintenance


D. Affidavits: Submit affidavits from the manufacturer stating that the EQUIPMENT has

been properly installed, adjusted, and tested and is ready for full-time operation.

E. If requested by the ENGINEER or OWNER, manufacturer shall provide a list of

reference sites for similar EQUIPMENT for verification.

F. Approval by the ENGINEER shall not relieve the manufacturer of responsibility for

providing materials and design conforming to the intent of these specifications.



regularly engaged in manufacturing of the covers and has a minimum of 5 years’

experience in design, fabrication and testing of fiberglass cover systems. Demonstrate to




the satisfaction of the ENGINEER that the quality is equal to covers made by those

manufacturers named herein.

B. Inspection and Testing Requirements: The ENGINEER reserves the right to refuse

delivery of any or all pieces of EQUIPMENT found, upon inspection, to have any defects

in workmanship or materials.

C. Upon completion of the installation, each piece of EQUIPMENT in each system shall be

tested for satisfactory operation. Compliance shall be based on EQUIPMENT

manufacturer specifications and all applicable codes and standards. All covers must be

adjusted and checked for misalignment, clearances, supports and adherence to safety

standards.

D. The CONTRACTOR shall be responsible for the successful startup and testing of the

fiberglass cover system.


delivery of any or all pieces of EQUIPMENT found, upon inspection, to have any or all

of the following: blisters, chips, crazing, exposed glass, cracks burned areas, dry spots,

foreign matter, surface porosity, sharp discontinuity or entrapped air at the surface of the

laminate.





B. Covers shall remain in the packaging provided by the supplier until it is installed.

C. EQUIPMENT shall be stored in a dry environment between 40 degrees F (4.5 degrees C)

and 100 degrees F (37.8 degrees C).

1.06 WARRANTY

A. CONTRACTOR shall warranty the entire system, both in material and workmanship for

a period of one (1) year after Substantial Completion with a maximum of eighteen (18)

months from date of shipment.

B. The covers shall be warranted to be free from defects in workmanship, design and

materials. If any part of the covers should fail during the warranty period, it shall be


Owner.

C. Manufacturer shall provide written warranty.




PART 2 – PRODUCTS

2.01 GENERAL


1. Self supporting covers as described in Paragraph 2.01 B.

2. Boots for penetration of pipes and other EQUIPMENT.

3. Ventilation structures to prevent excessive negative pressures under the covers.

4. Stainless steel hardware required for mounting.

5. Inspection and access hatches as shown on the Drawings or as otherwise required for

wastewater treatment plant operation.

6. The cover system shall be Composi Cover as manufactured by Fiberglass Fabricators,

Inc. or approved equal.

B. The covers shall be self supporting. The system shall be designed to withstand ambient

temperatures up to 120 degrees F. The system and all accessories shall be factory

assembled to the maximum extent possible.


A. Design and Performance Criteria:

1. Design Loads:

a. The entire flat cover shall be designed to sustain the loads specified herein, within

the stress limitations of ANSI/ASCE 7-10.

b. The Load cases to be considered shall be those described below.

i. Dead Load: The dead load shall be defined as the weight of the panels and

all material permanently attached to or supported by the panels.

ii. Live Load: The uniform live load shall be at least 50 psf.

iii. Panel Design Load: In addition to the above mentioned loads, the fiberglass

panels shall be designed for a 500 lb load distributed over 1 square foot at

any location.

iv. Load Combinations: The loads described above shall be applied to the flat

cover in the following combinations:

1) Dead Load.

2) Dead Load, Uniform Live Load, and Vacuum Load.

3) Dead Load, Unbalanced Live Load, and Vacuum Load.

v. Deflections: For the above loads and load combinations, the deflection of all

components shall not exceed L/240 with L equal to the short span of the

component, or 1/2 inch, whichever is lower. Calculations stamped by an

Arizona Registered Professional Engineer shall be provided at the time of

the submittal to ensure that this requirement has been met.

2. Span: The cover must be designed to free span across the tank from the periphery

walls without the use of columns or center drive support.

3. Access Hatches: The access hatches shall be provided using hinged cover panels of

the size and location as shown on the drawings.

4. Penetrations: Boots made of EPDM rubber or other material suitable for ambient

conditions shall be provided with clamps provided as needed to attach to the piping or




equipment penetrating the cover. The boot and clamps shall provide an airtight seal

and shall be removable to service equipment or piping. Boots shall be attached to the

covers to provide an airtight seal, but shall be removable for servicing or replacement.

5. Temperature: The load combinations listed above shall be considered for a

temperature change of 100 degrees F below the installation temperature and 50

degrees F above the installation temperature and for a material temperature range of

30 degrees F below zero to 120 degrees F above zero.

6. Design Stresses: All allowable design stresses in structural fiberglass shall be in

accordance with ANSI/ASCE 7-10.

7. Skid Resistance: The cover shall possess an integral non-skid surface and no exposed

area of cover system wider than one quarter inch shall be without ribs/non-skid

surface. The decking surface of the hinged panels shall provide a non-skid surface.

Products for the non-skid surface shall be suitable for a wastewater environment.

8. Chemical Resistance: The cover system shall be fabricated entirely of corrosion-

resistant materials.

9. Configuration: The cover shall be composed of panels and beams. Each removable

panel shall be easy to remove and the lifting force shall not exceed the dead weight of

the panel. All beams or trusses shall be concealed below the surface.

2.03 MATERIALS

A. All materials shall be new and shall be specially designed or selected for the function and

service specified. No material may be used in the project that has not been approved by

the ENGINEER. Approval for incorporation into the project will be made only after the

review of shop drawings and specifications. Standard color shall be gray.

B. Resin: The resin shall be corrosion-resistant general purpose polyester, which has been

determined to be acceptable for the service conditions. Ultraviolet – light inhibitors shall

be added to the laminate.

C. Structural Components: All structural components, with the exception of beam clips,

shall be FRP pultruded material.

D. Bolts and Fasteners – All fasteners shall be #316 stainless steel. Beams and panels

fastened to concrete shall be #316 stainless steel epoxy-type anchors with a minimum

diameter of 3/8” Expansion-type anchors are not permitted.

E. Gasketing for Panel Joints: Gasketing for panel joints shall be EPDM sponge.

F. Access Hatches and Vacuum Relief Apparatuses: Access hatches and vacuum relief

structures shall be provided on cover segments as shown on the Contract Drawings.

Access to any location under the cover shall be gained through integral hinged access

hatches. The access hatch panels shall have the identical properties as the rest of the

cover including loads, deflection, and slip resistance. Vacuum relief apparatuses shall be

sufficient to prevent overdue vacuum stresses. Hatches and vacuum apparatuses shall be

flush with the cover to prevent a tripping hazard or coated bright yellow.




G. Penetrations: Boots made of EPDM rubber or other material suitable for ambient

conditions.

H. Minimum physical properties shall be as shown in Tables 1 and 2:

Table 1. Laminate Minimum Physical Properties – Pultruded FRP

Property @ 70⁰F Value Test Method

Tensile Strength – plank 3"thk. 31,100 psi ASTM D 638

Tensile Strength – plank 2"thk. 30,000 psi ASTM D 638

Tensile Strength – structurals 30,000 psi ASTM D 638

Tensile Modulus – plank 3" thk. 2,486,000 psi ASTM D 638

Tensile Modulus – plank 2"thk. 3,000,000 psi ASTM D 638

Tensile Modulus – structurals 2,500,000 psi ASTM D 638

Compressive Strength – structurals 30,000 psi ASTM D 695

Compressive Modulus – structurals 2,500,000 psi ASTM D 695

Flexural Strength – plank 3" thk. 24,500 psi ASTM D 790

Flexural Strength – structurals 30,000 psi ASTM D 790

Flexural Modulus – plank 3" thk. 885,000 psi ASTM D 790

Flexural Modulus – structurals 1,600,000 psi ASTM D 790

Modulus Elasticity – structurals 2,500,000 psi Full Section

Shear Strength – plank 3" thk. 3,190 psi ASTM D 2344

Shear Strength – plank 2" thk. 4,500 psi ASTM D 2344

Shear Strength – structurals 4,500 psi ASTM D 2344

Shear Modulus – structurals 425,000 psi –

Barcol Hardness 45 ASTM D 2583

Glass Content 45% ASTM D 2584

Water Absorption. 0.6% Max ASTM D 570

Coefficient of Linear Thermal Expansion (in/in/°F) 4.4 x 10–6

ASTM D 696

Table 2. Laminate Minimum Physical Properties

Property @ 70 deg.F Value Test Method

Tensile Strength 26,500 psi ASTM D 638

Compressive Strength 30,000 psi ASTM D 695

Compressive Modulus 2,500,000 psi ASTM D 695

Flexural Strength 39,400 psi ASTM D 790

Flexural Modulus 1,550,000 psi ASTM D 790

Glass Content 45.6% ASTM D2584

Barcol Hardness 50 ASTM D 2583

Izod Impact Strength 29.1 ft–lb/in ASTM D256

Water Absorption 0.09% Max ASTM D 570

Coefficient of Linear Thermal Expansion (in/in/°F) 3.6 x 10–6

ASTM D 696




2.04 SPARE PARTS

A. Spare parts shall be provided as recommended by the Manufacturer.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.01 INSTALLATION & STARTUP

A. To the extent possible, all covers shall be pre-assembled prior to shipment to minimize

the need for on-site assembly.

B. The CONTRACTOR shall confirm all field measurements with the approved flat cover

fabrication drawings before fabrication is initiated.

C. Installation of all covers shall be in accordance with Manufacturer’s written installation

and startup instructions and by workers experienced in the handling of similar

EQUIPMENT and materials. The final installation must be certified by the Manufacturer

as complete and correct.

D. All work shall be executed by skilled mechanics with a supervisor experienced in the

erection of flat covers. The flat cover shall be erected plumb and level and in proper

alignment.

E. The Manufacturer shall provide the CONTRACTOR with required clearances, tolerances

and limitations, such as flatness of panels or interface with the peripheral structure.

F. Provisions shall be made to provide adequate drainage of water from the cover to prevent

pooling which may result in over-stressing the flat cover.

G. Once the installation has been certified by the Manufacturer, the CONTRACTOR, with

supervision from the Manufacturer, shall demonstrate operation of the System.

H. Any special tools or instruments required for this startup period shall be provided by the

Manufacturer.

I. After satisfactory startup and the corresponding switch over to normal operation, the


3.02 FIELD PERFORMANCE TESTING

A. Performance testing shall not commence until the Manufacturer and OWNER agree that

the system has been satisfactorily constructed.

B. After the cover system has been satisfactorily started-up, the CONTRACTOR shall

demonstrate that the system will perform as specified.






D. The CONTRACTOR shall supply, install and operate all equipment and sensors required

to complete the performance testing.

END OF SECTION




SECTION 13126

ODOR CONTROL SYSTEM

PART 1 – GENERAL

1.01 SUMMARY


Furnish and install equipment and appurtenances for a fully functional biofiltration

system as specified and as shown on the Drawings. The work to be performed in this

section shall consist of furnishing all labor, materials, equipment, and incidentals

necessary to install and test the odor control system, in place complete with all

appurtenances. The biofilter odor control system consists of a single or multiple pass

through biotrickling filter system utilizing biologically active media and carbon layer,

also included are an automated water and nutrient injection spray system, foul air fan,

duct work, dampers, recirculation system (if required) and other equipment and

appurtenances to provide a complete and functioning system. The system shall also

include a layer of activated carbon to prevent untreated odors from exiting the unit during

startup.




3. Section 15050: Basic Process Piping Materials and Methods


5. Division 16: Electrical

1.02 SUBMITTALS




equipment conforms to the Drawings and specifications.

2. Performance data demonstrating the equipment is capable of operating at the required

foul air and components load.

3. Manufacturer’s catalog data and operating literature on equipment proposed.

4. Utility and nutrient use calculations.

5. Specifications, performance data and calibration curves for fan, motor, and auxiliary

components.

6. System layouts and/or schematics.

7. Elementary and connection wiring diagrams clearly showing external connections to

other equipment.

8. Motor designation and horsepower.

9. Electrical drawings and schematics.

10. Piping systems.

11. NEMA or IEC starter sizes and overload types/sizes.




12. Enclosure type with interior and exterior elevations with dimensions.

13. Control transformer ratings.

14. Circuit breaker (or fuse) sizes.

15. Auxiliary contacts.

16. Control devices being utilized..


18. Warranty.

B. Manuals: Furnish manufacturer’s installation, lubrication, operation and maintenance


C. Affidavits: Submit affidavits from the manufacturer stating that the equipment has been

properly installed, adjusted, and tested and is ready for full-time operation.



regularly engaged in manufacturing of the equipment and has a minimum of 5 years

experience in design, fabrication and testing of biological odor control systems.

Demonstrate to the satisfaction of the ENGINEER that the quality is equal to equipment

made by those manufacturers named herein.

B. Inspection and Testing Requirements: The OWNER reserves the right to refuse delivery

of any or all pieces of equipment found, upon inspection, to have any defects in

workmanship or materials.

C. Upon completion of the installation, each piece of equipment in each system shall be

tested for satisfactory operation without excessive noise, vibration, overheating, etc.

Compliance shall be based on meeting Contract Documents and all applicable codes and

standards. All equipment shall be adjusted and checked for misalignment, clearances,

supports and adherence to safety standards.

D. The CONTRACTOR shall be responsible for the successful startup and testing of the

odor control system. The manufacturer shall provide supervisory assistance,

instrumentation and testing services required during this phase of the work.


delivery of any or all pieces of equipment found, upon inspection, to have any or all of

the following: blisters, chips, crazing, exposed glass, cracks, burned areas, dry spots,

foreign matter, surface porosity, sharp discontinuity or entrapped air at the surface of the

laminate.








1.05 WARRANTY

A. CONTRACTOR shall warranty the entire system, both in material and workmanship for

a period of twelve months (12) months from the date of substantial completion or

eighteen months (18) from shipment, whichever occurs first. The warranty does not

include the carbon media.

B. The equipment shall be warranted to be free from defects in workmanship, design and

materials. If any part of the equipment should fail during the warranty period, it shall be


Owner.

C. The biological media, on which the biological culture is grown, shall be guaranteed for

10 years from the date of Substantial Completion. If the biological media has to be

replaced in less than 10 years for the system to meet the maximum pressure drop

requirement or H2S removal performance criteria specified herein, it shall be repaired or

replaced by the manufacturer at no additional charge to the Owner.

D. The Manufacturer shall provide a written warranty.

1.06 WARNING SIGNS

A. Each piece of driven machinery which can be started manually by any control station not

within 15 feet of the machine, or which can be controlled automatically by any means,

shall be identified with a warning sign inscribed:

CAUTION

THIS MACHINE IS REMOTELY CONTROLLED

AND MAY START AT ANY TIME

The word “CAUTION” shall be in yellow block letters on black panel at the tip of the

sign which shall have yellow background and text in black block letters. Signs shall be

fabricated from 30-gauge copper-bearing steel and finish shall be high-baked enamel; the

finished signs shall be weather resistant. Signs shall be 10 inches wide by 7 inches high.

Signs shall be located in prominent locations at machines and shall be fastened to

surfaces previously specified for nameplates.

PART 2 – PRODUCTS

2.01 GENERAL


1. The biological odor control system shall consist of one biological treatment stage

(stage 1) followed by an activated carbon polishing stage (stage 2) in series. Vessels




shall be of unitary construction, segmented vessels with bolt together connections

shall not be allowed to prevent leakage.

2. The biological media bed shall consist of either synthetic or expanded clay material

which is non-reactive.

3. Activated carbon polishing stage to be utilized during the entire startup period while

the microbiological growth is not sufficient to remove the odors shall be included.

The carbon shall be coal based, pelletized and with a high H2S capacity of 0.3 g/cc.

4. The electric control panel housing shall consist of either (a) a single Programmable

Logic Controller (PLC) system with Human Machine Interface (HMI) and other

components required for the control and monitoring of the system or (b) a control

panel with relay logic.

5. A water panel that houses all components necessary for the control and monitoring of

the media irrigation system including an automatic flow control system. The water

panel must be a stand alone unit separate from the electric control panel.

6. Odor control fan/exhauster to move the odorous air from the source and be able to

compensate for all pressure losses at the design airflow.

7. The odor control system shall be Model EG-8.1 as supplied by EcoVerde or Integrity

Municipal Systems Model I-Box® 6000, or BioAir, or approved equal.

B. The system shall be designed for continuous, automatic operation and also be capable of

manual operation. Access ports shall be provided to allow access to the internals of the

system. The system shall be designed to withstand ambient temperatures up to 130

degrees F. The system and all accessories shall be factory mounted, piped, and wired to

the maximum extent possible.


A. Design and Performance Criteria:

1. Criteria: The system shall be capable of removing foul air at a rate no lower than the

rate shown on the following table.

2. Foul air removed from the facilities will have an average and peak concentration of

hydrogen sulfide (H2S) and design air flow rate as listed in the following table:

Air Flow Rate,

CFM

Avg. Inlet H2S

Concentration

Peak H2S

Concentration

600 200 300

3. System Performance: The odor control system shall demonstrate the following

performance when operating under the design flow conditions listed above:

a. The system shall remove on average a minimum of 99% of the inlet hydrogen

sulfide or have an outlet concentration of ≤0.5 ppm, whichever is greater.

b. Operational Pressure Drop: The pressure drop shall not exceed 5 in.w.c. across

the biotrickling vessel.

4. All components of the system shall be compatible with the conditions and chemicals

to which they will be subjected to during normal operation, which include but are not

necessarily limited to:

a. Hydrogen Sulfide




b. Sulfuric Acid

c. Carbon Disulfide and other Sulfides/Disulfides

d. Mercaptans

e. VOCs

5. Minimum Overall Empty Bed Residence Time (EBRT):15 seconds unless otherwise

approved by the ENGINEER.

6. Blowers:

a. Blower performance ratings shall be based on tests made in accordance with

AMCA Standard 210 and licensed to bear the AMCA Seal for performance.

Blower shall have a sharply rising pressure characteristic extended throughout the

operating range to assure quiet and stable operation.

b. The supplier shall provide sound power level ratings in accordance with AMCA

Standards 300 and 301. Sound power ratings shall be in decibels (reference 10E-

12 watts) in eight octave bands. At the rated fan operating conditions, the blower

shall not produce noise levels that exceed the following octave band:

Center Frequency (Hz) 63 125 250 500 1000 2000 4000 8000

Sound Power Level 102 102 109 107 103 102 100 93

2.03 MATERIALS

A. Blower bearings shall be grease lubricated, precision anti-friction ball or spherical roller,

self-aligning, pillow block design. Bearings shall be designed for a minimum L-10 life of

30,000 hours (150,000 hours L-50 life) when rated at the blower’s maximum cataloged

operating speed. Blower bearings shall be visible and accessible for inspection and

maintenance. Bearings enclosed within the blower housing where they can be exposed to

the corrosive gas stream are not acceptable.

B. Blower shall be constructed in accordance with the ASTM D-4167 standard specification

for fiber-reinforced plastic blowers to ensure structural integrity. All parts exposed to the

gas stream shall be constructed of, or encapsulated in, an FRP laminate capable of

resisting continuous airstream temperatures of 250 degrees Fahrenheit.

C. All resins shall be clear to allow detection of subsurface imperfections. The use of

pigments, gel coats, inhibitors and additives which may disguise flaws in the laminate is

prohibited.

D. Blower housing shall be constructed of a fire retardant polyester resin with an ASTM E84

Class I rating. (Option: housing shall be constructed with a fire retardant vinyl ester resin

with an ASTM E84 Class II rating no greater than 30.) Housing laminate construction

shall conform to ASTM Standard C-582. Airstream surfaces shall be smooth to minimize

resistance and prevent buildup of airborne contaminants. Shaft hole openings shall be

fitted with a Teflon closure having a maximum clearance of 1/32” to minimize leakage.

Option: blower shall be furnished with a lubricatable, double-lip, Teflon or Viton shaft

seal.




E. Wheel shall be of backwardly inclined non-overloading design or radial design for

increased efficiency. Wheel shall be fabricated of fire-retardant vinyl ester with an

ASTM E84 Class II rating no greater than 30. Wheel hub shall be permanently bonded to

the shaft and completely encapsulated in FRP to insure corrosion resistant integrity. Steel

wheels coated with FRP or wheels with taper-lock hubs are not acceptable.

F. Shaft shall be ASTM A-108 steel, grade 1040/1045 with an FRP sleeve fixed securely

and bonded to the wheel backplate. The sleeve shall extend out through the housing shaft

hole for corrosion protection. (Option: shaft or shaft sleeve shall be 316 SST or Hastelloy

C-276). The shaft first critical speed shall be at least 125 percent of the blower’s

maximum operating speed. Shafts shall be counter-sunk for tachometer readings.

G. Blower balance and run test: The wheel and shaft shall be dynamically balanced, as an

assembly, in accordance with ASTM D-4167 and ANSI S2.19-1975, Grade 6.3. Prior to

shipment, completed blowers shall receive a final test-balance at the required operating

speed.

H. If the blower is not installed on the biofiltration vessel then vibration isolation shall be

installed per blower manufacturer’s recommendation.

I. Air ducting:

1. Fiberglass reinforced plastic (FRP) ductwork shall be fabricated in accordance with

National Bureau of Standards Voluntary Product Standard PS 15-69 except where

fittings are not covered, then use the geometry of SMANCA standard geometries. The

resin shall be a biphenyl A polyester that provides high chemical resistance. The FRP

ductwork shall be rated to withstand a minimum of 10-inch water vacuum. The FRP

duct shall be flanged where required to mate with devices, equipment, or to provide

flanges for supporting the ducts. All duct joints shall be of the butt type where not

flanged. The flame spread of the FRP shall be a maximum of 25 when tested in

accordance with ASTM E84-69.

2. Polyvinyl Chloride (PVC) ductwork shall be fabricated in accordance with SMACNA

Thermoplastic Duct (PVC) Construction Manual for 10-inch W.G. negative pressure

on suction sides of fans and for 10-inch W.G. positive pressure on fan discharges.

Duct supports, access doors, and flanged joints shall conform to the details of

construction as described in this manual. The plastic sheet from which the duct is

fabricated shall meet ASTM D1927, specification for rigid PVC plastic sheet. The

flame spread of the PVC shall be a maximum of 25 when tested in accordance with

ASTM E84-69.

3. Flexible connections in ducts shall be made of neoprene fiberglass cloth, insulated in

folds, and of sufficient length to accommodate the maximum deflection resulting

from vibration and contraction without causing strain. Minimum length in folded

position shall be 4 inches. Flexible duct connections shall be Ventfabrics, Inc Vention

(for exterior joints) or Ventel (for interior); Duro-Dyne Corp. Duration; or approved

equal.

4. Flexible branches shall be U.L. listed insulated factory-fabricated assemblies.

Flexible ducts shall be JP Lamborn Type PR-25; ATCO Series 40; or approved equal.




5. Duct support details and spacing shall conform to the most current edition of the

SMACNA “HVAC Duct Construction Standard, Metal and Flexible.” The specific

support detail utilized shall be as appropriate for each particular duct and location,

except as otherwise shown. Duct supports shall be hot-dip galvanized after

fabrication.

J. Vessel

1. The reactor vessel shall be free standing, packaged or skid mounted. Vessel shall be

constructed from fiberglass reinforced plastic (FRP) in accordance with ASTM

D4097 and C582, utilizing Interplastics 845 B gelcoat (or equal) with 3% UV

inhibitor. Vessel shall be completely corrosion resistant.

2. Resin used in the system liner and structural laminates shall be a premium vinyl ester

type such as Corezyn 8301, Hetron 922 by Ashland Chemicals, Derakane 411 by

Dow Chemical, Vipel F010 by AOC, or approved equal. The resin shall be reinforced

with an inner veil of a suitable synthetic organic fiber such as Nexus 111-00010, or

approved equal. Outer surface shall be UV protected. Any material of construction

other than vinyl ester resin shall not be acceptable.

3. Glass fiber reinforcement used shall be commercial grade, corrosion resistant

borosilicate glass. All glass fiber reinforcement shall be Type C, chemical grade,

Type E electrical grade. Surfacing veil shall be 10 mil Nexus 111-00010 or approved

equal. Mat shall be Type "E" (electrical grade) glass, 1.5 oz. per sq. ft with a nominal

fiber length of 1.25 + 0.25-inches, with a silane finish and styrene soluble binder.

Continuous glass roving, used in chopper gun spray-up applications shall be type "E"

grade with chrome or silane coupling agent. Alternate layers of mat and woven roving

used for reinforcement.

4. Unless otherwise specified, all fasteners, and metal attachments, such as anchors,

brackets etc. shall be ANSI Type 316 SS. Gaskets, unless otherwise approved shall be

EPDM.

2.04 SYSTEM COMPONENTS

A. Biotrickling Filter Vessel shall be free standing, packaged, skid mounted.

B. Foul air inlet, air outlet, spray headers, baffles, media support, drain and all connections

shown on the Contract Drawings shall be provided by the manufacturer. Tie down lugs

shall be integrally molded into the walls of the vessels. All external bolts shall be Type

316 stainless steel and designed for the specified loads. Interior fasteners shall be of

corrosion resistant materials such as PVC, FRP, or 316 SS.

C. A 1/4-inch thick, 60 durometer neoprene rubber sheet shall be placed underneath each

vessel.

D. The biological media shall have an available specific surface area and void space that

shall minimize the potential for short circuiting and encourage a uniform water and air

flow pattern over the entire media cross sectional area. Media shall resist compaction or

swelling due to anticipated moisture levels and shall not degrade when subjected to low




pH conditions of <2 SU, and shall be sufficient to ensure the performance requirements

of this specification are met. Synthetic or expanded clay media are acceptable.

E. Irrigation System

1. The vessel shall be configured with multiple or a single irrigation point which shall

evenly distribute the irrigation water over the entire upper surface of the biological

media layer.

2. The irrigation system may (if required) have the ability to recirculate system water as

desired for optimal efficiency and shall be integrated with the fresh water addition

piping.

3. Each irrigation system shall be tested by the Manufacturer and a certificate of

conformity supplied with the shop Drawings to show that the nozzle has been tested

and meets the Manufacturer’s standards for uniform distribution.

4. The irrigation system shall be supplied with a nutrient addition system to provide the

nutrients required by the bacteria for optimal metabolism of the odorous compounds

being treated.

F. Control System

1. Electrical Control Panel (ECP)

2. The ECP enclosure shall be NEMA 4X and constructed of FRP.

3. The ECP shall house the necessary electronic components and an Allen Bradley PLC

and HMI or approved equal for the control and monitoring of the irrigation system.

Alternately, relay logic based control panels are acceptable. The system shall be

controlled on the basis of time for the irrigation cycle and irrigation time shall be

adjustable to sustain conditions appropriate to the activity of the bacteria. There shall

be an allowance to manually operate the irrigation spray for the purpose of routine

maintenance checks.

4. The ECP shall require a single electrical connection as shown on the Electrical

Drawings or as required.

5. NFPA 820 requirements are as follows::

(a) The system shall be designed and fabricated in compliance with National Fire and

Protection Agency Code 820. As a minimum, all equipment installed on the system

shall be rated for Class 1, Division 2, Group D.

(b) All motors and equipment within 3 feet of the airstream shall be rated for Class 1,

Division 2, Group D.

(c) The local control panel will be mounted a minimum of 3 feet from the odor

control vessel and will be shipped loose. The installation and wiring of the remote

mounted control panel to the fan, nutrient pump, and solenoid valve shall be the

responsibility of the Contractor.

6. The Water Control Panel (WCP) shall be constructed of FRP, and be mounted

integral to the vessel. The WCP shall contain valves, solenoid valves, strainers,

metering pumps, pressure gauges, flowmeters, instruments and piping, as needed, for

the control of the irrigation system and shall operate from control signals from the

ECP. The WCP shall allow for a single connection to a potable or reclaimed water

source. The WCP shall house the nutrient addition system.

7. The ECP panel shall not be housed inside the WCP panel.




2.05 SPARE PARTS

A. At a minimum, the following spare parts shall be supplied with the equipment:

1. One (1) set of fuses, one (1) for each fuse rating.

2. One (1) set of bearings for the blower.

3. One (1) blower belt.

4. Two (2) spray nozzles.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.01 FACTORY ACCEPTANCE TEST

A. FRP vessel shall be inspected prior to shipping for conformance to the following:

1. Dimensions match those shown on submittal Drawings and are within Manufacturer’s

specified tolerances.

2. Flanges and connections between reactor parts fit securely without improper bending

or stressing of parts.

3. Damage or imperfections, including cracking/crazing are minimal and in accordance

with this specification.

4. Manufacturer shall keep a record of the quality control document for each reactor

vessel that is available to the ENGINEER upon request.

5. Owner or engineer reserves the right to be present during the FRP fabrication process

at the phase when the mold is ready to witness the inner liner application and the start

of the structural part addition. Owner will be responsible for travel costs.

B. Electrical control panel shall be inspected prior to shipping for conformance to the

following:

1. NEMA rating according to this specification.

2. PLC program (if applicable) shall be tested for proper communication and

functionality.

3. PLC digital and analog inputs (if applicable) shall be electrically tested to ensure

input recognition in the proper area of the PLC program.

4. All wiring between panel components and terminal strips shall be checked for proper

labeling and connection.

C. All water control panel piping and/or other pre-installed piping shall be tested prior to

shipping for conformance to the following:

1. System shall have no leaks when subjected to a pressure test at 1.5 times the

maximum operating pressure for a minimum of 1 hour.

2. All installed instruments, sensors, pumps, actuated valves, and other electrical

components shall be tested for proper operation.

3. All wiring from terminal strips to all electrical components shall be tested to ensure

proper wiring.



Division 13: Special Construction Section 13126-

10

D. Irrigation system shall be factory tested to ensure compliance with Manufacturer’s

standards for uniform distribution.

3.02 INSTALLATION & EQUIPMENT STARTUP

A. To the extent possible, all equipment shall be pre-assembled prior to shipment to

minimize the need for on-site assembly.

B. Installation of all equipment shall be in accordance with Manufacturer’s written

installation and startup instructions and by workers experienced in the handling of

FRP vessels, electrical work, plumbing and instrumentation. The final installation

shall be certified by the Manufacturer as complete and correct.

C. The Manufacturer shall provide the CONTRACTOR with required clearances,

tolerances and limitations, such as smoothness/flatness of concrete pad.

D. CONTRACTOR shall install water supply with pressure regulator, gravity drain to

wet well with a barometric P-trap, electrical circuit for all required equipment which

may include, but is not limited to, blower, recirculation pump, metering pump, valves

and controls, and all other accessories and appurtenances as may be required by the

Manufacturer for a complete and operational system.

E. Once the installation has been certified by the Manufacturer, the CONTRACTOR,

with supervision from the Manufacturer, shall start the System to begin the biological

acclimation period. This startup period shall take no longer than six (6) weeks but at

any point during this startup period, at the discretion and direction of the

Manufacturer, the CONTRACTOR shall switch the system over to normal operation.

Any minor re-piping or plumbing required will be clearly detailed in the

Manufacturer’s installation and startup manual and will be performed by the

CONTRACTOR.

F. Any special tools or instruments required for this startup/acclimation period shall be

provided by the Manufacturer.

G. After satisfactory startup and the corresponding switch over to normal operation, the


3.03 FIELD PAINTING & CORROSION PROTECTION

A. If painted surfaces are damaged during shipment, off-loading or installation, as long as

the damage is surface only and in no way affects the integrity of the equipment or its

ability to perform, these blemishes, scratches or other imperfections shall be touched up

by the CONTRACTOR in accordance with instructions from the Manufacturer. Materials

used shall be compatible with the original coating material in quality and color.

3.04 PERFORMANCE TESTING




11

A. Performance testing shall not commence until the Manufacturer and Owner agree that the

system has been satisfactorily started-up and sufficient time has been allowed for the

acclimation of the bacteria.

B. After the odor control system has been satisfactorily started-up, the CONTRACTOR

shall demonstrate that the system will perform as specified.



D. The CONTRACTOR shall supply, install and operate all equipment, sensors and

instrumentation required to complete the performance testing.

E. H2S Testing Procedure

1. Measure airflow into the unit and adjust to the design airflow +/-10% if necessary.

Airflow shall be measured at the beginning of the test period. The set position on the

damper shall be marked or noted. Airflow shall not change as long as damper remains

in position.

2. Measure pressure drop across each biotrickling filter at beginning of test period.

3. Performance test period shall begin at a noted time and last for four (4) hours. H2S

data from the common inlet location and from the outlet of the odor control system

shall be measured and logged once every 30 minutes to demonstrate performance

during the test period.

a. The inlet H2S data shall be logged with a pre-calibrated OdaLog gas data logger

with appropriate range and accuracy for the inlet air stream (0-1000 ppmv or 0-

200 ppmv range, 1 ppm display resolution or 0.0-50.0 ppmv range, 0.1 ppmv

display resolution) or with portable H2S analyzer from Interscan.

b. The outlet H2S data shall be logged with a pre-calibrated OdaLog gas data logger

with appropriate range and accuracy for the outlet air stream (0.00-2.00 ppmv

range, 0.01 ppmv display resolution or 0.0-50.0 ppmv range, 0.1 ppmv display

resolution) or with portable H2S analyzer from Interscan.

F. H2S Acceptance Criteria: The system’s H2S removal efficiency shall be determined by

calculating the average inlet H2S concentration and the average outlet H2S concentration

and using the following formula: H2S removal efficiency (%) = (1 – average outlet H2S

concentration/average inlet H2S concentration) x 100. Data points that are greater than 2x

the average will not be included in the calculation. The H2S removal efficiency shall

meet the criteria specified above for the system to be accepted.

3.05 MANUFACTURER’S SERVICES

A. Start-up assistance, testing, and training: Manufacturer’s factory trained representative

for one (1) separate trip unless otherwise approved by the ENGINEER.




12

B. Performance testing assistance: Manufacturer’s factory trained representative for one (1)

separate trip unless otherwise approved by the ENGINEER.

3.06 EQUIPMENT NAME PLATES

A. Each separate piece of equipment shall be furnished with a unique name plate identifying

the Manufacturer, model & serial number, date of manufacture and, if applicable,

capacity and any performance limitations. The nameplates shall be engraved stainless

steel or laminated in FRP and firmly affixed to the exterior surface of the equipment and

in a location that is accessible and easily read.

END OF SECTION

DIVISION 15

MECHANICAL

Division 15 - Mechanical



2015

Specifications

Division 15: Mechanical Section 15050-1

SECTION 15050

BASIC PROCESS PIPING MATERIALS AND METHODS

PART 1 GENERAL

1.1 SUMMARY

A. Section Includes: Basic piping materials and methods.

1.2 REFERENCES

A. American Society of Testing and Materials (ASTM): D 2240 - Test Method for

Rubber Property - Durometer Hardness.

B. Refer to Section 09800 for coating requirements for exterior of exterior piping.

1.3 DEFINITIONS

A. Exposed Piping: Piping within buildings, vaults, tunnels, or other structures without

regard to elevation of piping, or exposed piping outside buildings and structures.

B. Buried Piping: Piping actually buried in soil or cast in concrete.

C. Wet Wall: Wall with water on at least one side.

1.4 INTENT OF DRAWINGS AND SPECIFICATIONS

A. Except in details, piping is indicated diagrammatically. Sizes and locations are

indicated on the Drawings. Not every offset and fitting, or structural difficulty that

may be encountered has been indicated on the Drawings.

B. Perform minor modifications to piping alignment where necessaryto avoid structural,

mechanical, or other type of obstructions that cannot be removed or changed:

1. Modifications are intended to be of minor scope, not involving a change to

the design concept or a change to the Contract Price or Contract Time.



1. Venting Piping Under Pressure:

a. Lay piping under pressure flat or at a continuous slope without air

traps, unless otherwise indicated on the Drawings.

b. Install plug valves as air bleeder cocks at high points in piping.



2015

Specifications


Provide one inch plug valves for water lines, and 2 inch plug valves

for sludge lines, unless otherwise indicated on the Drawings.

c. Provide additional pipe taps with plug cocks and riser pipes along

piping as required for venting during initial fillings, disinfecting, and

sampling.

d. Before piping is placed into service, close plug valves and install

plugs. Protect plugs and plug valves from corrosion in accordance

with Section 09800.

2. Restraining Piping:

a. Restrain piping as follows:

1) When piping is underground, use mechanical restraints

throughout. All buried piping shall be restrained.

2) When piping is aboveground or under water, use mechanical

or structural restraints.

b. Provide restraints with ample size to withstand thrust forces resulting

from test pressures.

3. Connections to Existing Piping:

a. Expose existing piping to which connections are to be made with

sufficient time to permit, where necessary, field adjustments in line,

grade, or fittings:

1) Protect domestic water supplies from contamination:

a) Make connections between domestic water supplyand

other water systems in accordance with requirements

of public health authorities.

b) Provide devices approved byowner of domestic water

supply system to prevent flow from other sources into

the domestic supply system.

b. Make connections to existing piping and valves after sections of new

piping to be connected have been tested and found satisfactory.

c. Provide sleeves, flanges, nipples, couplings, adapters, and other

fittings needed to install or attach new fittings to existing piping and

to make connections to existing piping.

4. Connections to In-Service Piping:

a. Shutdown in-service piping in accordance with Section 01040:

1) Establish procedures and timing in a conference attended by

CONTRACTOR, ENGINEER, and OWNER of the in-service

piping.

5. Connections of Dissimilar Metals:

a. Connect ferrous and nonferrous metal piping, tubing, and fittings with

dielectric couplings especially designed for the prevention of

chemical reactions between dissimilar metals.

b. Nonferrous metals include aluminum, copper, and copper alloys.

c. For flanged piping with dissimilar metals use an insulated coupling



2015

Specifications


or insulating gasket.

6. All pipe tapping saddles are to be of bronze construction, unless noted

otherwise on the Drawings.

PART 2 PRODUCTS

2.1 ESCUTCHEONS

A. Manufacturers: One of the following or equal:

1. Dearborn Brass Company, Model Number 5358.

2. Keeney Manufacturing Company, Model Number 102 or Number 105.

3. Beaton and Corbin, Model Number 1 or Number 13.

B. Material: Chrome plated steel plate.

2.2 LINK SEAL


1. Calpico, Inc.

2. Thunderline Corporation.

B. Characteristics:

1. Modular mechanical type, consisting of interlocking neoprene or synthetic

rubber links shapes to continuously fill the annular space between the pipe

and wall opening.

2. Assemble links solely with stainless steel bolts and nuts to form a continuous

rubber belt around the pipe.

3. Provide a stainless steel pressure plate under each bolt head and nut. Isolate

pressure plate from contact with wall sleeve.

4. The link seals used in the chemical storage containment areas shall be

corrosion resistant to the chemicals contained in the chemical storage tanks.

2.5 BURIED PIPING

A. All buried piping shall also be provided with an identification tape (non detectible)

placed 3 feet above the crown of the pipe. The tape shall be an inert polyethylene-

plastic impervious to alkalis, acids, chemical reagents, and solvents likely to be

encountered in the soil. The tape shall be a minimum of 4.0 mils thick and not less

than 3" wide. The color of the tape and the text will be selected by OWNER.

Lettering shall be minimum 1 ½" high. The OWNER will select text for each pipe

run using manufacturer’s normally available stock.

PART 3 EXECUTION



2015

Specifications


3.1 EXAMINATION

A. Verification of Existing Conditions:

1. Locate and expose existing structures, piping, conduits, and other facilities

and obstructions which may affect construction of underground piping

before starting excavation for new underground piping and appurtenances.

2. Verify sizes, elevations, locations, and other relevant features of existing

facilities and obstructions. Determine conflicts for the construction of the

new underground piping and appurtenances.

3. Make piping location and grade adjustments to resolve conflicts between new

piping and existing facilities and obstructions.

3.2 WALL AND SLAB PENETRATIONS

A. Provide sleeves for piping penetrations through masonry and concrete walls, floors,

ceilings, roofs, pilasters, columns, piers, and beams unless specified or otherwise


B. For piping 1 inch in nominal diameter and larger, provide sleeves with minimum

inside diameters of 1 inch plus outside diameter of piping. For piping smaller than

1 inch in nominal diameter, provide sleeve of minimum twice the outside diameter

of piping:

1. Arrange sleeves and adjacent joints so piping can be pulled out of sleeves and

replaced without disturbing the structure.

2. Cut ends of sleeves flush with surfaces of concrete, masonry, or plaster.

3. Conceal ends of sleeves with escutcheons where piping runs through floors,

walls, or ceilings of finished spaces within buildings.

4. Seal spaces between pipes and sleeves.

C. Cast couplings or wall pieces in walls for penetrations of buried rigid piping

including cast iron, ductile iron, reinforced concrete, and vitrified clay through

structures:

1. Provide couplings or wall pieces with mechanical push-ons, or similar

flexible joints at outside of walls.

2. Provide additional similar joints in piping at transition points between

trenches and structure excavations.

3. For steel piping, single joints may be used in lieu of 2 joints. Locate single

joints outside within 2 feet from outside faces of walls.

D. Link Seal: Use link seals where seal is used to seal at wet wall sleeves as shown on

the Drawings. Coordinate the inside diameter of the wall sleeve with the size of the

seal to provide watertight sealing.

3.3 EXPOSED PIPING



2015

Specifications


A. Install exposed piping in straight runs parallel to the axes of structures, unless

indicated otherwise:

1. Install piping runs plumb and level, unless otherwise indicated on the

Drawings.

B. Install exposed piping after installing equipment and after piping and fitting locations

have been determined.

C. Support piping in accordance with Section 15141 and as shown on Drawings:

1. Do not transfer pipe loads and strain to equipment.

D. In addition to the joints indicated on the Drawings, provide unions, flexible

couplings, flanged joints, and other types of joints or means which are compatible

with and suitable for the piping system, and necessary to allow ready assembly and

disassembly of the piping.

E. Assemble piping without distortion or stresses caused by misalignment:

1. Match and properly orient flanges, unions, flexible couplings, and other

connections.

2. Do not subject piping to bending or other undue stresses when fitting piping.

Do not correct defective orientation or alignment by distorting flanged joints

or subjecting flange bolts to bending or other undue stresses.

3. Flange bolts, union halves, flexible connectors, and other connection

elements shall slip freely into place.

4. After piping assembly to fit when proper fit is not obtained.

5. Install eccentric reducers or increasers with the top horizontal for pump

suction piping.

3.4 BURIED PIPING

A. Bury piping with minimum 4 foot cover without air traps, unless otherwise indicated

on the Drawings.

B. Where 2 similar services run parallel to each other, piping for such services may be

laid in the same trench. Lay piping with sufficient room for assembly and

disassembly of joints, for thrust blocks, for other structures, and to meet separation

requirements of public health authorities having jurisdiction.

C. Laying Piping:

1. Lay piping in finished trenches free from water or debris. Begin at the lowest

point with bell ends up slope.

2. Place piping with top or bottom markings with markings in proper position.

3. Lay piping on an unyielding foundation with uniform bearing under the full



2015

Specifications


length of barrels.

4. Where joints require external grouting, banding, or pointing, provide space

under and immediately in front of the bell end of each section under and

immediately in front of the bell end of each section laid with sufficient shape

and size for grouting, banding, or pointing of joints.

5. At the end of each day’s construction, plug open ends of piping temporarily

to prevent entrance of debris or animals.

3.5 CLEANING

A. Piping Cleaning:

1. Upon completion of installation, clean piping interior of foreign matter and

debris. Perform special cleaning when required by the Contract Documents.

2. Maintain pipe in clean condition during installation.

3. Before jointing piping, thoroughly clean and wipe joint contact surfaces and

then properly dress and make joint.

4. Immediately prior to pressure testing, clean and remove grease, metal

cuttings, dirt, or other foreign materials which may have entered the system.

5. At completion of work and prior to final acceptance, thoroughly clean work

installed under these Specifications. Clean equipment, fixtures, pipe, valves,

and fittings of grease, metal cuttings, and sludge which may have

accumulated by operation of system, from testing, or from other causes.

Repair any stoppage or discoloration or other damage to parts of building, its

finish, or furnishings, due to failure to properly clean piping system, without

cost to Owner.

3.6 FIELD QUALITY AND CONTROL

A. General:

1. Upon completion of piping, test all piping systems.

2. Test all piping systems at 150 psi for 2 hours, unless otherwise indicated.

Pressure shall stabilize within 2% of 150 psi.

3. Isolate equipment which may be damaged by the specified pressure test

conditions.

4. Perform pressure test using calibrated pressure gauges and calibrated

volumetric measuring equipment to determine leakage rates. Select each

gauge so that the specified test pressure falls within the upper half of the

gauge’s range. Notify the OWNER 24 HRS prior to each test.

5. Unless otherwise specified, completelyassemble and test new piping systems

prior to connection to existing pipe systems.

6. Acknowledge satisfactory performance of tests and inspections in writing to

OWNER prior to final acceptance.

7. Provide all necessary equipment and perform all work required in connection

with the tests and inspections.



2015

Specifications


8. Bear the cost of all testing and inspecting, locating and remedying of leaks

and any necessary retesting and re-examination.

9. CONTRACTOR to dispose of testing water.

B. Pressure Testing Methods and Criteria:

1. Types of pressure testing and inspection to be employed include hydrostatic

pressure testing, and hydrostatic infiltration/exfiltration testing.

2. Pressurized liquid systems:

a. The following liquid piping systems shall have zero leakages at the

specified test pressure throughout the specified duration:

1) Exposed piping.

2) Buried insulated piping and buried or exposed pressure

piping.

3. Hydrostatic pressure testing:

a. All joints, including welds, are to be left exposed for examination

during the test.

b. Provide temporary restraints for expansion joints for additional

pressure load under test. Equipment in piping system with rated

pressure lower than pipe test pressure shall be isolated by valves

or blind flanges.

c. Do not paint or insulate exposed piping until successful performance

of pressure test.

d. Test soil, waste and drain piping at completion of installation of each

stack or section of piping by filling system with water to highest point

and checking joints and fittings for leaks. Leaks must be eliminated

before proceeding with work or concealing piping. Minimum test

heights shall be 10 FT.

END OF SECTION



2015

Specifications


SECTION 15075

PLASTIC PIPING AND TUBING

PART 1 GENERAL

1.1 SUMMARY

A. Section Includes: Plastic pipe, tubing, and fittings.

1.2 REFERENCES

A. American National Standards Institute (ANSI):

1. B 16.12 - Cast Iron Screwed Drainage Fittings.


1. D 648 - Test Method for Deflection Temperature of Plastics Under Flexural

Load. 2. D 1248 - Specification for Polyethylene Plastics Molding and Extrusion

Materials.

3. D 1784 - Specification for Rigid Poly (Vinyl Chloride) (PVC) Compounds

and Chlorinated by Poly (Vinyl Chloride ) (CPVC) Compounds. 4. D 1785 - Specification for Poly (Vinyl Chloride) (PVC) Plastic Pipe,

Schedules 40, 80, and 120.

5. D 2321 - Standard Practice for Underground Installation of Thermoplastic

Pipe for Sewers and other Gravity-Flow Applications. 6. D 2412 - Test Method for Determination of External Loading Characteristics

of Plastic Pipe by Parallel-Plate Loading.

7. D 2466 - Specification for Poly (Vinyl Chloride) (PVC) Plastic Pipe Fittings

Schedule 40. 8. D 2467 - Specification for Socket-Type Poly (Vinyl Chloride) (PVC) Plastic

Pipe Fittings Schedule 80.

9. D 2513 - Specification for Thermoplastic Gas Pressure Pipe Tubing and

Fittings. 10. D 2564 - Specification for Solvent Cements for Poly (Vinyl Chloride) (PVC)

Plastic Pipe and Fittings.

11. D 2661 - Standard Specification for Acrylonitrile-Butadiene-Styrene (ABS)

Schedule 40 Plastic Drain, Waste, and Vent Pipe and Fittings. 12. D 2665 - Specification for Poly (Vinyl Chloride) (PVC) Plastic, Waste and

Vent Pipe Fittings.

13. D 2680 - Specification for Acrylonitrile-Butadiene-Styrene (ABS) and Poly

(Vinyl Chloride) (PVC) Composite Sewer Pipe. 14. D 2751 - Standard Specification for Acrylonitrile-Butadiene-Styrene (ABS)

Sewer Pipe and Fittings.

15. D 3034 - Specification for Type PSM Poly (Vinyl Chloride) (PVC) Sewer

Pipe and Fittings.



2015

Specifications


16. D 3212 - Specification for Joints for Drain and Sewer Plastic Pipes Using

Flexible Elastomeric Seals. 17. D 3350 - Specification for Polyethylene Plastic Pipe and Fittings Material.

18. D 4101 - Specification for Propylene Plastic Injection and Extrusion

Materials.

19. F 439 - Specification for Socket-Type Chlorinated Poly (Vinyl Chloride)

(CPVC) Plastic Pipe Fittings, Schedule 80. 20. F 441 - Standard Specification for Chlorinated Poly(Vinyl Chloride) (CPVC)

Plastic Pipe, Schedules 40 and 80.

21. F 477 - Standard Specification for Elastomeric Seals (Gaskets) for Joining

Plastic Pipe. 22. F 483 - Method for Total Immersion Corrosion Test for Aircraft Chemicals

Maintenance.

23. F 493 - Specification for Solvent Cements for Chlorinated Poly (Vinyl

Chloride) (CPVC) Plastic Pipe and Fittings. 24. F 679 - Specification for Poly (Vinyl Chloride) (PVC) Large-Diameter Plastic

Gravity Sewer Pipe and Fittings.

C. American Water Works Association (AWWA):

1. C 900 - Polyvinyl Chloride (PVC) Pressure Pipe and Fabricated Fittings.

2. C-115 - Standard for Flanged Ductile Iron Pipe with Grey Iron Threaded

Flanges.

D. Code of Federal Regulations:

1. Title 49.

E. Plastic Pipe Institute ( PPI):

1. PE 3408.

F. United States Department of Transportation:

1. Materials Transportation Bureau.

1.3 ABBREVIATIONS

A. ABS: Acrylonitrile-Butadiene-Styrene.

B. CPVC: Chlorinated Polyvinyl Chloride.

C. DWV: Drain, waste, and vent.

D. ID: Inside diameter of piping or tubing.

E. NPS: Nominal pipe size followed by the size designation.

F. NS: Nominal size of piping or tubing.

G. PE: Polyethylene.



2015

Specifications


H. PP: Polypropylene.

I. PVC: Polyvinyl Chloride.

J. SDR: Standard dimension ratio.

1.4 SUBMITTALS

A. Product Data: Describe materials and installation equipment including fusion

machine.

B. Manufacturer’s Published Installation Instructions.

C. Certificates:

1. Submit manufacturer’s certificate attesting that plastic pipe, tubing, and fitting types meet specified requirements.

2. Copies of solvent cement manufacturer’s report and certification in

accordance with ASTM D 2564 for PVC piping, and ASTM F 493 for CPVC piping.

D. Qualifications of installation crew for PE piping, including qualifications of the

fusion machine technician.


A. Fusion Machine Technician Qualifications: 1 year experience in the installation of

similar PE piping systems from the same manufacturer.

B. Provide pipe and tubing bearing NSF seal, except for drainage piping.

C. Mark plastic pipe with nominal size, type, class, schedule or pressure rating, and manufacturer.


A. Protect piping materials from sunlight, scoring, and distortion.

B. Do not allow surface temperatures on pipe and fittings to exceed 120 degrees

Fahrenheit.

C. Store and handle pipe and fittings as recommended by manufacturer in published

instructions.

PART 2 PRODUCTS



2015

Specifications


2.1 MATERIALS

A. Extruding and Molding Material: Virgin material containing no scrap, regrind, or

rework material except where permitted in the referenced standards.

B. Fittings: Same material as the pipe and of equal or greater pressure rating, except the

DWV fittings need not be pressure rated.

C. Unions 2-1/2 inches and smaller: Socket end screwed unions. Make unions 3 inches

and larger of socket flanges with 1/8 inch full face soft rubber gasket.

2.2 PVC PIPING, SCHEDULE TYPE

A. Materials:

1. PVC schedule type piping: Designation PVC 1120 conforming to ASTM D

1785 and appendices thereto. a. Pipe and fittings: Extruded from Type I, Grade 1, Class 12454-B

material in accordance with ASTM D 1784.

b. PVC Schedule Type Piping: Schedule 80 unless otherwise indicated

on the Drawings. 2. Fitting:

a. Supplied by pipe manufacturer.

b. Pressure Fittings: In accordance with ASTM D 2466 or ASTM D

2467. c. DWV Fittings: In accordance with ASTM D 2665.

3. Solvent Cement: In accordance with ASTM D 2564.


A. PVC Piping, Schedule Type:

1. Mark pipe and fittings in accordance with ASTM D 1785.

B. PVC Piping, Class Type:

1. Test pipe to withstand, without failure, 600 pounds per square inch, gauge, hydrostatic pressure for a minimum of 5 seconds.

2. Test integral bell with the pipe.

C. CPVC Piping:

1. Mark pipe and fittings in accordance with ASTM F 441.

2.4 DETECTABLE TAPE

A. Materials: 1. 3.5 mil thick solid foil core encased in a protective plastic jacket.

2. Resistant to alkalies, acids and other destructive elements commonly found

in soil.



2015

Specifications


3. Lamination shall have sufficient strength that the layers cannot be separated

by hand. 4. Total composite thickness hall be 4.3 mils minimum. 5. Foil core to be visible to ensure continuity.

6. Minimum tensile strength of 63 lbs in the machine direction and 68 lbs in the

transverse direction per three (3) inch strip. 7. Continuous warning message repeated every 16 to 36 inches shall be

imprinted on the tape surface. Tape shall be colored.

PART 3 EXECUTION

3.1 INSTALLATION

A. General: 1. Where not otherwise specified, install piping in accordance with ASTM F

645, or manufacturer’s published instructions for installation of piping, as applicable to the particular type of piping.

2. Provide molded transition fittings for transitions from plastic to metal or IPS pipe. Do not thread plastic pipe.

3. Locate unions where indicated on the Drawings, and elsewhere where

required for adequate access and assembly of the piping system. 4. Provide serrated nipples for transition from plastic pipe to rubber hose.

5. All buried plastic pipe shall have detectable tape applied along the entire

length of pipe. 6. PVC expansion joints installed on PVC pipelines as conditions require.

B. Installation of PVC Piping, Schedule Type: 1. Exposed 4- inch and larger connections will be van stone style flanged as

shown on the drawings. Spigot van stone style will be used to flange fittings.

Socket van stone style will be used for piping flanges exposed less than 4" and smaller connections will be solvent welded.

2. Neoprene gaskets will be used for all water piping. 3. Solvent weld joints in accordance with ASTM D 2855.

4. Install piping in accordance with manufacturer’s published instructions.


A. Clean and test piping as specified in section 15050.

END OF SECTION



2015

Specifications


SECTION 15110

VALVES

PART 1 GENERAL

1.1 SUMMARY

A. Section Includes: Basic requirement for valves:

1. Furnish and install valves as shown on the Drawings.

2. Furnish and install valves required for proper piping and equipment operation

and maintenance, in addition to the valves indicated on the Drawings, and

specified.

1.2 REFERENCES


1. ASTM D: 1784 Standard Specification for Rigid Poly(Vinyl Chloride) (PVC)

Compounds and Chlorinated Poly(Vinyl Chloride) (CPVC) Compounds.

2. ASTM: C504 Rubber-Sealed Butterfly Valves

3. ASTM D 1599: Standard Test Method for Resistance to Short-Time

Hydraulic Pressure of Plastic Pipe, Tubing, and Fittings.

B. American Water Works Association (AWWA):

1. AWWA C504: Standard for Rubber-Seated Butterfly Valves.

2. AWWA C560-14: Standards for Cast-Iron Slide Gates

1.3 DESIGN REQUIREMENTS

A. Pressure Rating: Suitable for service under pressures equal to and less than 1.5 times

the maximum expected working pressure unless noted in on the Drawings.

B. Valve To Piping Connections:

1. Valves 3 inch nominal size and larger: Flanged ends unless otherwise

specified on the Drawings.

2. Valves less than 3 inch nominal size: Screwed ends or True Union.

1.4 SUBMITTALS

A. Product Data: Submit detailed technical information relating to the valve including

description of component parts, materials of construction, performance, dimensions,

and weights.

B. Manufacturer’s Published Instructions:



2015

Specifications


1. Submit instructions for installation, operation, and maintenance of valves.

2. Furnish bound sets of installation, operation, and maintenance instructions for

each type of valve 4 inch nominal size and larger.


A. Manufacturer Qualifications:

1. Valves: Manufactured by manufacturers whose valves have had successful

operational experience in comparable service.

PART 2 PRODUCTS

2.1 MATERIALS

A. PVC Butterfly Valves:

1. Rating: 10 psi at 75 degrees F.

2. Type: Short body flanged, suitable for a moist, corrosive foul air application

and suitable for thottling foul air flows. Seat shall be fully replaceable

without full valve disassembly.

3. Connections: Flanged.

4. Materials: PVC body and disk, high impact polypropylene lever handle, 316

SS stem. Seat shall be Buna-N or EPDM.

5. Manufacturer: Spears or equal.

B. PVC Knife Valves:


2. Type: Wafer type suitable for long term use with raw sewage.

3. Connections: Socket

4. Materials: ABS body, PVC hubs, 304 SS shaft, paddle, and handle. Seals and

seats shall be chloroprene or santoprene, and shall be sewage and grease

resistant.

5. Manufacturer: Valterra or equal.

C. PVC Ball Valves:


2. Type: Double Union

3. Connections: Socket

4. Materials: PVC body, teflon seats and EPDM O-ring seals, except Viton O-

ring seals for use with chlorine solution.

5. Manufacturer: R&G Sloane, Ashi/America Pro Block, or equal.

D. Slide Gate Valves:




2015

Specifications


2. Type: Resilient Seated

3. Materials:

a. Wetted Parts: Type 304 stainless steel.

b. Valve Stem: Type 304 stainless steel.

c. Seat/Seal: Chloroprene, sewage and grease resistant.

4. Protective Coating: All non-stainless steel surfaces shall be coated with a

minimum thickness of 16 mils epoxy.

5. Operator: Each valve to be factory equipped with a hand wheel operator.

6. Manufacturer: Waterman SS 251-O-Y, or equal.

PART 3 EXECUTION

3.1 PREPARATION

A. Required Information Prior To Installation:

1. Install valves after the required submittal has been accepted.

2. Determine, after flanged valves are selected, the face-to-face dimensions of

flanged valves and flanged check valves.

B. Fabricate piping to lengths taking into account the dimensions of flanged valves.

3.2 INSTALLATION

A. Provide incidental work and materials necessary for installation of valves including

flange gaskets, flange bolts and nuts, valve boxes and covers, concrete bases,

blocking, and protective coating.

B. Where needed, furnish and install additional valves for proper operation and

maintenance of equipment and plant facilities under the following circumstances:

1. Where such additional valves are required for operation and maintenance of

the particular equipment furnished by CONTRACTOR.

2. Where such additional valves are required as a result of a substitution or

change initiated by CONTRACTOR.

3. Install valves with their stems in vertical position above the pipe, except as

follows:

a. Butterfly valves, gate valves aboveground, globe valves, and angle

valves may be installed with their stems in the horizontal position.

C. Install valves so that handles clear obstructions when the valves are operated from

full open to fully closed.

D. Place top of valve boxes flush with finish grade or as otherwise indicated on the

Drawings.



2015

Specifications


3.3 ADJUSTING

A. Make sure all adjustments to valves, operators and appurtenant equipment prior to

Project Acceptance. Operate valve, open, close at system pressures.

3.4 VALVE SCHEDULE

Valve ID

Type

Location

Service

Size

(In)

Actuator

Pressure

Class (min)

V-FA 1 Butterfly Headworks Foul Air 3" Lever 150 psi

V-FA 2 Butterfly EQ Basin Foul Air 4" Lever 150 psi

V-FA 3 Butterfly ASD Foul Air 6" Lever 150 psi

V-FA 4 Butterfly Aerated Sludge

Holding

Foul Air 3" Lever 150 psi

V-FA 5 Butterfly MH 2 Foul Air 1 ½" Nut 150 psi

V-INF 1 PVC Knife Influent to EQ

Basin

Influent

Sewage

12" Handle 10 psi

V-INF 2 PVC Knife Influent Bypass

Aeration Basin 1

Influent

Sewage

12" Handle 10 psi

V-INF 3 PVC Knife Influent Bypass

Aeration Basin 2

Influent

Sewage

12" Handle 10 psi

V-HW-1 Slide Gate Headworks Screened

Sewage

12" Handwheel 100 psi

END OF SECTION



2015

Specifications


SECTION 15141

MECHANICAL - PROCESS PIPE SUPPORTS

PART 1 GENERAL

1.1 SUMMARY

A. Section Includes: Supports for pipe, fittings, valves, and appurtenances.

1.2 REFERENCES

A. American National Standard Institute or Manufacturer’s Standardization Society

(ANSI/MSS):

1. SP 58 - Pipe and Supports, Design and Manufacture.

2. SP 69 - Pipe Supports and Hangers, Selection and Applications.

1.3 SUBMITTALS

A. Shop Drawings: Include schedule, indicating where supports will be installed, and

drawings of pipe support system components.

PART 2 PRODUCTS

2.1 PIPE SUPPORTS

A. Pipe Supports:

1. 2-inch and smaller: Supplied by CONTRACTOR under constraints of these

specifications. Locations for these supports are not specifically shown in

drawings but are the responsibility of the CONTRACTOR.

2. Larger than 2-inch: As shown on the Drawings.

2.2 MATERIALS

A. Materials: As indicated on the Drawings.

B. Materials Not Specifically Indicated on the drawings: Hot-dip galvanized steel with

stainless fasteners.

PART 3 EXECUTION

3.1 INSTALLATION



2015

Specifications


A. Properly support, suspend or anchor exposed pipe, fittings, valves, and

appurtenances to prevent sagging, overstressing, or movement of piping and to

prevent thrusts or loads on or against connected pumps, valves, meters and other

equipment.

B. Carefully determine locations of inserts. Anchor to form work prior to placing

concrete.

C. Do not use stud type powder actuated fasteners for securing metallic conduit or steel

pipe larger than 1 inch to concrete, masonry, or wood.

D. Suspend pipe hangers from hanger rods. Secured with double nuts.

E. Install continuously threaded hanger rods only where indicated on the Drawings.

F. Use adjustable ring hangers; or adjustable clevis hangers, for 6 inch and smaller

diameter pipe.

G. Use adjustable clevis hangers for pipe larger than 6 inches in diameter.

H. Secure pipes with galvanized double nutted U-bolts or suspend pipes from hanger

rods and hangers.

I. Support Spacing(unless otherwise specified on drawings):

1. Support 2 inch and smaller piping on horizontal and vertical runs at

maximum 5 feet on center, unless otherwise specified.

2. Support larger than 2 inch piping on horizontal and vertical runs at maximum

8 feet on center, unless otherwise specified.

3. Support exposed polyvinyl chloride and other plastic pipes at maximum 5

feet on center, regardless of size.

4. Support tubing, copper pipe and tubing, fiber-reinforced plastic pipe or duct,

and rubber hose and tubing at intervals close enough to prevent sagging

greater than 1/4 inch between supports.

J. Install Supports at the following Locations (unless otherwise shown on Drawings):

1. Horizontal bends.

2. Both sides of flexible pipe connections.

3. Base of risers.

4. Floor penetrations.

5. Connections to pumps, blowers and other equipment.

6. Valves and appurtenances.

K. Securely anchor plastic pipe, valves, and headers to prevent movement during



2015

Specifications


operation of valves.

L. Anchor plastic pipe between expansion loops and direction changes to prevent axial

movement through anchors.

M. Size hanger rods, supports, clamps, anchors, brackets, and guides in accordance with

ANSI/MSS SP 58 and SP 69.

N. Do not use chains, plumbers’ straps, wire, or similar devices for permanently

suspending, supporting, or restraining pipes.

O. Support plumbing drainage and vents in accordance with Uniform Plumbing Code.

P. Supports, clamps, brackets, and portions of support system bearing against copper

pipe: Copper plates, copper throughout, or isolated with neoprene or polyvinyl

chloride tape.

Q. Where pipe is insulated, install over-sized supports and hangers.

R. Install insulation shield in accordance with ANSI/MSS SP 69, Type 40. Shield shall

be galvanized steel unless specified elsewhere.

S. Install riser clamps at floor penetrations and where indicated on the Drawings.

T. Paint or Coat support system components as specified in Section 09800.

END OF SECTION

Division 3 - Concrete

DIVISION 16

ELECTRICAL



Division 16: Electrical Section 16050 – Page 1

SECTION 16050

GENERAL PROVISIONS

PART 1 GENERAL

1.01 DESCRIPTION

A. Scope:

1. CONTRACTOR shall provide all labor, materials, equipment and incidentals

as shown on the Drawings, specified, and required to complete the electrical

Work.

B. Coordination:

1. Review installation procedures, drawings and schedules under other Sections

and coordinate with other trades the installation of electrical items that must

be installed with or within formwork, walls, partitions, ceilings and panels.

2. CONTRACTOR shall be responsible for the installation of all conduits,

inserts, and other items to be embedded in the concrete, or built into walls,

partitions, ceilings or panels constructed by other subcontractors.

CONTRACTOR shall provide other sub-contractors with detailed plans or

sketches of the location of said conduits and other built-in items as may be

required. CONTRACTOR shall keep himself fully informed of the

construction where conduits and other built-in items are to be installed.

CONTRACTOR shall install said conduits and other built-in items in such a

manner and within such time periods as will not unnecessarily delay the work

of the other sub-contractors.

C. General:

1. Interpretation of Drawings:

a. Dimensions shown on the Drawings that are related to equipment are

based on the equipment of one manufacturer. Confirm the dimensions

of the equipment furnished to the space allocated for that equipment.

b. The Drawings show the principal elements of the electrical Work.

They are not intended as detailed working drawings for the electrical

Work, but as a complement to the Specifications to clarify the

principal features of the electrical systems.

c. It is the intent of the Drawings and Specifications that all equipment

and devices, furnished and installed under this Contract, be properly

connected and interconnected with other equipment and devices so as

to render the installations complete for successful operation,

regardless of whether all the connections and interconnections are

specifically mentioned in the Specifications or shown on the Drawings.




d. It also is the intent of the Contract Documents that similar products be

provided by the same manufacturer for uniformity on the Project.

D. Related Sections: CONTRACTOR shall coordinate the requirements of the Work in

this Section along with the requirements of the Sections listed below which includes,

but is not necessarily limited to, Work that is directly related to this Section.

1. Section 01072, Project Record Documents

2. Section 01340, Technical Submittals

3. Section 01423, Reference Standards

4. Section 01600, Product Delivery, Storage and Handling

5. Section 01651, Transportation and Handling of Materials and Equipment

6. Section 01715, Equipment Operation and Maintenance Instructions

E. Temporary Power and Lighting:

1. Refer to Division 1, Temporary Electricity, for temporary power during

construction.

2. Refer to Division 1, Temporary Lighting, for temporary lighting during

construction.

F. Utilities:

1. Refer to Section 16051 UTILITY WORK.


A. Requirements of Regulatory Agencies:

1. Permits: Obtain all permits and pay fees required to commence Work and,

upon completion of the Work, obtain and deliver to ENGINEER a Certificate

of Inspection and Approval from the State Board of Fire Underwriters or

other authority having jurisdiction.

2. Codes: Material and equipment shall be installed in accordance with the

current standards and recommendations of the National Electrical Code (latest

edition), the National Electrical Safety Code and with local codes which

apply. Where discrepancies arise between codes, the most restrictive

regulation shall apply.

3. Tests by Independent Regulatory Agencies: Electrical material and equipment

shall be new and shall bear the label of the Underwriters' Laboratories, Inc., or

other nationally recognized, independent testing laboratory, wherever

standards have been established and label service regularly applies.

4. Utilities:

a. Work in connection with the electric service and utility metering shall

be done in strict conformance with the requirements of APS.

b. Phone Company: None




B. Reference Standards: Electrical material and equipment shall conform in all respects

to the latest approved standards of the following:

1. National Electrical Manufacturers Association.

2. The American National Standards Institute.

3. The Institute of Electrical and Electronic Engineers.

4. Insulated Power Cable Engineers Association.

5. National Electrical Code.

6. National Electrical Safety Code (NESC).

1.03 SUBMITTALS

A. Refer to Division 1, Shop Drawing Procedures, and the General Conditions.

B. Shop Drawings shall include the following information to the extent applicable to the

particular item:

1. Manufacturer's name and product designation or catalog number.

2. Electrical ratings.

3. Conformance to applicable standards or specifications of ANSI, ASTM,

ICEA, IEEE, ISA, NEC, NEMA, NFPA, OSHA, UL, or other organizations.

4. Dimensioned plan, section, elevations and panel layouts showing means for

mounting, conduit connection, and grounding.

5. Materials and finish specification, including paints.

6. List of components including manufacturer's names and catalog numbers.

7. Internal wiring diagram and drawings indicating all connections to

components and numbered terminals for external connections.

1.04 PROJECT CLOSEOUT

A. Operation and Maintenance Data: Submit complete manuals including:

1. Copies of all Record Drawings and Wiring Diagrams, test reports,

maintenance data and schedules, description of operation, and spare parts

information.

2. Furnish Operation and Maintenance Manuals in conformance with the

requirements of Division 1.

B. Record Drawings:

1. Furnish Record Drawings in accordance with the requirements of Division 1,

Record Documents, including:

a. System Record Drawings: Include the following:

1) One line wiring diagram of the distribution system.

2) Actual in place conduit and cable layouts with schedule of

conduit sizes and number and size of conductors.

3) Layouts of the power and lighting arrangements and the

grounding system.




4) Control schematic diagrams, with terminal numbers and all

control devices identified, for all equipment.

b. Point-to-Point Interconnection Wiring Diagram Drawings: Include the

following:

1) External wiring for each piece of equipment, panel, instrument

and other devices and conduit wiring to control stations,

lighting panels and motor controllers.

2) Numbered terminal block identification for each wire

termination.

3) Identification of the assigned wire numbers for all

interconnections.

4) Identification of all conduit wiring by the conduit tag in which

the wire is installed.

5) Terminal and pull boxes through which wiring is routed.

6) Identification of all equipment and the Shop Drawing

transmittal numbers for equipment from which the wiring

requirements and termination information was obtained.

2. The Record Drawings shall reflect final equipment and field installation

information.

1.05 PRODUCT DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING

C. Delivery of Materials: CONTRACTOR shall instruct the manufacturers and vendors

as to the maximum shipping sizes of equipment that can be accommodated at the site.

D. Storage of Materials: Conform to the requirements of Division 1, Storage of

Materials and Equipment.

E. Handling of Materials: Conform to the requirements of Division 1, Transportation

and Handling of Materials and Equipment.

1.06 JOB CONDITIONS

A. Existing Conditions:

1. CONTRACTOR shall examine the site and existing facilities in order to

compare them with the Contract Documents with respect to the conditions of

the premises, location of and connection to existing facilities and any

obstructions which may be encountered.

2. CONTRACTOR shall perform the Work with due regard to safety and in a

manner that will not interfere with the existing equipment or in any way cause

interruption of any of the functions of the plant.

3. Work shall be carried out with a minimum amount of disruption to the

operation of the existing plant and with prior approval of OWNER.

CONTRACTOR shall submit, for approval by OWNER, a detailed written




procedure for work which affects operation of the existing plant, a detailed

procedure for modifying any existing electrical equipment, and anticipated

time required to complete the Work and the required shutdown time, if any.

4. Where the Work of CONTRACTOR ties in with existing installations,

CONTRACTOR shall take prior precautions and safeguards in connecting the

Work with the existing operating circuits so as to prevent any interruption to

the existing operating circuits. The tying in of Work, installed under this

Contract, with the existing circuits shall be performed only in the presence of

OWNER. Advance notice will be required before any equipment is removed

from service. CONTRACTOR shall notify OWNER, in writing, of his

intention to do such work, providing full details.

1.07 CONTROL CABINETS AND PANELS

A. All control cabinets and panels located in wet or corrosive environments shall be

NEMA 4X, stainless steel, unless otherwise specified or noted on the Drawings. All

outdoor panels (containing electronics rated for less than 122 degrees Fahrenheit)

shall be provided with sunshade structures.

1.08 ELECTRICAL EQUIPMENT

A. All electrical equipment shall be capable of operating successfully at full-rated load,

without failure, with an ambient outside air temperature of 25 F to 122 F and an

elevation of 420 feet (MSL).

1.09 AREA CLASSIFICATIONS

A. Wet/Corrosive Locations: The following areas shall be considered wet/corrosive

locations:

1. All outdoor areas.

2. All indoor areas below grade.

3. Inside storage tanks.

4. Areas indicated on the Drawings.

Materials, equipment and incidentals in areas identified as wet locations shall meet

NEC and NEMA requirements for wet or corrosive locations. All equipment

enclosures including pull boxes installed in wet or corrosive locations shall be NEMA

4X, Type 316 stainless steel, unless otherwise indicated. Conduits shall be PVC-

Coated-GRS and shall be terminated at enclosures with watertight, threaded hubs.

B. All equipment enclosures including pull boxes installed indoor (above grade) shall be

NEMA Type 12.

1.10 SCHEMATIC DIAGRAMS




A. Schematic diagrams are provided for CONTRACTOR'S guidance in fulfilling the

operational intent of the Contract Documents.

B. It shall be CONTRACTOR'S responsibility to meet all safety and electrical codes, and

to provide all equipment, appurtenances and specialty items required to provide for

complete and operable systems.

C. Review of control schemes submitted by CONTRACTOR shall not relieve

CONTRACTOR of his contractual responsibility to provide complete and successfully

operating systems.

PART 2 PRODUCTS

2.01 NAMEPLATES

A. Material: Laminated phenolic, incised to show 3/8-inch high letters, Gothic. The

letters shall be black with white background or match existing unless indicated

otherwise.

B. Border: Minimum 1/8-inch around engraved print with extra length for fastening

devices.

C. Fasteners: Secured with #4-40, round-head, stainless steel, self-tapping screws.

2.02 WIRE MARKERS

A. Refer to Section 16122, 600 Volt Cable.

2.03 CONDUIT TAGS

A. Refer to Section 16131, Rigid Conduit.

PART 3 EXECUTION

3.01 EQUIPMENT IDENTIFICATION

A. Provide identification of each electrical item, in addition to the manufacturer's

nameplates, to identify the item's function and the equipment or system which it serves

or controls.

B. Identify equipment by means of nameplates. Re-label existing equipment whose




designation has been changed.

C. Color code and identify all wires and cables by means of wire markers. Identify

power conductors by circuit number, labeled at power source and at the equipment,

and phase.

D. Identify each control and instrumentation signal and status wire by a unique

information, Example:

E. Numbering system shall reflect the actual designations used in the Work and shall be

documented on the point-to-point wiring diagrams. Wire markers shall be clearly

identified at both ends of conductors. Coil spare wiring neatly. Tag each spare wire

with conduit number and wire number.

F. Conduit Tags:

1. Conduit tags shall be yellow, 1-1/2-inches round, aluminum tags. Engraved,

with the conduit number directed by the ENGINEER. Print shall be 1/4-inch

Gothic. The conduit tags shall be manufactured by Brady, Catalog No. 49900,

Almetek Mini-tag, or Pre-Approved Equal.

2. Each tag shall be attached with nylon-coated 48-mil stainless steel wire and

fasteners, as manufactured by Brady, Catalog No. 23310, Almetek Mini-tag,

or Pre-Approved Equal, and brass wire clamps, double ferrule design, as

manufactured by Brady Catalog No. 23312, or Pre-Approved Equal.

G. Identify pull and terminal boxes with nameplates. Identify each box by a unique

number. Numbering system shall reflect the actual designations used in the field and

as documented on wiring diagrams.

END OF SECTION

Tag ID Description Terminal Slot #

FM1-FR Raw Water Influent Flow Rate 22

FCV1-C Flow Control Valve 1 Closed Position 104



Division 16: Electrical Section 16051– Page 1

SECTION 16051

UTILITY WORK

PART 1 GENERAL

1.01 DESCRIPTION

A. Scope:

1. This section specifies general requirements for the electrical and telephone

utility work.

2. This section specifies several requirements that are not indicated on the

Drawings.

3. All fees must be paid by the CONTRACTOR.

B. Coordination:

1. The CONTRACTOR shall examine APS electrical utility specifications prior

to initiating the work, become intimately familiar with the APS electrical

utility requirements, and investigate any and all additional requirements that

are necessary for this project.

2. CONSTRUCTION-PHASE COORDINATION: CONTRACTOR shall

coordinate all work with the utility companies. This coordination shall

include, but is not limited to, the following:

a. Pre-construction meeting and coordination

b. Blue staking and ductbank locating services

c. Utility cable work (primary and secondary)

d. Utility power pole work

e. Utility transformer work

f. Utility switch and fuse cabinet work

g. City inspection of the service entrance section

h. Utility company inspection

i. New utility energization work

j. Utility demolition work

C. Related Sections:

1. CONTRACTOR shall coordinate the requirements of the Work in this Section

along with the requirements of the Sections listed below which includes, but is

not necessarily limited to, Work that is directly related to this Section.

a. Division 1, Submittals.

b. Division 1, Record Documents

c. Section 16061, Grounding




d. Section 16131, Rigid Conduit

1.02 JOB CONDITIONS

A. Existing Conditions:

1. CONTRACTOR shall examine the site and existing facilities in order to

become familiar with the conditions of the premises, location of and

connection to existing utilities and any obstructions which may be

encountered.

2. CONTRACTOR shall perform the Work with due regard to safety and in a

manner that will not interfere with the existing equipment or in any way cause

interruption of any of the functions of the facility.

3. Work shall be carried out with a minimum amount of disruption to the

operation of the existing facility and with prior approval of OWNER.

CONTRACTOR shall submit, for approval by OWNER, a detailed written

procedure for work which affects operation of the existing facility, a detailed

procedure for modifying any existing electrical equipment, and anticipated

time required to complete the Work and the required shutdown time, if any.

1.03 DEMOLITION

A. Utility Demolition:

1. All utility demolition work shall be coordinated with the utility company. At

no time shall the facility be without utility power.

1.04 ELECTRIC UTILITY POWER WORK

A. The CONTRACTOR shall furnish and install all electrical power work in accordance

with the utility company's requirements. All work shall be coordinated with the utility

company prior to start of work. The CONTRACTOR shall obtain the latest copy of

the utility company's specifications. The CONTRACTOR shall bid and construct all

work as required per the utility company's specifications. All work shall be performed

by the Contractor unless specifically indicated to be performed by the utility company.

B. Material and Installation: All material used and all installations shall be in accordance

with the utility company's requirements. Include pull boxes as specified by the utility

company.

C. Inspection: All work requiring inspection by the utility company shall be inspected and

approved by the utility company.




PART 2 PRODUCTS

2.01 GENERAL REQUIREMENTS

A. All material used shall be in accordance with the utility company's requirements.

PART 3 EXECUTION

3.01 INSTALLATION

A. All installation shall be in accordance with the utility company's requirements unless

noted otherwise.

3.02 INSPECTION

A. All installations shall be inspected by the utility company. The CONTRACTOR shall

obtain the utility company's acceptance of the work prior to covering the underground

work. All work shall be coordinated with the utility company.

END OF SECTION




SECTION 16061

GROUNDING SYSTEMS

PART 1 GENERAL

1.01 DESCRIPTION

A. Scope:


as shown on the Drawings, specified and required to furnish and install

complete grounding for the electrical systems, structures and equipment.


A. Reference Standards: Comply with applicable provisions and recommendations of the

following, except where otherwise shown or specified:

1. NEC Article 250, Grounding.

2. UL Standard No. 467, Electrical Grounding and Bonding Equipment.

1.03 SUBMITTALS


1. Manufacturer's technical information for grounding materials proposed for

use.

2. Listing of grounding connector types identifying where they are to be used.

3. Layouts of each structure ground grid.

4. Test point construction details.

5. Ground resistance test procedure.

B. Field Test Report

1. Results of ground resistance tests at each test point.

PART 2 PRODUCTS

2.01 MATERIALS

A. Bare Ground Cable:

1. Material: Annealed, bare, stranded copper, No. 4/0 AWG minimum size or as

otherwise shown on the Drawings (whichever is larger). Product and

Manufacturer: Provide ground cable of one of the following:

a. Cablec Corporation.




b. General Cable Corporation.

c. Rome Cable Company.

d. Or Equal.

B. Ground Rods:

1. Material: Copperclad rigid steel rods, 3/4 inch diameter, ten feet long.

2. Product and Manufacturer: Provide ground rods manufactured by one of the

following:

a. Copperweld, Bimetallics Division.

b. ITT Blackburn Company.

c. Or Equal.

C. Grounding Connectors:

1. Material: Pressure connectors shall be copper alloy castings, designed

specifically for the items to be connected, and assembled with Durium or

silicone bronze bolts, nuts and washers. Welded connections shall be by

exothermic process utilizing molds, cartridges and hardware designed

specifically for the connection to be made.

2. Product and Manufacturer: Provide grounding connectors of one of the

following:

a. Pressure Connectors:

1) O.Z./Gedney, Division of General Signal Corporation.

2) Burndy Corporation.

3) Or Equal.

b. Welded Connections:

1) Cadweld by Erico Products, Incorporated.

2) Therm O Weld by Burndy Corporation.

3) Or Equal.

PART 3 EXECUTION

3.01 STRUCTURE GROUND SYSTEM

A. Provide ground grids as shown on the Drawings.

B. Install No. 4/0 bare copper cable around the exterior perimeter of structures,

minimum 2 feet 6 inches below grade, unless otherwise shown on the Drawings.

C. Install ground rods where shown on the Drawings. Install additional ground rods, if

necessary, to attain a resistance to ground of less than five ohms for each ground grid.

D. For structures with steel columns, install No. 4/0 ground cable from grid to each

column around the perimeter of the structure. Connect cable to steel using




exothermic welds.

E. Connect grids to a continuous underground water pipe system, if available.

F. Provide accessible test points for measuring the ground resistance of each grid.

G. Weld all buried connections, except for test points.

3.02 EQUIPMENT GROUNDING

A. Ground all electrical equipment in compliance with the National Electrical Code.

B. Equipment grounding conductors shall be bare stranded copper cable of adequate size

installed in metal conduit where necessary for mechanical protection. Ground

conductors, pulled into conduits with non-grounded conductors, shall be insulated.

Insulation shall be green.

C. Control panels grounding conductors shall be base stranded copper cable of adequate

size to the ground grid from the AC ground bus and an insulated stranded copper

cable of adequate size to the ground grid from the DC ground bus.

D. Connect ground conductors to conduit with copper clamps, straps or with grounding

bushings.

E. Connect to piping by welding or brazing. Use copper bonding jumpers on all

gasketed joints.

F. Connect to equipment by means of lug compressed on cable end. Bolt lug to

equipment frame using holes or terminals provided on equipment specifically for

grounding. Do not use holddown bolts. Where grounding provisions are not

included, drill suitable holes in locations designated by ENGINEER.

G. Connect to motors by bolting directly to motor frames, not to sole plates or

supporting structures.

H. Connect to service water piping by means of copper clamps. Use copper bonding

jumpers on gasketed joints.

I. Scrape bolted surfaces clean and coat with a conductive oxide resistant compound.

3.03 TESTING

A. The grounding system shall be tested by a third party entity (not the CONTRACTOR

or the supplier).




B. Test the completed ground systems for resistance to ground using an electrical ground

resistance tester. The grounding system maximum resistance shall not exceed five

ohms under normally dry conditions when measured by the resistance tester.

Resistance values above five ohms shall be brought to the ENGINEER'S attention.

C. Test all grounded cables and metal parts for continuity of connection.

D. Test shall be witnessed by the OWNER.

E. Provide test report documenting the test results.

END OF SECTION




SECTION 16100

DEMOLITION

PART 1 GENERAL

1.01 SUMMARY

A. The CONTRACTOR shall visit the project site and investigate all work required in

order to construct this project prior to the bid. This site visit is essential since

additional work is required which is not shown on the Drawings. Demolition of

existing electrical shall be as indicated on the Plans, as indicated elsewhere herein,

and as required for the construction of this project.

B. Demolition information shown on the Plans is based on visual field examination and

existing Record Drawings. The CONTRACTOR is responsible for verification of all

items indicated or not. All items affected that are not indicated on the plans shall be

brought to the ENGINEER's attention before demolition for direction.

C. The CONTRACTOR shall confine demolition work to the item specifically

identified on the plans. He shall be liable for any other damage he may inflict to the

existing installations.

D. Where the demolition work involves equipment and material that is owned by or

affects the utility company, the work shall be coordinated and approved by the utility

company.

PART 2 PRODUCTS

2.01 MATERIALS AND EQUIPMENT

A. Care shall be taken in demolition or removal of items as indicated on plans as being

returned to the OWNER. The CONTRACTOR shall notify the OWNER prior to

removing existing equipment.

B. Whether indicated on the Plans or not, the CONTRACTOR shall provide patching

material to fill voids where demolition has taken place. Patching materials shall

match, as nearly as practical, the existing original structure material for each surface

being patched.




PART 3 EXECUTION

3.01 COORDINATION

A. The CONTRACTOR shall verify existing field conditions, measurement, circuitry,

and other pertinent information prior to performing any demolition.

B. The CONTRACTOR shall test circuitry and verify that abandoned or demolished

wiring and electrical equipment serve only abandoned facilities. If demolished or

abandoned electrical is necessary for proper operation of facilities to remain in

service, the CONTRACTOR shall immediately notify the ENGINEER for direction.

C. Demolition shall not be performed without coordinating with new construction to

limit down time and ease of switchover. The CONTRACTOR must coordinate with

the ENGINEER and the OWNER prior to any demolition.

D. Prior to performing any demolition work, the CONTRACTOR shall provide

temporary wiring and connections to maintain existing systems in service during

construction. Temporary wiring shall conform to the National Electrical Code.

E. The CONTRACTOR shall coordinate all work associated with the electrical utility

equipment with the utility company. The disconnecting and removal of the electrical

utility equipment and cables shall be coordinated with the utility company and the

OWNER in order to provide a transition that does not interrupt the power

distribution to the existing or new equipment. Prior to performing any demolition

work, the CONTRACTOR shall provide temporary wiring and connections to

maintain existing systems in service during construction. A generator of appropriate

amperage and voltage shall be provided to feed the required load. The generator

shall be sized (in kW) as required to provided "connected load" to the system

requiring temporary power. Temporary wiring shall conform to the National

Electrical Code.

3.02 PERFORMANCE

A. General: The means and methods of performing electrical demolition and removal

operations are the sole responsibility of the CONTRACTOR. However, equipment

used, and methods of demolition and removal will be subject to approval of the

ENGINEER.

1. Remove exposed abandoned conduit systems, including abandoned conduit

systems in false ceilings.

2. Remove wiring in abandoned conduit systems to source of power supply,

where indicated.

3. In exposed through-structure conduit or foundation locations, cut conduits and

foundation below the finished structure surfaces in order to perform adequate

surface patching.




4. Maintain electrical continuity of existing electrical installations which remain

active. Modify installations as necessary to maintain continuity and provide

adequate access as required by the National Electrical Code.

5. Extend existing installations using materials and methods compatible with

existing electrical installations, and as specified elsewhere herein.

6. Disconnect and leave in place electrical devices and equipment serving

utilization equipment that has been removed or demolished.

B. Cutting: Perform cutting work of existing structure materials by such methods as

will prevent extensive damage beyond the immediate area of cutting. Consult

ENGINEER before removing any concrete slabs, concrete footings, or compacted

dirt underneath and around footings.

C. Unless otherwise indicated existing, electrical equipment, conduit, wire, etc.

indicated for demolition shall be removed and disposed of in a lawful manner, off

Site.

D. The CONTRACTOR shall move existing electrical equipment required to be

returned to the OWNER, to locations as directed by the OWNER. Care shall be

taken to be sure existing electrical equipment being returned to the OWNER does

not become damaged. The CONTRACTOR shall provide a means for storing and or

stacking of the returned equipment prior to moving to final location, if necessary.

E. Items Abandoned in Place:

1. All items to be abandoned in place shall be de-energized.

2. Connections shown or otherwise indicated as disconnected shall be removed

with lugs left in place and with all conduit and cable openings properly plugged

and sealed as required by the NEC.

3. Any abandoned in-place equipment damaged by CONTRACTOR shall be

repaired and restored to its original condition.

END OF SECTION




SECTION 16121

INSTRUMENTATION CABLE

PART 1 GENERAL

1.01 DESCRIPTION

A. Scope:



instrumentation and telephone cables.

2. The types of cable include the following:

a. Shielded Instrument Cable.

1.02 SUBMITTALS


1. Manufacturer's technical information for instrumentation cable proposed for

use.

PART 2 PRODUCTS

2.01 MATERIALS

A. Single Shielded Pair Instrument Cable:

1. Bare, soft annealed copper, seven strand, PVC insulated conductors, No. 16

AWG minimum, twisted with aluminum-polyester shield, stranded tinned 20

AWG copper drain wire and PVC outer jacket. Color shall be black and

white or black and clear. Rated for 600 volts.

2. Product and Manufacturer: Provide one of the following:

a. Okonite Company.

b. Belden Company.

c. Dekoron Wire and Cable Company.

d. Or Approved Equal.

B. Multipaired Shielded Instrument Cable:




1. Bare, soft annealed copper, seven strand, PVC insulated conductors, No. 16

AWG minimum, twisted in pairs with aluminum-mylar shield over each pair,

tray cable rated, silicone rubber fiberglass fire barrier tape, tinned copper drain

wire, pairs shall be individually numbered, aluminum mylar overall shield,

PVC outer jacket. Color shall be black and white or black and clear. Rated

for 600 volts.


a. Okonite Company.

b. Dekoron Wire and Cable Company.

c. Or Approved Equal.

B. Multiconductor Shielded Instrument Cable:

1. Tinned copper, stranded conductors, No. 16 AWG minimum, with overall

aluminum-polyester shield with 85 percent tinned copper braid shield and

overall teflon jacket. Rated for 600 volts, minimum.


a. Okonite Company.

b. Belden Company.


C. Cable Terminals:

1. Provide barrel compression fittings or solder dipped, or fork type copper

compression terminals with nylon insulation for termination of cable at all

terminal blocks.


a. T&B Sta-Kon.

b. Burndy Insulug.


PART 3 EXECUTION

3.01 INSTALLATION

A. Install in conduit separate from power cables, unless otherwise noted.

B. Ground shield of shielded cables at one end only and as recommended by instrument

manufacturer.

C. Terminate stranded conductors with pre insulated crimp type spade or barrel

compression fitting terminals properly sized to fit fastening device and wire size.

D. Install and terminate vendor furnished cable in accordance with vendor equipment




requirements.

E. CONTRACTOR shall coordinate the installation and termination of the telephone

cables with the telephone company.

F. Install in conformance with the National Electrical Code.

G. DC Signal cables (i.e. 4-20 mA and under 50V DC) shall be separated from AC

voltage cables by a minimum of 12 inches.

3.02 TESTING

A. Test all 600 volt wiring in accordance with the requirements of Section 16122, 600

Volt Cable.

B. Test shielded instrumentation cable shields with an ohmmeter for continuity along the

full length of the cable and for shield continuity to ground. The tests shall be

witnessed by the OWNER and ENGINEER.

END OF SECTION




SECTION 16122

600 VOLT CABLE

PART 1 GENERAL

1.01 DESCRIPTION

A. Scope:


as shown on the Drawings, specified and required to furnish and install 600

volt cable.

2. The types of cable required include the following:

a. Insulated cable for installation in raceways.

b. Cable for installation in trays (if applicable).

B. Related Sections: CONTRACTOR shall coordinate the requirements of the Work in



1. Section 16061, Grounding Systems.

2. Section 16121, Instrumentation Cable.


A. Requirements of Regulatory Agencies: Comply with applicable provisions of

Regulatory Agencies below and others having jurisdiction:

1. Codes: Install cable in accordance with the National Electrical Code and

applicable local codes.

2. Tests by Independent Regulatory Agencies: Cable shall bear the label of the

Underwriters' Laboratories, Inc.

B. Reference Standards: Comply with applicable provisions and recommendations of the


1. ASTM B 3, Soft or Annealed Copper Wire.

2. ASTM B 8, Concentric Lay Stranded Copper Conductors, Hard, Medium

hard or Soft.

3. ICEA S 66 524, Cross linked thermosetting polyethylene insulated Wire and

Cable for the Transmission and Distribution of Electrical Energy.


5. UL Standard No. 44, Wires and Cables, Rubber Insulated.

6. UL Standard No. 83, Wires and Cables, Thermoplastic-Insulated.

7. IEEE Standard 971.




C. Factory Production Tests:

1. All wire and cable shall be factory tested in accordance with the requirements

of Underwriters' Laboratories.

1.03 SUBMITTALS


1. Manufacturer's literature, specifications, and engineering data for 600 volt

insulated cable proposed for use.

2. Manufacturer's literature for cable markers.

B. Test Records: Submit for review copies of written records of field insulation

resistance test results.

PART 2 PRODUCTS

2.01 MATERIALS

A. Insulated Cable In Raceways:

1. Material: Single conductor copper cable conforming to ASTM B 3 and B 8

with flame retardant, moisture and heat resistant cross linked polyethylene or

thermoplastic insulation rated 90°C in dry locations and 90°C in wet locations

and listed by UL as Type XHHW-2.

2. Application: Use Type XHHW-2 for all sizes, unless otherwise indicated.

3. Wire Sizes: Not smaller than No. 12 AWG.

4. Stranding: All 600 volt cable shall be stranded.


a. Okonite Company.

b. Rome Cable Corporation.

c. The Southwire Company.


B. Cable for Installation in Trays:

1. Material: Factory assembled cable, single or multi-conductor as required by

the Drawings, Type XHHW-2 bearing the UL label, Type TC and specifically

approved for installation in cable trays and meeting the flame test

requirements of IEEE 1202.


a. The Southwire Company.

b. The Okonite Company.





C. Cable Connectors, Solderless Type:

1. For wire sizes up to and including No. 6 AWG, use compression type. Alarm

and control wire shall be terminated using forked type connectors at terminals.

If terminal block is crimp type, then the wire shall be terminated with a

crimped barrel lug or solder dipped.


a. T & B Sta Kon.

b. Burndy Hylug.


3. For wire sizes No. 4 AWG and above, use either compression type or bolted

type with silver plated contact faces.

4. For wire sizes No. 250 kcmil and larger, use connectors with at least two

cable clamping elements or compression indents and provision for at least two

bolts for joining to apparatus terminal.

5. Properly size connectors to fit fastening device and wire size.

D. Cable Splices:

1. For wire sizes No. 8 AWG and larger, splices shall be made up with

compression type copper splice fittings. Splices shall be taped and covered

with materials recommended by the cable manufacturers, to provide insulation

equal to that on the conductors.

2. For wire sizes No. 10 AWG and smaller, splices may be made up with

preinsulated spring connectors.

3. For wet locations, splices shall be waterproofed. Compression type splices

shall be waterproofed by a sealant-filled, thick wall, heat shrinkable,

thermosetting tubing or by pouring a thermosetting resin into a mold that

surrounds the joined conductor. Spring connector splices shall be

waterproofed with a sealant-filler.


a. Compression-Type Splices:

1) Burndy Hylink.

2) T&B Color-Keyed Compression Connectors.

3) Or Approved Equal.

b. Spring Connectors:

1) Buchanan B-Cap.

2) T&B Wire Connector.


E. Cable Markers:

1. Provide only heat shrinkage type cable identification, which shall be type

written.

2. Product and Manufacturer: Provide the following:




a. Omni-Grip by W.H. Brady Company

b. Or Equal.

PART 3 EXECUTION

3.01 INSTALLATION

A. Install all cables complete with proper identification and terminations at both ends.

Check and correct for proper phase sequence and proper motor rotation.

B. Pulling:

1. Use insulating types of pulling compounds containing no mineral oil.

2. Pulling tension shall be within the limits recommended by the wire and cable

manufacturer.

3. Use a dynamometer where mechanical means are used.

4. Cut off section subject to mechanical means.

C. Bending Radius: Limit to a minimum of six times cable overall diameter.

D. Slack: Provide maximum slack at all terminal points.

E. Splices:

1. Where possible, install cable continuous, without splice, from termination to

termination.

2. Where required, splice where shown on the Drawings or as approved by the

ENGINEER and also where required for cable installation. All splices below

grade, in manholes, handholes and wet locations shall be waterproofed.

3. Splices are not allowed in conduits.

4. All splices shall be pre-approved by ENGINEER.

F. Identification:

1. Each cable and conductor shall be identified in each pullbox, manhole and

each termination point with circuit identification markers, which shall include

the conduit number and wire number. The markers shall be self-laminating

vinyl on white background and shall be printed using a Brady "XC Plus"

printer Or Equal.

G. Phase Identification/Color Coding:

1. All three phase circuits shall be identified, which shall include the conduit

number and phase, at switchgear, motor control centers, manholes (5 KV),

cables and panelboards as "PHASE A"," PHASE B", and "PHASE C". All

conductors not identified with a tag number shall be identified with a tag




indicating the source.

2. Three phase 480 volt systems shall be color coded as follows:

a. Phase A - Brown.

b. Phase B - Orange.

c. Phase C - Yellow.

d. Neutral (if applicable) - White.

3. Single phase, 120/240 volt circuits shall be color coded as follows:

a. Phase A - Black.

b. Phase B - Red.

c. Neutral - White.

4. Three phase, 208 volt systems shall be color coded as follows:

a. Phase A - Black.

b. Phase B - Red.

c. Phase C - Blue.

d. Neutral - White.

5. No. 6 AWG and Smaller: Provide colored conductors.

6. No. 4 AWG and Larger: Apply general purpose, flame retardant tape at each

end, wrapped in overlapping turns to cover an area of at least 2-inches.

7. Color code power cables in accordance with National Electric Code’s

requirements.

3.02 TESTING

A. Test each electrical circuit after permanent cables are in place to demonstrate that the

circuit and connected equipment perform satisfactorily and that they are free from

improper grounds and short circuits.

B. Individually test 600 volt cable mechanical connections after installation and before

they are put in service with a calibrated torque wrench. Values shall be in accordance

with manufacturers' recommendations.

C. Individually test 600 volt cables for insulation resistance between phases and from

each phase to ground. Test after cables are installed and before they are put in service

with a Megger whose rating is suitable for the tested circuit. Tests shall meet with the

applicable specifications of IPCEA S 66 524 and NEMA WC7 1971. Tests shall be

witnessed by the ENGINEER.

D. The insulation resistance for any given conductor shall not be less than the value

recommended by the IPCEA or a minimum of one megohm for 600 volt and less

service, if not IPCEA listed. Any cable not conforming to the recommended value or

which fails when tested under full load conditions shall be replaced with a new cable

for the full length.




E. Install in accordance with the National Electrical Code (latest edition).

F. Where existing cables are spliced to cables provided under this Contract, the existing

cables shall be tested prior to splicing. Test cables at 1,000 volts DC for one minute.

The entire spliced cable installation shall be re-tested after the splice is completed.

Any existing cable which fails or has a value less than two megohms shall be brought

to the ENGINEER'S attention and the splicing shall not proceed. Tests shall be

witnessed by the ENGINEER.

3.03 WIRING ALLOWANCES

A. CONTRACTOR shall include allowance of necessary conductors and termination to

provide any and all motorized equipment, electrical outlets, fixtures, communication

outlets, instruments, and devices within 10 linear feet of location shown on the

Drawings.

B. CONTRACTOR shall include allowance of necessary conductors and related

materials to provide any and all pull boxes, manholes, and ductbanks within 20 linear

feet of location shown on the Drawings.

C. Prior to installation of any raceway or related items identified in paragraphs A and B

above, the OWNER shall have the right to make changes related to preferred location,

at no additional cost.

D. CONTRACTOR shall include all necessary conductors for all equipment specified,

identified in wiring/raceway schedules, equipment schedules, panelboards schedules,

electrical single line diagrams, block diagrams, fixture schedules, and devices. Said

necessary conductors may not be shown on the plan Drawings, but they shall be sized

by CONTRACTOR in accordance with requirements of the National Electrical Code,

and included in this allowance if the conductors are necessary for the complete

operation of the included device or equipment.

END OF SECTION




SECTION 16131

RIGID CONDUIT

PART 1 GENERAL

1.01 DESCRIPTION

A. Scope:



conduit and fittings to provide complete, coordinated and grounded raceway

systems.

2. Conduit routings for various systems within buildings and other areas may not

be shown on the Drawings, but shall be established by CONTRACTOR based

upon single line, riser and interconnection diagrams and other information

shown on the Drawings. CONTRACTOR shall provide for the proper

installation of all conduits for each system.

3. The conduit types and the installation methods shall conform to the following:

a. Use schedule 40 PVC conduit for horizontal runs underground or

under slab.

b. Use EMT conduit for exposed indoor conduit runs.

c. Use Galvanized Rigid Steel conduit for outdoor non-corrosive areas.

d. Use Galvanized Rigid Steel conduit for vertical risers in non-corrosion

areas.

e. Use PVC-coated-GRS conduit for exposed indoor and outdoor

conduit runs in corrosive areas.

f. Use PVC-coated-GRS conduit for vertical risers in corrosion areas.

B. Coordination:

1. Conduit runs shown are diagrammatic. Coordinate conduit installation with

piping, ductwork, lighting fixtures and other systems and equipment and

locate so as to avoid interferences.

2. For conduits to be embedded in concrete slabs, confirm adequate slab

thickness and coordinate location of conduits with placement of reinforcing

steel, water stops and expansion joints.

C. Related Sections: CONTRACTOR shall coordinate the requirements of the Work in



1. Section 03310, Concrete Work.

2. Section 16132, Flexible Conduit.






following, except where otherwise shown or specified.

1. NEC Article 346, Rigid Metal Conduit.

2. NEC Article 347, Rigid Nonmetallic Conduit.

3. UL Standard No. 6, Rigid Metal Electrical Conduit.

4. UL Standard No. 514, Electrical Outlet Boxes and Fittings.

5. UL Standard No. 651, Schedule 40 and 80 PVC Conduit.

6. UL Standard No. 886, Electrical Outlet Boxes and Fittings for Use in

Hazardous Locations.

7. ANSI C80.1, Specification for Zinc Coated Rigid Steel Conduit.

8. NEMA TC2, Electrical Plastic Tubing, Conduit and Fittings.

9. NEMA TC3, PVC Fittings for Use with Rigid PVC Conduit and Tubing.

10. NEMA TC14A, Filament-Wound Reinforced Thermosetting Resin Conduit

and Fittings.

1.03 SUBMITTALS


1. Manufacturer's catalog cuts for the conduit, fittings, supports, identification

tags and warning ribbon proposed for use.

2. Construction details of conduit racks and other conduit support systems.

3. Layout drawings showing proposed routing of exposed conduits, conduits

embedded in structural concrete and conduits directly buried in earth.

Drawings shall show locations of pull boxes and penetrations in walls and

floor slabs. Drawings of embedded conduits shall include cross-sections

showing the thickness of the concrete slabs and the locations of conduits with

respect to reinforcing steel and water stops.

4. Conduit identification numbering system for the conduit systems.

B. Record Drawings: Show the actual routing of exposed and concealed conduit runs on

the Record Drawings conforming to the requirements of Section 01072, Record

Documents.

PART 2 PRODUCTS

2.01 MATERIALS

A. Galvanized Rigid Steel Conduit, Elbows and Couplings:




1. Material: Rigid, heavy wall, mild steel, hot dip galvanized, smooth interior,

tapered threads and carefully reamed ends; 3/4-inch NPS minimum size.

2. Manufacturer: Provide conduit and fittings of one of the following:

a. Allied Tube and Conduit.

b. Republic Steel Corporation


B. Electrical Metallic Tubing (EMT) Conduit, Elbows, Fittings, and Couplings:

1. Material: Steel, Not Die Cast. Concrete-tight and rain-tight compression

type. Neither set screw nor indenter type is acceptable. Shall meet NEC 348

and UL 797.



b. Republic Steel Corporation


C. PVC Coated Galvanized Rigid Steel Conduit, Elbows and Couplings:

1. Material: Rigid, heavy wall, mild steel, hot dip galvanized, interior coating of

2-mil thick urethane, tapered threads, carefully reamed ends, 3/4-inch NPS

minimum size with a factory exterior coating of 40-mil thick polyvinyl

chloride.

2. Color: Color of coating shall be the same on all conduit and fittings.


a. Robroy Industries.

b. Perma-Cote Industries.

c. OCAL Incorporated.


D. Metallic Conduit Fittings and Outlet Bodies:

1. Material and Construction: Cast gray iron alloy, cast malleable iron bodies

and covers. Outdoor units to be gasketed and water-tight. Gaskets shall be

of an approved type designed for the purpose. Improvised gaskets are not

acceptable. All units shall be threaded type with five full threads. Material

shall conform to ANSI C80.4 and be listed by UL. Do not use "LB" fittings.

Use type "LBD" fittings wherever the use of fittings is unavoidable.

2. Fittings installed in a hazardous area shall be rated for Class 1, Division 1 or 2,

where required, in compliance with NEC 501-4(a)(b). Fittings shall be UL

listed for specific application.

3. Manufacturer: Provide conduit fittings and outlet bodies of one of the

following:

a. Crouse-Hinds Company.

b. Appleton Electric Company.





E. PVC Coated Conduit Fittings and Outlet Bodies:

1. Material and Construction: Cast gray iron alloy, cast malleable iron bodies

and covers with a factory coating of 40-mil thick polyvinyl chloride, an

interior coating of 2-mil thick urethane and V-seal gasketing. All units shall

be threaded type with five full threads. Material shall conform to ANSI

C80.4.

2. Use: Provide conduit fittings and outlet bodies in all corrosive locations.

3. Manufacturer: Provide PVC coated conduit fittings and outlet bodies of one

of the following:





F. Non-metallic Conduit and Fittings:

1. PVC Plastic Conduit:

a. Material: Schedule 40 PVC plastic, 90°C rated, conforming to

NEMA TC-3 and UL No. 514 and 651.

b. Fittings: Form elbows, bodies, terminations, expansions and fasteners

of same material and manufacturer as base conduit. Provide cement

and primer by same manufacturer as base conduit.

c. Manufacturer: Provide conduit and fittings of one of the following:

1) Amoco Chemicals Corporation.

2) Carlon Electrical Products.


G. Electrical Metallic Tubing (EMT) Conduit, Elbows, Fittings, and Couplings:

1. Material: Rigid-type mild steel, galvanized (zinc) exterior, organic lubricated

interior, threadless 3/4-inch NPS minimum size.

2. Couplings and connections: Compression or threaded type only. Set screw

type shall not be permitted.

3. Elbows: Factory formed of same material specified for EMT conduit.

4. Certifications: Material shall conform to UL-797, ANSI C80.3 Conduit

elbows, couplings etc. shall bear UL listing and manufacturer’s name.

5. Use of EMT type raceway systems shall only be permitted inside walls of

buildings.

6. Manufacturer: Provide EMT conuit, elbows, fittings and couplings of one of

the following:


b. LTV Steel Tubular products Company

c. Weatland Tube company.





H. Conduit Hubs:

1. Material: Threaded conduit hub, vibration proof, weather proof with captive

O-ring seal, zinc metal with insulated throat and bonding screw.

2. Use: Provide for all conduit terminations to boxes, cabinets and other

enclosures located in areas designated as wet locations.

3. Manufacturer: Provide one of the following:

a. Myers Electrical Products Company

b. Thomas and Betts.


I. PVC Coated Conduit Hubs:

1. Material: Threaded conduit hub, vibration proof, weatherproof with captive

O-ring seal, zinc metal with insulated throat and factory coating of 40-mil

thick polyvinyl chloride and smooth urethane interior coating.

2. Use: Provide for all PVC coated conduit terminations to boxes, cabinets and

other enclosures located in areas designated as corrosive location.






J. Conduit Bushings and Locknuts:

1. Insulated Bushings: Malleable iron body with plastic liner. Threaded type

with steel clamping screw. Provide with bronze grounding bushing, as

required.

2. Locknuts: Steel for sizes 3/4-inch thru 2-inch and malleable iron for sizes

2-1/2-inches through 4-inches.

3. Use: Provide for all conduit terminations to boxes, cabinets and other

enclosures, except threaded type located in areas designated as dusty

locations.


a. O-Z/Gedney.



K. Conduit Tags:

1. Conduit tags shall be yellow, 1-1/2-inches round, aluminum tags. Print shall

be 1/4-inch Gothic. The conduit tags shall be manufactured by Brady, Catalog

No. 49900, Or Approved Equal.




2. Each tag shall be attached with nylon-coated 48-mil stainless steel wire and

fasteners, as manufactured by Brady, Catalog No. 23310 Or Equal , and brass

wire clamps, double ferrule design, as manufactured by Brady Catalog No.

23312, Or Approved Equal.

L. Warning Ribbon:

1. Material: Three-inch wide, four-mil polyethylene or polyvinyl chloride tape,

permanently imprinted with "CAUTION BURIED ELECTRIC LINE

BELOW".

2. Use: Provide over buried conduits carrying cables of 120 volts and higher.

3. Manufacturers: Provide one of the following:

a. Seton.

b. Ideal Industries.


PART 3 EXECUTION

3.01 INSTALLATION

A. Install in conformance with National Electrical Code.

B. Supports:

1. Rigidly support conduits by clamps, hangers or Unistrut channels.

2. Support single conduits by means of one-hole pipe clamps in combination with

one-screw back plates, to raise conduits from the support surface. Support

multiple runs of conduits on trapeze type hangers with steel horizontal

members and threaded hanger rods, Kindorff or equal. Rods shall be not less

than 3/8-inch diameter, and shall be Type 316 stainless steel.

3. For PVC coated galvanized rigid steel conduit runs, supports and hardware

shall have a factory applied PVC coating or be stainless steel.

C. Fastenings: Fasten raceway systems rigidly and neatly to supporting structures by the

following methods:

1. To Wood: Wood screws.

2. To Hollow Masonry Units: Toggle bolts.

3. To Brick Masonry: Price expansion bolts, or equal.

4. To Concrete: Phillips; Hilti Corporation; or equal, anchors.

5. To Steel: Type 316 stainless steel welded threaded studs, beam clamps or

bolts with lock-washers or locknuts.

D. Exposed Conduit:




1. Install parallel or perpendicular to structural members or walls.

2. Wherever possible, run in groups. Provide conduit racks of suitable width,

length and height and arranged to suit field conditions. Provide support at

every ten feet minimum.

3. Install on structural members in protected locations.

4. Locate clear of interferences.

5. Maintain 6-inches from hot fluid lines and 1/4-inch from walls.

6. Install vertical runs plumb. Unsecured drop length not to exceed 12 feet.

7. Provide necessary reducers where equipment furnished cannot accept 3/4-inch

conduit.

E. Conduit Embedded in Structural Concrete:

1. Separation: Three times outer diameter of larger conduit center to center.

2. Minimum Slab Thickness: Confirm that concrete slab thickness is sufficient for

embedding conduits.

a. For embedding conduit sizes up to 1-1/2 inches, the minimum slab

thickness shall be 7-inches plus the outer diameter of the conduit or

conduits, where conduits cross.

b. For embedding conduits larger than 1-1/2 inches, the minimum slab

thickness shall be five times the outer diameter of the conduit where

conduits do not cross and six times the outer diameter of the larger

conduit where conduits do cross.

3. Run conduits in center of slab, where applicable.

4. Run conduits above waterstops.

5. Before concrete is placed, make the necessary location measurements of the

conduits to be embedded so that the information is available to prepare

Record Drawings.

6. All conduits entering or exiting concrete shall be PVC coated galvanized rigid

steel conduit, a minimum of 12-inches on each side of air/concrete interface.

F. Underground Conduits:

1. Use Schedule 40 PVC conduit for underground conduit runs.

2. Install individual underground conduits a minimum of 24-inches below grade,

unless otherwise shown on the Drawings or as required to avoid existing

obstructions.

3. Perform all excavation, bedding, backfilling and surface restoration including

pavement replacement, where required.

4. Install a warning ribbon 12-inches below finished grade over all conduits

carrying cables of 120 volts and higher.

5. Make conduit connections watertight.

6. Protect metallic conduits (where permitted for vertical risers in non-corrosive

areas) from damage by one of the following means:

a. Provide minimum 3-inches of red colored concrete all around




conduits.

b. Tape conduits with an all-weather polyvinyl chloride plastic tape with

a high tack adhesive formulated to resist corrosion, Scotchrap Brand

50, Or Equal.

c. Apply two coats of a bitumastic coating.

G. Empty Conduits:

1. Install nylon pull wire in each empty conduit and cap conduits not terminating

in boxes with permanent fittings designed for the purpose.

2. Identify each empty conduit with a conduit tag conforming to the

requirements of Paragraph 2.01.K, above, showing the conduit number shown

on the Drawings.

H. Field Bends: No indentations. Diameter of conduit shall not vary more than 15

percent at any bend. Maximum total amount of bends shall not exceed 270 .

I. Joints:

1. Apply conductive compound to all joints before assembly.

2. Make up joints tight and ground thoroughly.

3. Use standard tapered pipe threads for conduit and fittings.

4. Cut conduit ends square and ream to prevent damage to wire and cable.

5. Use full threaded couplings. Split couplings not permitted.

6. Use strap wrenches and vises to install conduit. Replace conduit with wrench

marks.

7. Apply zinc-rich paint to exposed threads and other areas of galvanized rigid

steel conduit system where the base metal is exposed.

J. Terminations:

1. Install insulated bushings on conduits entering boxes or cabinets, except when

threaded hubs are used.

2. Provide locknuts and grounding bushings on both inside and outside of

enclosure, except when threaded hubs are used.

3. Do not use bushings in lieu of locknuts.

4. Install conduit hubs on conduits entering boxes, enclosures or cabinets in wet

and corrosive areas.

K. Moisture Protection:

1. Plug or cap conduit ends at time of installation to prevent entrance of

moisture or foreign materials.

2. Make underground and embedded conduit connections water-tight.

3. Through Wall Seals and Conduit Sealing Bushings: Install for all conduits

passing through concrete slabs, floors, walls or concrete block walls.

a. For conduits and cables in new construction and passing through




exterior subsurface walls and exterior concrete walls, use Type WSK

and WSCS through wall seals as manufactured by O-Z/Gedney, Or

Approved Equal.

b. For conduits and cables in new construction and passing through

concrete floors and floor slabs, use Type FSK and FSCS floor seals,

as manufactured by O-Z/Gedney, Or Approved Equal.

c. For conduits passing through new exterior block walls or through

core-drilled holes in existing exterior subsurface walls, exterior

concrete walls, floor slabs and roof slabs, use Type CSMI sealing

bushing at the inside of the structure and Type CSMC sealing bushing

at the outside of the structure. Sealing bushings shall be as

manufactured by O-Z/Gedney, Or Approved Equal.

d. For conduits passing through existing interior concrete walls or floors

and interior block walls, provide CSMC or CSMI type sealing

bushings as manufactured by O-Z/Gedney, Or Approved Equal.

Drainage: Pay particular attention to drainage for conduit runs.

Wherever possible, install conduit runs so as to drain to one end and

away from buildings. Avoid pockets or depressions in conduit runs.

Where conduits enter buildings below grade, seal inside of conduit to

form a watertight seal around cables to prevent the entry of water into

building. Sealant shall be Silicone and shall form an elastomeric

compression seal. Sealant shall be Fire Barrier 2001 Silicone RTV

Foam, Or Approved Equal.

4. Seal all conduit openings within control and instrumentation panels and

distribution equipment with Type DUX - Duct Sealing Compound, as

manufactured by O-Z/Gedney, Or Approved Equal, to provide a

water/bug-tight seal.

L. Corrosion Protection:

1. Conduit Curb:

a. For conduits routed in concrete slabs or floors and stub-ups through

the floor, provide a 2-inch high concrete curb, extending 2-inches

from the outer surface of the conduit penetrating the floor, to prevent

corrosion. For floor-mounted equipment, the concrete equipment base

shall be in lieu of the concrete curb.

b. Conduit stub-ups shall be a 90 degree PVC coated galvanized rigid

steel conduit elbow. PVC coated elbow shall extend slightly above

the top of the concrete curb or equipment base. Should the elbow not

reach this height, provide PVC coated conduit extension to

accommodate requirements. Provide coupling/fitting for transition

from galvanized rigid steel conduit or PVC coated galvanized rigid

steel conduit in slab to PVC coated elbow.

c. For conduits stubbing up and terminating at equipment enclosure




mounted on a concrete equipment base, provide insulated grounding

bushing on the PVC coated elbow.

d. For conduits stubbing up and extending to boxes, cabinets and other

enclosures above the concrete curb in wet and dusty areas, provide

conduit coupling/fittings between the PVC coated elbow and

galvanized rigid steel conduit for transition between the two conduit

types.

e. For conduits stubbing up and extending to boxes, cabinets and other

enclosures above the concrete curb or equipment base in corrosive

areas, continue the conduit system with PVC coated galvanized rigid

steel conduit.

2. Dissimilar Metals:

a. Take every action to prevent the occurrence of electrolytic action

between dissimilar metals.

b. Do not use copper products in connection with aluminum work, and

do not use aluminum in locations subject to drainage of copper

compounds on the bare aluminum.

c. Back paint aluminum in contact with masonry or concrete with two

coats of aluminum-pigmented bituminous paint.

3. PVC Coating: Supports and fasteners for PVC coated galvanized rigid steel

conduit runs shall have factory applied 40-mil thick polyvinyl chloride coating.

M. Reused Existing Conduits:

1. Pull rag swab through conduits to remove water and to clean conduit prior to

installing new cable.

2. Repeat swabbing until all foreign material is removed.

3. Pull mandrel through conduit, if necessary, to remove obstructions.

N. Core drill for individual conduits passing through existing concrete slabs and walls.

Obtain authorization from OWNER prior to core drilling. Prior to core drilling, drill

sufficient number of small exploratory holes to establish that the area to be core

drilled is free of existing embedded conduits.

O. Non-metallic Conduit:

1. Install in accordance with manufacturer's recommendations.

2. Join sections in accordance with manufacturer's installation procedures for

push fit, bell and spigot type joints, if applicable, or with manufacturer’s

recommended cement and primer.

3. During installation provide expansion fittings for expansion and contraction to

compensate for temperature variations. Expansion fittings shall be watertight

and of the type suitable for direct burial.

4. Make transition to PVC coated galvanized rigid steel conduit before making

turn up to enclosures.




5. Provide watertight expansion/deflection fittings at all wall and floor

penetrations of all buildings and equipment concrete pads.

P. PVC Coated Galvanized Rigid Steel Conduit:

1. Install in accordance with manufacturer's recommendations.

2. During installation install with manufacturers’ installation tools so as not to

damage PVC coating.

3. Repair damaged PVC coating with manufacturers recommended touch-up

compound.

3.02 TESTING

A. Test conduits by pulling through each conduit a cylindrical mandrel not less than two

pipe inside diameters long, having an outside diameter equal to 90 percent of the

inside diameter of the conduit.

B. Maintain a record, by number, of all conduits testing clear.

3.03 IDENTIFICATION

A. Tag conduits in accordance with Paragraph 2.01.K, above. Tag all conduits at the

ends and in all intermediate boxes, chambers, handholes and other enclosures. Fasten

tags to conduits with nylon-coated 48-mil stainless steel wire. Where this method is

not practical, fasten to the adjacent masonry by means of expansion bolts.

B. Use numbers on all conduits and record the conduit numbers and the cable content by

cable designation, size, quantity, origin and termination of conductors, and name of

equipment served. Assign numbers to unidentified conduits such as home runs to

panelboards. This information shall be included with the Record Drawings described

in Section 01072, Record Documents.

3.04 RACEWAYS ALLOWANCES

A. CONTRACTOR shall include allowance of necessary raceways and supports to

provide any and all motorized equipment, electrical outlets, fixtures, communication

outlets, instruments, and devices within 10 linear feet of location shown on the

Drawings.

B. CONTRACTOR shall include allowance of necessary raceways, trench, excavation,

backfill, and related materials to provide any and all pull boxes, manholes, and

ductbanks within 30 linear feet of location shown on the Drawings.

C. Prior to installation of any raceway or related items identified in paragraphs A and B




above, the OWNER shall have the right to make changes related to preferred location,

at no additional cost.

D. CONTRACTOR shall include all necessary raceways for all equipment specified,

identified in wiring schedules, equipment schedules, panel boards schedules, electrical

single line diagrams, block diagrams, fixtures schedules, and devices. Said necessary

conduits may not be shown on the Drawings, but they shall be sized by

CONTRACTOR in accordance with requirements specified and the National

Electrical Code, and include in this allowance, the raceways necessary for the

installation of the conductors and for the complete operation of the included device or

equipment.

END OF SECTION




SECTION 16132

FLEXIBLE CONDUITS

PART 1 GENERAL

1.01 DESCRIPTION

A. Scope:


as shown on the Drawings, specified and required to furnish and install flexible

metallic conduit and fittings.




1. NEC Article 350, Liquid Tight Flexible Metal Conduit.

2. UL Standard No. 360, Liquid Tight Flexible Steel Conduit.

1.03 SUBMITTALS


1. Manufacturer's catalog cuts and technical information for flexible conduit and

fittings proposed for use.

PART 2 PRODUCTS

2.01 MATERIALS

A. Flexible Conduit (Non hazardous Areas):

1. Material: Flexible galvanized steel core with smooth, abrasion resistant, liquid

tight, polyvinyl chloride cover. Continuous copper ground built in for sizes

3/4 inch through 1 1/4-inch. Material shall be UL listed.


a. Sealtite UA by Anaconda Metal Hose Division, Anaconda American

Brass Company.

b. Liquatite Type L.A. by Electric Flex Company.


B. Flexible Conduit (Class 1, Group D, Division 1, Hazardous Areas):

1. Material: Flexible brass inner core with bronze outer braid. Steel, brass or

bronze end fittings. Minimum of 12-inches in length.





a. Type ECGJH or ECLK by Crouse Hinds Company.

b. Type EXGJH or EXLK by Appleton Electric Company.


C. Flexible Conduit Fittings:

1. Material and Construction: Malleable iron with cadmium finish. Fitting shall

adapt the conduit to standard threaded connections, shall have an inside

diameter not less than that of the corresponding standard conduit size and

shall be UL listed.

2. Use: Provide on flexible conduit in non-hazardous and Class 1, Division 2

hazardous areas.


a. Crouse Hinds Company.



D. PVC Coated Conduit Fittings:

1. Material and Construction: Malleable iron with standard finish and 40-mil

PVC exterior coating. Fittings shall adapt the conduit to standard threaded

connections, shall have an inside diameter not less than that of the

corresponding standard conduit size.

2. Use: Provide on flexible conduit in areas designated as corrosive locations.



b. Permacote Industries.



PART 3 EXECUTION

3.01 INSTALLATION

A. Install at motors, transformers and equipment which are subject to vibration or require

movement for maintenance purposes. Provide necessary reducer where equipment

furnished cannot accept 3/4 inch size flexible conduit. Limit flexible conduit length to

three feet maximum.

B. Install in conformance with National Electrical Code.

END OF SECTION




SECTION 16135

PULL BOXES

PART 1 GENERAL

1.01 DESCRIPTION

A. Scope:


as shown on the Drawings, specified and required to furnish and install pull

boxes.




1. NEC Article 370, Outlet, Switch and Junction Boxes, and Fittings.

2. UL Standard No. 50, Electrical Cabinets and Boxes.

3. UL Standard No. 886, Electrical Outlet Boxes and Fittings for Use in

Hazardous Locations.

1.03 SUBMITTALS


1. Manufacturer's technical information for pull boxes proposed for use.

PART 2 PRODUCTS

2.01 MATERIALS

A. Pull Boxes: Provide boxes based upon location in accordance with NEMA

requirements and as required for the area classification specified in Section 16050,

General Provisions.

1. Material and Construction:

a. Cast gray iron alloy with hot-dip galvanized finish or cast malleable

iron bodies and covers.

b. Neoprene gaskets. Gaskets shall be of an approved type designed for

the purpose. Improvised gaskets are not acceptable.

c. Stainless steel cover bolts.

d. External mounting lugs.

e. Drilled and tapped conduit holes.




f. Boxes where conduits enter a building below grade shall have 1/4 inch

drain hole.

2. Product and Manufacturer: Provide pull boxes of one of the following:

a. Appleton Electric Company.

b. O-Z/Gedney Company.

c. Hoffman Engineering Company.


3. Large boxes not generally available in cast construction may be fabricated of

copper free aluminum alloy or Type 316 stainless steel as required by location.

4. Boxes for installation in areas classified as hazardous locations shall be

explosion-proof and shall comply with the requirements of UL Standard No.

886.

5. For flush-mounted pullboxes in slabs or pavement, provide vehicular

traffic-bearing covers, where shown on the Drawings.

6. Pull boxes embedded in concrete slabs shall be cast iron. Pull boxes located in

wet, corrosive or outdoor areas shall be NEMA 4X, Type 316 stainless steel.

All other areas shall be NEMA 12.

7. All boxes shall be identified in accordance with Section 16050, General

Provisions.

PART 3 EXECUTION

3.01 INSTALLATION

A. Mount boxes so that sufficient access and working space is provided and maintain a

minimum of 1/4-inch from walls.

B. Securely fasten boxes to walls or other structural surfaces on which they are mounted.

Provide independent stainless steel or FRP supports where no walls or other

structural surface exists.

C. Install pull boxes where shown on the Drawings. In addition, install pull boxes in

conduit runs containing more than three 90 degree bends and in runs exceeding 200

feet.

D. Provide removable, flame-retardant, insulating cable supports in all boxes with any

dimension exceeding three feet.

E. Field apply PVC touch up to scratched PVC boxes damaged as a result of installation.

All touch up work shall be in strict conformance with manufacturer's

recommendations and instructions.




F. Size pull boxes in accordance with the National Electrical Code.

END OF SECTION




SECTION 16137

UNDERGROUND DUCT BANKS

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 DESCRIPTION

A. Scope:

1. CONTRACTOR shall provide all labor, materials, equipment and incidentals as

shown on the Drawings, specified and required to furnish and install underground

duct banks.

B. Coordination: Duct bank routing on the Drawings is diagrammatic. Coordinate

installation with piping and other underground systems and structures and locate clear of

interferences.

C. Related Sections: CONTRACTOR shall coordinate the requirements of the Work in this

Section along with the requirements of the Sections listed below which includes, but is

not necessarily limited to, Work that is directly related to this Section.

1. Section 03300, Cast-in-Place Concrete.

2. Section 16131, Rigid Conduit.



National Electrical Code and National Electrical Safety Code.

1.3 SUBMITTALS


1. Layouts showing the proposed routing of duct banks and the locations of manholes,

handholes and areas of reinforcement.

2. Profiles of duct banks showing crossings with piping and other underground

systems.

3. Typical cross sections.

4. Installation procedures.

B. Record Drawings: Include the actual routing of underground duct runs on Record

Drawings in accordance with Section 01072, Record Documents.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 MATERIALS




A. Duct: Schedule 40 PVC conduit and fittings in accordance with Section 16131, Rigid

Conduit.

B. Galvanized Rigid Steel Conduit: Galvanized rigid steel conduit and fittings in accordance

with Section 16131, Rigid Conduit, if required.

C. Concrete and Reinforcement: In accordance with Division 3, Section specifying Cast-In-

Place Concrete.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 INSTALLATION

A. Provide excavation and backfilling required for duct bank installation.

B. Make duct bank installations and penetrations through foundation walls watertight.

C. Top of duct banks shall be a minimum of 24-inches below grade, unless otherwise

approved by the ENGINEER.

D. Firmly fix ducts in place during placing of concrete. Carefully place and vibrate the

concrete to ensure filling of all spaces between ducts.

E. Make bends with sweeps of not less than 48-inch radius or five degree angle couplings.

F. Make a transition from non-metallic to galvanized rigid steel conduit where duct banks

enter buildings, manholes, handholes and outdoor pads. Provide expansion/ deflection

fittings, coordinate with ENGINEER. Terminate ducts in insulated grounding bushings.

Continue ducts inside buildings with rigid steel conduit, use PVC coated RSC where

installed in corrosive envelopes.

G. Where ducts enter structures such as pullboxes, transformer and switchgear

compartments, or buildings, terminate the ducts in suitable end bells, insulated bushings

or couplings on steel conduits.

H. Do not backfill with material containing large rock, paving materials, cinders, large or

sharply angular substances, corrosive material or other materials which can damage or

contribute to corrosion of ducts or cables or prevent adequate compaction of fill.

I. Slope duct runs for drainage toward manholes and away from buildings with a slope of

approximately 3-inches per 100 feet.

J. Install a bare stranded copper duct bank ground cable in each duct bank envelope. Make

ground electrically continuous throughout the entire duct bank system. Connect ground

cable to building and station ground grid or to equipment ground buses. In addition,




connect ground cable to steel conduit extensions of the underground duct system.

Provide ground clamp and bonding of each steel conduit extension, where necessary to

maintain continuity of the ground system. Terminate ground cable at last manhole or

handhole for outlying structures.

K. After completion of the duct bank and prior to pulling cable, pull a mandrel, not less than

12-inches long and with a cross section approximately 1/4-inch less than the inside cross

section of the duct, through each duct. Then pull a rag swab or sponge through to make

certain that no particles of earth, sand or gravel have been left in the duct.

L. Install a warning ribbon approximately 12-inches below finished grade over all

underground duct banks carrying cables of 120 volts and higher. The identifying ribbon

shall be a PVC tape, 3-inches wide, yellow color, permanently imprinted with

"CAUTION BURIED ELECTRIC LINE BELOW" in black letters.

M. Plug and seal empty spare ducts entering buildings and structures. Seal watertight all

ducts in use entering buildings and structures with 0-Z/Gedney Type DUX duct sealing

compound Or Approved Equal.

N. Reused Existing Ducts:

1. Pull rag swab through duct to remove water and to clean duct prior to installing new

cable.

2. Repeat swabbing until all foreign material is removed.

3. Pull mandrel through duct to remove obstructions.

O. Install duct banks in conformance with National Electrical Code.

+ + END OF SECTION + +




SECTION 16143

DISCONNECT SWITCHES

PART 1 GENERAL

1.01 DESCRIPTION

A. Scope:



disconnect switches.

2. Disconnect Switches shall be manufactured by the same manufacturer as the

Switchboard and over current protective devices.




1. Section 16050, General Provisions.





2. UL Standard No. 98, Enclosed Switches.

3. NEMA KS 1, Enclosed Switches.

4. NEMA 250, Enclosures for Electrical Equipment (1,000 Volts Maximum).

1.03 SUBMITTALS


1. Manufacturer's technical information for disconnect switches proposed for

use.

2. Listing of the switches to be furnished with an identification of their location,

rating and NEMA enclosure type.

PART 2 PRODUCTS

2.01 MATERIALS

A. Single Throw, Circuit Disconnect Switches:




1. Disconnect Switches shall be manufactured by the same manufacturer as the

Switchboard and over current protective devices.

2. Type: Fused or unfused, horsepower rated, heavy duty, single throw, quick

make, quick break mechanism, visible blades in the OFF position and safety

handle.

3. Rating: Voltage and current ratings and number of poles as required for

motor or equipment circuits being disconnected. Switches shall bear a UL

label.

B. Enclosures:

1. NEMA 12 for dry, indoor non corrosive areas.

2. NEMA 4X stainless steel for wet or corrosive locations and all outdoor

locations.

3. NEMA 7 for explosion proof areas.

C. Identification:

1. Identify all enclosures in accordance with Section 16050, General Provisions.

2. Nameplate identifying equipment, include identification of the equipment

served and source of power, for which switches serve as the disconnecting

means.

D. Product and Manufacturer: Disconnect switches shall be manufactured by the same

manufacturer as the power distribution equipment and overcurrent protection devices

(breakers). The intent is that the Disconnect Switches shall be manufactured by the

same manufacturer as the Switchboard and over current protective devices. Provide

one of the following:

1. Square D Company.

2. General Electric Company.

3. Cutler-Hammer.

4. Or Approved Equal.

PART 3 EXECUTION

3.01 INSTALLATION

A. Mount equipment so that sufficient access and working space is provided for ready

and safe operation and maintenance.

B. Securely fasten equipment to walls or other structural supports on which they are

mounted. Provide independent stainless steel supports where no wall or other

structural surface exists.

C. Furnish one set of spare fuses for each fused disconnect switch to be installed.




END OF SECTION




SECTION 16231

PERMANENT

DIESEL ENGINE GENERATOR SYSTEM

PART 1 GENERAL

1.01 SUMMARY

A. Convert the existing portable generator to a permanent standby generator. The

existing generator shall be removed from its existing trailer and mounted on concrete

foundation. Perform all structural required work in order to provide a self-

supporting generator structure and enclosure. Work shall be performed by an

Authorized Kohler vendor.

B. Section Includes: Packaged permanent diesel engine generator system to include the

following components:

1. Diesel engine.

2. Generator, with batteries and battery charger.

3. Liquid coolant system.

4. Fuel system and fuel storage tank.

5. Exhaust system.

6. Control system.

7. Skid system.

8. Accessories as specified.

9. Fuel tank.

10. All other equipment as required to provide a complete and operable power

generation system.

1.02 REFERENCES

A. La Paz County Building Safety

B. Buckskin Sanitary District Rules and Regulations.


1. A 53 - Specification for Pipe, Steel, Black and Hot-Dipped, Zinc-Coated


2. A 106 - Specification for Seamless Carbon Steel Pipe for High-Temperature

Service.

3. A 181 - Specification for Carbon Steel Forgings for General Purpose Piping.

4. A 240 - Specification for Heat-Resisting Chromium and Chromium-Nickel

Stainless Steel Plate, Sheet and Strip for Pressure Vessels.

5. A 536 - Specification for Ductile Iron Castings.




6. D 2310 - Standard Classification for Machine-Made Fiberglass (Glass-Fiber-

Reinforced Thermosetting-Resin) Pipe.

D. International Building Code (IBC):

1. International Building Code.

E. National Electrical Manufacturers Association (NEMA):

1. NEMA 250 - Enclosures for Electrical Equipment (1,000 Volts Maximum).

2. NEMA MG-1 - Motor and Generators.

F. National Fire Protection Association (NFPA):

1. NFPA 30 - Flammable and Combustible Liquids Code.

2. NFPA 37 - Installation and Use of Stationary Combustion Engines and Gas

Turbines.

3. NFPA 70 - National Electrical Code.

4. NFPA 110 - Emergency and Standby Power Systems.

G. Underwriters Laboratories (UL):

1. 142 - Steel Aboveground Tanks for Flammable and Combustible Liquids.

2. 2200 - Stationary Engine Generator Assemblies


A. Design Requirements: Provide packaged diesel generator system capable of

supplying power to the plant when the utility system is interrupted for short or

extended durations. Coordinate the generator control design with the switchgear or

transfer switches specified in DIVISION 16 and as indicated on the Drawings.

B. Electrical Equipment Requirements: As indicated on the Drawings and specified in

DIVISION 16 and the requirements specified in this Section.

C. Seismic and Wind Design: Perform all structural required work in order to provide a

self-supporting generator structure and enclosure to meet the seismic and wind

design criteria as required for Buckskin, Arizona.

1.04 SUBMITTALS

A. Shop Drawings:

1. Submit complete shop drawings of each component being added or modified at

the existing generator system package.

B. Manufacturer's Installation Instructions: Submit a detailed recommended installation

procedure for the following:

1. Other system components.

C. Operation and Maintenance Data: Instruction manuals containing operation and

maintenance procedures.




D. Quality Control Submittals:

1. Field test report and certification.



1. The major items of auxiliary equipment shall be manufactured by

manufacturers currently engaged in the production of such equipment.

2. Factory authorized parts and service facility located within 200 miles of the

Project site.

B. Supplier Qualifications:

1. Auxiliary equipment to be furnished by a factory authorized Kohler vender

who shall be responsible for furnishing, testing, installation supervising, and

guaranteeing the system.

C. Regulatory Requirements: Comply with the following:

1. Regulations of the Fire Department having jurisdiction.

2. International Building Code (Latest Edition)

3. Uniform Fire Code - 2003 NFPA1.

4. Other applicable state and local codes.

5. CONTRACTOR shall not be relieved from complying with the Specifications

that may be in excess of, and not contrary to, the regulations.


A. Elevation and ambient conditions as specified herein:

1. Minimum Ambient Temperature: 25°F.

2. Maximum Ambient Temperature: 122°F.

3. Altitude: 420 feet above sea level.

1.07 WARRANTY

A. Generator Package: Covered by a manufacturer's standard warranty for a minimum

of 6 months from date of final acceptance or first beneficial use of the package.

B. Warrant, that when fuel tanks are specified, the fuel tanks will not fail or leak for a

period of 5 years from original purchase from either external corrosion, internal

corrosion, or structural failure.

PART 2 PRODUCTS

2.01 DIESEL ENGINE

A. Manufacturers:

1. Engine:




a. Kohler (Existing generator), model 80REOZJ, Serial 0667375, Spec PA-

189543

2.02 GENERATOR

A. Modifications:

1. The existing Generator is equipped with two breakers. Replace the two

breakers with one breaker sized as indicated on single line diagram Drawing.

2. A separate 120V, 20A single-phase power feed shall be provided for the battery

charger.

3. A separate 120V, 20A single-phase power feed shall be provided for the block

heater.

4. A sub-base fuel storage system (see requirements below).

2.03 FUEL SYSTEM

A. General: Provide fuel system, accessories and fuel tank meeting the following

requirements.

B. Subbase Fuel Tank: Provide a subbase fuel tank meeting the following:


a. Pryco.

b. Tramont.

2. Operate generator’s full load capacity for 24 hours.

3. Provide UL listed tank with secondary containment rupture basin.

4. Construction: Reinforced steel channel system with minimum thickness of

7 gauge for channels and 12 gauge for tank construction.

5. Provide tank baffle to separate hot fuel return from cooler supply fuel.

6. Provide the following connections:

a. 1.25 inch minimum vent; CONTRACTOR to pipe vent to outside any

room or enclosure containing the generator set; use Schedule 40 black

steel pipe for vent.

b. 2 inch minimum fill connection.

c. 2 inch minimum main fuel storage level gauge.

d. 1.25 inch minimum low fuel level alarm; provide level switch and connect

to control panel.

e. 0.5 inch minimum fuel supply with dip tube.

f. 0.5 inch minimum fuel return with dip tube.

7. Provide rupture basin level switch and alarm.

8. Provide interior epoxy coating system.

9. Provide exterior epoxy coating with urethane top coat.

C. Above Ground Fuel Piping:

1. Supply and Return Piping: Provide Schedule 40 black steel supply and return

piping from storage tank to generator as indicated on the Drawings.

2. Flexible Connections: Provide 18-inch long flexible connections where off-skid

connects to the engine skid.




3. Provide a check valve located on the tank side of the flexible connection in the

return fuel line.

4. Provide a 24 volt direct current solenoid shutoff valve, wire, conduit, and

control interlock to close on engine shutdown; locate on the tank side of the

flexible connection in the fuel supply line.

D. Fuel Filters: Size filters for 10 percent above the engine fuel pump capacity.

1. Provide water/fuel separator.

2. Provide primary fuel filter.

3. Provide secondary fuel filter.

E. Engine Fuel Pump: Provide engine-driven fuel pump which transfers fuel from the

fuel tank; provide fuel pressure gauges on the pump suction and discharge.

2.04 ENGINE - GENERATOR CONTROL SYSTEM

A. Panel Type: Provide an engine skid mounted NEMA 12, vibration-isolated 14 gauge

steel control panel.

B. Switches, Alarms, and Monitors:

1. Type: Environmentally sealed, solid-state, microprocessor-based modules for

engine control and alternating current metering.

2. Provide for Automatic/Manual Start/Stop engine control and programmable

alarms with separate safety shutdowns and associated flashing LED indicators

for specified alarms and shutdowns in an alarm module meeting NFPA 110.

3. Alarms and Shutdowns: Provide alarms and shutdowns for:

a. Low Oil Pressure: Alarm and separate shutdown.

b. High Coolant Temperature: Alarm and separate shutdown.

c. Low Coolant Level: Alarm and separate shutdown.

d. Engine Overspeed: Alarm and separate shutdown.

e. Overcrank: Alarm and separate shutdown.

f. Low Main Fuel Tank Level: When belly tank specified, alarm and separate

shutdown.

g. Fuel Tank Secondary Containment Level: When secondary containment is

specified, provide each fuel tank with a secondary containment alarm

which on detection of fuel in the interstitial space between the secondary

containment of day tank, and main tank, annunciates an alarm.

h. Battery charger failure; alarm.

i. Generator on load; indicator.

j. Control switch not in AUTO; alarm.

4. Emergency Stop: Provide emergency stop pushbutton.

5. Start Cycle: Provide adjustable start cycle cranking times, 1-60 second

crank/reset periods; provide controls for a 30 second cranking cycle limit with

lockout; provide three 10 second cranks or a single 30 second crank.




6. Cooldown Timer: Adjustable to 0-30 minutes engine run time after load

disconnected for normal shutdowns.

7. Fuel Control: Provide an energized to run fuel control system operate the fuel

solenoid valve.

8. System Variable Indicator: Provide liquid crystal display digital readout for:

a. Engine oil pressure.

b. Engine coolant temperature.

c. Engine rpm.

d. System direct current volts.

e. Engine running hours.

f. Generator alternating current volts for each phase.

g. Generator alternating current amperes for each phase.

h. Generator frequency.

9. Control System Diagnostics: Provide liquid crystal display digital readout for

system diagnostic codes that include:

a. Loss of engine speed signal.

b. Invalid engine control switch signal.

c. Internal circuit fault.

d. Loss of coolant temperature signal.

e. Loss of data sending unit signal.

f. Unrequested engine shutdown.

g. Invalid programming switch position.

h. Loss of or failure to program settings.

10. Other Devices:

a. Display switch and hold button.

b. Engine control switch marked AUTO, MANUAL, OFF/RESET.

c. Indicator/display test switch.

d. Generator output voltage adjustment potentiometer.

e. Governor raise/lower speed adjust switch.

f. Panel illumination lights and switch.

g. Fault reset switch.

h. Audible alarm for alarms and shutdowns; provide audible alarm bypass

switch and alarm silence switch.

i. Battery charge rate ammeter if not furnished on separate charger.

j. Exciter cutout breaker, manual reset or exciter fuse; if fused, provide spare

fuse.

k. Dry contacts wired to terminal strips for connection to the plant control

system. Signals shall be:

1) Fuel Tank Leak.

2) Low Fuel Level.

3) High Temperature.

4) Low Battery.

l. Two dry single pole double throw contacts that switch when generator is

on for "Generator Running" indication and two dry alarm contacts that

open on "Generator Failure." Prewire the contacts to external terminal

strips at the panel for the purpose of remote alarm and status indication.




m. Provide for input signal for fully automatic operation of the engine-

generator set from the automatic transfer switch.

n. Provide panel mounted temperature scanner/indicator for generator

bearing and winding temperatures.

C. Generator Control Performance Requirements:

1. Maintain control and monitoring accuracy over the entire operating temperature

range.

2. Alternating current metering accuracy of 0.5 percent current volts and amperes.

3. Alternating current frequency metering accuracy of 0.3 hertz.

4. Other Accuracies:

a. Plus or minus 0.5 volt for direct current volts.

b. Plus or minus 1.0 revolutions per minute for engine speed.

c. Plus or minus 0.1 hour for hour meter.

D. Breakers: Install a generator main line fully rated molded case circuit breaker with

65 kiloamps interrupting capability as a load circuit interrupting and protection

device, as indicated on the Drawings and specified herein.

1. Breaker to operate both manually for normal switching function and

automatically during overload and short circuit conditions and as specified for

generator breaker controls.

2. Generator exciter field circuit breakers do not meet the above electrical

standards and are unacceptable for line protection.

2.05 GENERATOR SYSTEM OPERATION

A. Provide control devices and logic to sequentially start, operate, control, test, and stop

the generator system as described. Coordinate control system design so that on loss

of utility power, power is automatically supplied by the generator and on return of

stable utility power, power is automatically switched back to utility power and the

engine shuts down.

B. Engine Start Sequence:

1. Engine shall not start if any of the safety shutdown circuits have been tripped

and not cleared and reset.

2. Automatic Engine Start Sequence:

a. Initiated by a signal from the switchgear control system.

b. Starter Motor: Automatically crank the engine for adjustable times.

C. Emergency Shutdown Sequence: Engine shall shutdown immediately if the

emergency stop button is activated, or any of the specified shutdowns activate.

D. Normal Shutdown Sequence: Local or remote Stop signal shall cause the engine to

run unloaded for an adjustable cool-down period and then stop.

1. Remote stop signal shall be based on sensing the return of utility power for an

adjustable 0 to 15 minute time period before the engine is stopped and return to

utility power is limited. If utility power is lost during the time delay period the




timer shall be reset to zero and the engine shutdown not initiated until the set

delay time expires without an interruption of utility power.

2.06 SKID

A. Skid Requirements: Mount the engine, generator, radiator, fuel tank, and specified

accessories on a common heavy-duty fabricated steel skid.

B. Skid Construction: Fabricated steel skid to consist of a rigid welded frame of wide

flange members or rails on each side.

C. Vibration Isolators: Mount skid on spring isolators having telescopic top and bottom

housing with vertical stabilizers to resist lateral and vertical forces.


a. California Dynamics Corporation, Type RJSD.

b. Mason Industries, equivalent product.

2. Isolator Construction: Shatterproof ductile iron in accordance with

ASTM A 536, Grade CS-45-12.

3. Calculations: Submit to demonstrate proper isolator capacity, operation, and

vibration protection coupled with specified seismic design loading (Seismic

Category D) or International Building Code (IBC) classification; whichever is

more stringent.

D. Additional Requirements:

1. Provide for bolting skid to the concrete slab according to manufacturer's anchor

bolt layout.

2. Installation shall have a crankcase drain pipe at least 8 inches from the floor,

equipped with a readily accessible shutoff valve.

3. Provide front and rear engine mounts from the skid in addition to a generator

support mount.

4. Provide bracing from the engine skid diagonally to the top of the radiator

housing in addition to lower radiator supports on the skid.

5. Design skid components to limit deflection in any element to be low L/240 and

metal stresses to below one-half the allowable metal stress.

6. Submit calculations on skid elements.

7. All above work shall be sealed by an Arizona Licensed Structural Engineer.

2.07 ACCESSORIES

A. Starting System: Provide 24 volt direct current electric starting system with positive

engagement drive.

1. Batteries: Provide a 24 volt lead-acid storage battery set of the heavy-duty

diesel starting type; sufficient capacity for a minimum of 120 seconds total

cranking time without recharging.

2. Battery Rack: Provide a battery rack with necessary cables and clamps; provide

a cover constructed of aluminum angles and mesh to prevent dropped items




from touching the battery poles; provide latches to allow quick removal of the

cover from the rack.

3. Battery Charger: Provide UL approved current limiting battery charger to

automatically recharge the batteries:

a. Charger to float at 2.17 volts per cell and equalize at 2.33 volts per cell.

b. Provide charger overload protection.

c. Charger to have silicon diode full wave rectifier, voltage surge

suppressors, direct current ammeter, direct current voltmeter, and fused

alternating current input.

d. Amperage Output: Not less than 10 amperes.

B. Guards: Provide equipment guard posts.

C. Steps: Provide steps at all generator enclosure doors.

D. Crankcase Breather Filter:

1. Provide crankcase ventilation system with coalescing filter/trap for blowby;

coalescing filter to be replaceable.

2. When engine manufacturer recommends an open crankcase breather system

route outlet of breather filter to outside at 3 inches above grade and away from

engine components; provide on breather outlet Nelson "EcoVent" or equal,

sized to match engine breather flow.

3. When engine manufacturer recommends a closed crankcase breather system

provide integral crankcase pressure regulator with an automatic internal filter

bypass and bypass indicator; unit to be Racor Model CCV 4500 or equal.

PART 3 EXECUTION

3.01 EXAMINATION

A. Verify that conditions are satisfactory for installation of products as specified in

Division 1.

3.02 INSTALLATION

A. Installation shall be by competent personnel experienced and regularly engaged in

field installation of power generation systems.

B. Mount fuel tank at the elevation relative to the engine as recommended by the engine

manufacturer to achieve proper engine fuel pump suction conditions while avoiding

fuel flooding in the engine return system.

C. In accordance with NFPA 110.





A. Generating System:

1. Full-load test the generating system at the site in the presence of the

ENGINEER for a period of 8 hours, with the primary supplier providing

necessary resistive and reactive load banks to test at 0.8 power factor..

2. Prior to acceptance of the installation, subject equipment to process system

load tests, with available motor load, but not to exceed the generator's

nameplate rating, for a period of 4 hours.

3. Correct defects which become evident during testing.

4. Perform operational testing as specified in Section 16950.

5. Measure flows, pressures and temperatures of fuel, coolant, exhaust gas, and

radiator air at inlets and outlets to system components.

6. Provide test report as specified in Section 16950.

7. Measure radiator performance at full load including air flow, air inlet

temperature, and air outlet temperature.

B. Consumables: Primary supplier to provide lubricating oil, grease, ethylene glycol,

chemical water conditioner. CONTRACTOR to provide sufficient fuel for testing.

1. After testing, fuel tanks shall be filled by CONTRACTOR with Number 2

domestic burner fuel.

C. Manufacturer's Field Service:

1. Provide services of a factory-trained representative to inspect installation of the

equipment, make necessary adjustments, place it in initial trouble-free

operation, and instruct OWNER personnel on its operation and maintenance.

2. Upon completion of the installation, start-up to be performed by a factory-

trained dealer service representative.

3.04 TRAINING

A. Provide one organized training session totaling not less than 4 hours. Training is

required during evening or night shift times at the OWNER option.

B. Provide the OWNER with 2 weeks written notice regarding the date of the scheduled

training session.

C. Provide the training session after all required start-up and testing procedures have

been acceptably performed.

3.05 PROTECTION

A. Protect products until acceptance by OWNER.

END OF SECTION




SECTION 16232

PORTABLE

DIESEL ENGINE GENERATOR SYSTEM

PART 1 GENERAL

1.01 SUMMARY

A. Section Includes: Packaged portable diesel engine generator system to include the

following components:

1. Diesel engine.

2. Generator, with batteries and battery charger.

3. Liquid coolant system.

4. Fuel system and fuel storage tank.

5. Exhaust system.

6. Control system.

7. Skid system.

8. Accessories as specified.

9. Fuel tank.

10. Trailer

11. All other equipment as required to provide a complete and operable power

generation system.

B. The KW size is after the derating for the elevation and temperature, and fan. The

actual required generator size may be larger than the size indicated herein.

C. Power to the Generator System: A single 120/240V, single-phase power source shall

be provided for the generator. The generator system supplier shall furnish and install

all panelboards, transformers, distribution equipment, and circuitry as required to

energize all devices. Furnish and install all inter- and intra-circuitries as required for

a complete functioning system.

1.02 REFERENCES

A. La Paz County Building Safety

B. Buckskin Sanitary District Rules and Regulations.


1. A 53 - Specification for Pipe, Steel, Black and Hot-Dipped, Zinc-Coated


2. A 106 - Specification for Seamless Carbon Steel Pipe for High-Temperature

Service.




3. A 181 - Specification for Carbon Steel Forgings for General Purpose Piping.

4. A 240 - Specification for Heat-Resisting Chromium and Chromium-Nickel

Stainless Steel Plate, Sheet and Strip for Pressure Vessels.

5. A 536 - Specification for Ductile Iron Castings.

6. D 2310 - Standard Classification for Machine-Made Fiberglass (Glass-Fiber-

Reinforced Thermosetting-Resin) Pipe.

D. International Building Code (IBC):

1. International Building Code.

E. International Fire Code Institute (IFCI):

1. Uniform Fire Code (UFC).

F. National Electrical Manufacturers Association (NEMA):

1. NEMA 250 - Enclosures for Electrical Equipment (1,000 Volts Maximum).

2. NEMA MG-1 - Motor and Generators.

G. National Fire Protection Association (NFPA):

1. NFPA 30 - Flammable and Combustible Liquids Code.

2. NFPA 37 - Installation and Use of Stationary Combustion Engines and Gas

Turbines.

3. NFPA 70 - National Electrical Code.

4. NFPA 110 - Emergency and Standby Power Systems.

H. Underwriters Laboratories (UL):

1. 142 - Steel Aboveground Tanks for Flammable and Combustible Liquids.


A. Design Requirements: Provide packaged diesel generator system capable of

supplying power to various sites when the utility system is interrupted for short or

extended durations.

B. Generator System Performance Requirements:

1. Refer to PART 2, PRODUCTS below.

C. Electrical Equipment Requirements: As specified in DIVISION 16 and the

requirements specified in this Section.

D. Seismic and Wind Design: Meet the seismic and wind design criteria as required for

Buckskin, Arizona.

1.04 SUBMITTALS

A. Shop Drawings:




1. Complete Package: Submit complete shop drawings of each component making

up the generator system package; review will not be made until all required

information is submitted.

2. Submit torsional analysis or torsiograph records.

3. Submit exhaust system silencer noise attenuation curves.

4. Submit vibration isolator calculations as specified.

5. Structural calculations to be signed and stamped by a licensed Civil or

Structural Professional Engineer, licensed in the state where the Project is

located.

6. Radiator Heat Transfer Calculations: Submit radiator heat transfer calculations

including:

a. Air flow.

b. Air inlet and outlet temperatures.

c. Liquid inlet and outlet temperatures from both cores.

d. Assumed U-values for each core.

e. Bare tube surface area.

f. Fin surface area.

7. Submit radiator fan blade type pitch tip speed and noise levels by octave band

from 63 hertz to 8,000 hertz.

8. Submit exhaust system pressure loss calculations; include piping, fittings,

silencer, and rain cap in loss calculations.

9. Submit exhaust silencer structural support calculations.

10. Submit wiring diagrams including interconnecting wire and conduit schedule

for control and power wiring to and from transfer switches, MCCs, switchgear

and plant control systems.

B. Manufacturer's Installation Instructions: Submit a detailed recommended installation

procedure for the following:

1. Engine-generator set.

2. Other system components.

C. Test Reports:

1. Primary supplier to submit certified copies of the results of the factory tests.

2. Submit factory-certified test log of the generator set showing testing as

specified in this Section.

D. Certificates:

1. For the Complete Package: Upon completion of installation, manufacturer shall

issue a certification of compliance with the Specifications.

E. Operation and Maintenance Data: Instruction manuals containing operation and

maintenance procedures.

F. Quality Control Submittals:

1. Manufacturer's certificate of proper installation.

2. Factory test report.

3. Field test report and certification.






1. The engine, generator, and all major items of auxiliary equipment shall be

manufactured by manufacturers currently engaged in the production of such

equipment.

2. Factory authorized parts and service facility located within 200 miles of the

Project site.

3. Materials, equipment, and parts comprising the units specified shall be new and

unused, of current manufacture, and of the highest grade.

4. System to have engine and generator unit factory-assembled and tested by the

engine manufacturer and shipped to the jobsite by an authorized dealer.

B. Supplier Qualifications:

1. System to be furnished by one factory authorized supplier who shall be

responsible for furnishing, testing, installation supervising, and guaranteeing

the system.

2. The factory authorized supplier for the diesel engine generator package will be

referred to as the Primary Supplier. The responsibility of the Primary Supplier

shall extend to the selection and furnishing of the specified components and

supervision of installation, testing and start-up.

C. Regulatory Requirements: Comply with the following:

1. Regulations of the Fire Prevention Bureau of the fire department having

jurisdiction.

2. International Building Code (Latest Edition)

3. Uniform Fire Code - 2003 NFPA1.

4. Other applicable state and local codes.

5. CONTRACTOR shall not be relieved from complying with the Specifications

that may be in excess of, and not contrary to, the regulations.


A. Elevation and ambient conditions as specified herein:

1. Minimum Ambient Temperature: 25°F.

2. Maximum Ambient Temperature: 122°F.

3. Altitude: 420 feet above sea level.

1.07 WARRANTY

A. Generator Package: Covered by a manufacturer's standard warranty for a minimum

of 2 years from date of final acceptance or first beneficial use of the package.

B. Warrant, that when fuel tanks are specified, the fuel tanks will not fail or leak for a

period of 5 years from original purchase from either external corrosion, internal

corrosion, or structural failure.




1.08 MAINTENANCE

A. Spare Parts: Furnish the following spare parts for the engine/generator to the CITY

prior to acceptance of the Work:

1. 3 sets of lube oil filters, fuel filters, and gaskets.

2. 2 sets of air filters.

3. 2 sets of belts.

4. 12 spare lamps of each different lamp type.

5. 2 fuses (for each control circuit).

6. Provide a battery test hydrometer.

7. Provide a two-pronged battery test voltmeter.

8. 1 set of crankcase breather filters.

B. Special Tools: Furnish a set of specialty tools necessary for routine maintenance of

the equipment.

PART 2 PRODUCTS

2.01 DIESEL ENGINE

A. Manufacturers:

1. Engine: One of the following or Equal:

a. Kohler

b. Caterpillar

c. Cummins

2. Governor: One of the following or equal:

a. Woodward, digital type, Model 723, with EGP type actuator sized for the

engine.

b. Engine manufacturers equivalent digital governor.

B. General:

1. Power Output Rating: 20 Kilowatts, 120/240 volts, 3-phase, 4-wire, 60 hertz

delivered at 0.8 power factor, without exceeding NEMA MG-1 temperature

rise limits.

2. Rating Basis: As scheduled based upon the following performance rating

classifications:

a. Standby Rating: Typical peak load of 80 percent of rating but able to

operate at 100 percent of rating for duration of the power outage.

b. Typical hours of operation: 300 per year.

3. Able to start without any outside power source.

C. Engine Requirements:

1. Engine Type: 4-Stroke Cycle. Provide in-line or V-type diesel engine with

compression ignition, meeting all requirements of NFPA 37 and NFPA 110.

2. Maximum Rotational Speed: 1,800 rpm.

3. Minimum Piston Displacement: As scheduled.




4. Turbocharger: Turbocharged engine with an aftercooler cooled by the engine

coolant.

5. Main Bearings: Main bearings between each crank throw.

6. Cooling: Liquid cooled with engine driven coolant pump.

7. Fuel Type: Meet Specifications when operating on Number 2 diesel fuel oils

meeting the requirements of the Air Quality Management District or Air

Pollution Control Board; engines requiring premium fuels shall not be

considered.

8. Emissions: Meet the requirements of the Air Quality Management District or

Air Pollution Control Board, as applicable to the Project site.

9. Air filters: Replaceable dry element type with dirty condition differential

pressure indicator.

10. Lube oil filters: Dual spin-on type.

D. Governor: Electronic, digital type to regulate engine speed within 0.25 percent at any

constant load from no load to full load.

2.02 GENERATOR

A. Manufacturers:

1. Generator: One of the following:

a. Cummins Power Generation.

b. Caterpillar, model to match engine and required rating when Caterpillar

engine is supplied.

c. Or Equal

2. Voltage Regulator: One of the following or equal:

a. Basler, SR 4-F.

b. Similar by engine/generator manufacturer.

B. Generator:

1. Type: Synchronous revolving field type with brushless design full wave exciter

and solid-state voltage regulator.

2. Performance Requirements:

a. The generator will be used to supply a variety of loads, some of which are

non-linear in nature (variable frequency drives). Generator must be

suitable for this service.

b. BUS Voltage Distortion: At times the BUS voltage may have a total

harmonic voltage distortion factor of as scheduled and as defined in IEEE

Standard 519. Equipment and devices furnished must function without

derating, excessive heating, or false operation as a result of this distortion.

3. Standards: Meet requirements of NEMA MG-1.

4. Windings: Wye connected, braced to withstand a bolted, 3 phase short-circuit

at the machine terminals and treated for moisture resistance.

5. Insulation: Class H on the stator and rotor, and further protect both with

100 percent epoxy impregnation and an overcoat of resilient insulating material

to reduce possible fungus and abrasive deterioration.




6. Enclosure: Open drip-proof enclosure and fully guarded construction for

horizontal mounting.

7. Stator:

a. Type: Welded frame construction; laminations thin segmental type of non-

aging, low-loss steel, finished in a manner to minimize eddy current core

losses and stacked for strength and quiet operation.

b. Connection: Directly connected to the engine flywheel housing.

c. Temperature Detectors: Provide 2 temperature detectors of the thermal

couple type per phase, installed, and wired in the stator; locate in the

center of the slot between coil sides; provide panel mounted readout of

temperatures.

8. Rotor:

a. Type: Laminated rotor pole piece construction with high magnetic

permeability, finished and arranged for low eddy current losses.

b. Drive: Rotor driven through a flexible coupling for permanent alignment.

c. Bracing: Braced for overspeed of 25 percent in either direction.

9. Bearings: Provide a thermal couple detector to measure each bearing's

temperature; provide panel mounted readout of temperatures.

10. Strip Heaters: Provide 120 volt strip heaters to prevent moisture condensation.

11. Terminal Boxes: Provide separate terminal boxes for low voltage leads and

generator leads.

C. Voltage Regulation:

1. Type: SCR, solid-state type with 3 phase sensing.

2. Performance: Maintain rated voltage within plus or minus of the scheduled

percentage rating; from no load to full load; instantaneous voltage dip of less

than the scheduled rated voltage percentage when the generator is the sole

system power source and the largest single inductive load as scheduled is

started with all other standby loads running at full rated load.

3. Adjustment: Provide rheostat for a minimum of plus or minus 5 percent voltage

adjustment from rated value.

D. Engine/Generator Recovery Time:

1. Achieve and maintain stable operation within the time (in seconds) as

scheduled; stable or steady-state operation is defined as operation with terminal

voltage remaining constant within plus or minus of the scheduled rated voltage.

2.03 LIQUID COOLANT SYSTEM


1. Radiator:

a. Young Radiator, Model MWC-Q.

b. Equivalent product by engine manufacturer.

2. Jacket Water Heaters:

a. Kim Hot Start with adjustable thermostat.

b. Wattlow.




B. Radiator Type: Engine-driven and mounted on the engine skid; complete with

special low noise pusher fan, drive belts, fan guard, fan shroud, thermostats, and

quick warm-up bypass line.

C. Radiator Features:

1. Capacity: Cool the engine and turbocharge aftercooler with a 0.5 inch water

column external air flow restriction when engine is delivering 10 percent over

the maximum rated horsepower of the engine with ambient conditions as

specified herein and radiator inlet air temperature 10 degrees above the ambient

temperature specified herein.

2. Load Banks: Provide additional capacity for cooling specified generator load

banks to be mounted with the radiator as specified and scheduled.

3. Radiator Fan: Air foil type blades; radiator fan rpm and hp not to exceed those

for Young Model MWC-Q at required Btu/hr capacity. When acoustical

enclosure is required, manufacturer may offer its standard fan type meeting

specified requirements.

4. Fan Belt Tensioner:

a. Mounted on slack side of belts.

b. Provide tension adjusting screws, or hydraulic tensioner; provide slotted

guides to maintain proper tensioner alignment while adjusting belt tension.

5. Adjustable Pitch Fan Blades: Provide for generator sets above 600 kW rated

output.

6. Radiator Housing:

a. Provide radiator housing with a flange suitable for connection to a duct.

b. Provide bracing from top of radiator housing to engine skid to prevent

rocking of the radiator.

7. Radiator Core: Heavy-duty model radiator with removable cores and welded

steel tanks bolted into place.

8. Radiator Drain: Provide drain with a manual shut-off valve and a drain pipe to

the outside of the skid.

D. Coolant Solution: Provide solution of 50 percent ethylene glycol and softened water;

add chemical water conditioner as recommended by the engine manufacturer.

E. Flexible Connections: Provide duct work with a fabric reinforced elastomer flexible

connection section between radiator duct flange and ducting connected to the

radiator exhaust louver.

F. Coolant Expansion Tank: Provide radiator top mounted separate expansion tank

sized for entire jacket water system.

G. Jacket Water Heater:

1. Provide jacket water heaters sized to maintain engine jacket water to

90 degrees Fahrenheit at the minimum ambient temperature specified herein.

2. The heater shall be 120V, single-phase.

3. For V-type engines, provide heater for each side.

4. Power Voltage and Phases: As scheduled.




5. Provide adjustable thermostat, Kim Hot-Start Part AT6525 or equal.

6. Provide heater circulation pump; Grundfos or equal.

7. Coolant Connection Hoses: Provide braided metal coolant connection hoses

with silicone rubber carcass rated for a minimum of 300 degrees Fahrenheit

operating temperature.

8. Shut-Off Valves: Provide gate type shut-off valves on heater inlet and outlet to

jacket water circulation loop to allow maintenance of heater and pump without

having to drain engine coolant system.

H. Low Coolant Level Detector: Provide radiator with low coolant level detector

mounted in radiator expansion tank; tie detector to the engine shutdown system.

I. Radiator Hoses: Provide premium, oil resistant hoses of Viton or silicone rubber

carcass with reinforcing fabric; assembly to be suitable for a minimum service

temperature of 250 degrees Fahrenheit. When manufacturer cannot offer hoses

meeting the material requirements specified, provide two spare sets of radiator

hoses.

2.04 FUEL SYSTEM

A. General: Provide fuel system, accessories and fuel tanks meeting the following

requirements.

B. Subbase Fuel Tank: Provide a subbase fuel tank meeting the following:


a. Pryco.

b. Tramont.

2. Operate generator’s full load capacity for 24 hours.

3. Provide UL listed tank with secondary containment rupture basin.

4. Construction: Reinforced steel channel system with minimum thickness of

7 gauge for channels and 12 gauge for tank construction.

5. Provide tank baffle to separate hot fuel return from cooler supply fuel.

6. Provide the following connections:

a. 1.25 inch minimum vent; CONTRACTOR to pipe vent to outside any

room or enclosure containing the generator set; use Schedule 40 black

steel pipe for vent.

b. 2 inch minimum fill connection.

c. 2 inch minimum main fuel storage level gauge.

d. 1.25 inch minimum low fuel level alarm; provide level switch and connect

to control panel.

e. 0.5 inch minimum fuel supply with dip tube.

f. 0.5 inch minimum fuel return with dip tube.

7. Provide rupture basin level switch and alarm.

8. Provide interior epoxy coating system.

9. Provide exterior epoxy coating with urethane top coat.

C. Above Ground Fuel Piping:




1. Flexible Connections: Provide 18-inch long flexible connections where off-skid

connects to the engine skid.

2. Provide a check valve located on the tank side of the flexible connection in the

return fuel line.

3. Provide a 24 volt direct current solenoid shutoff valve, wire, conduit, and

control interlock to close on engine shutdown; locate on the tank side of the

flexible connection in the fuel supply line.

D. Fuel Filters: Size filters for 10 percent above the engine fuel pump capacity.

1. Provide water/fuel separator.

2. Provide primary fuel filter.

3. Provide secondary fuel filter.

E. Engine Fuel Pump: Provide engine-driven fuel pump which transfers fuel from the

fuel tank; provide fuel pressure gauges on the pump suction and discharge.

2.05 EXHAUST SYSTEM


1. Silencer:

a. Maxim.

b. Nelson.

2. Expansion Joint:

a. DME.

3. Exhaust Pipe Insulation:

a. As required for Flagstaff environment.

4. Expansion Joint Insulation:

a. Pittsburg-Corning, Temp-Mat.

B. System: Provide a complete exhaust system following the general scheme as

specified.

C. Back Pressure:

1. Provide components such that the maximum back-pressure in the exhaust

system including piping and silencer is 15 inches water column, measured at

the exhaust manifold header; reduce allowable back-pressure when

recommended by the engine manufacturer.

2. Provide each exhaust manifold header with a lugged, tapped connection for the

attachment of a test manometer; test actual back-pressure during acceptance

testing of the system.

D. Exhaust Piping:

1. Type: Schedule 40 high temperature black steel pipe conforming to ASTM

A106.

2. Drainage: Slope piping to a drain point and provide drain plug.

3. Finishes: Sand blast and coat outside of exhaust piping with not less than 6 mils

of inorganic zinc primer; finish coat in the field.




4. Insulation: As required for Buckskin environment for engine exhaust piping.

E. Exhaust Expansion Joints:

1. Type: Metal with convoluted portion of 0.038 inch thick Type 321 stainless

steel; non-convoluted portions of expansion joint to be Type 304 stainless steel,

Schedule 10S pipe; provide flanged ends with ASME B16.5, Class 150 bolt

hole drilling.

2. Length: Minimum of 18 inches in length.

3. Movement: Rated for a minimum of 1 inch lateral movement, and 1/2 inch

axial movement; rated movement defined as plus or minus travel from neutral

or free position.

4. Design Life: Infinite cycle life with 1,200 degrees Fahrenheit exhaust, no

insulation over the expansion joint, and continuous duty service.

5. Insulation: Insulate expansion joints with custom fitted, removable with

reusable fastening system, ceramic fiber insulation blankets enclosed between

inner and outer high temperature fabric cover rated for 1,200 degrees

Fahrenheit continuous duty; do not insulate expansion joints directly connected

to turbocharger outlet.

F. Exhaust Silencer:

1. Type: Heavy duty industrial type fabricated of welded steel with ported tubes

and snubbing chambers, and a rating meeting the specified sound attenuation.

2. Mounting: As required by the generator manufacturer.

3. End Connections: Steel flanges with Class 150 pound drilling pattern.

4. Shell: Sufficiently heavy and reinforced to eliminate excessive vibration, stress

or deflection and to support all operating loads with the silencer at elevated

temperatures and insulated as specified; loads include insulation weight and

connecting piping; provide calculations signed by Registered Professional

Engineer for silencer supports.

5. Drain: Provide threaded, plugged condensate drain.

6. Sound Attenuation: Attain the following minimum sound attenuation at the

listed octave band center frequencies with the engine at full load:

Frequency (Hz) 63 125 250 500 1,000 2,000 4,000 8,000

Attenuation (dB) 39 42 42 40 38 38 38 38

7. Supports: Provide shell lug supports suitable for supporting and mounting the

silencer; support design to account for elevated temperatures under insulated

shell.

8. Insulation: Insulate as required for engine exhaust piping.

9. Pressure drop not to exceed 7 inch water column at maximum engine rating.




2.06 WEATHERPROOF ACOUSTICAL HOUSING

A. Type: Provide engine enclosure to protect engine, generator, starting system,

batteries, and other specified accessories from weather exposure; meet seismic and

wind design requirements (Seismic Category C) or International Building Code

(IBC) classification; whichever is more stringent.

B. Wind and Seismic Requirements: As required for Buckskin (Seismic Category C) or

International Building Code (IBC) classification; whichever is more stringent.

C. Structural requirements: To meet or exceed 100 year snow loading.

D. Construction: Not less than 14 gauge steel panel thickness; all panels and members

hot dip galvanized after fabrication; enclosure readily removable to allow easy

maintenance and fitted with lockable latches; latches and hinges to be stainless steel.

E. Finishing: Factory or shop finished in epoxy and urethane coating system.

F. Noise Reduction: Provide acoustical insulation and acoustical enclosure ventilation

louvers and fan discharge silencers as necessary to achieve a measured sound

pressure level (dBA) as scheduled when measured at 23 feet from the enclosure;

protect acoustical insulation with perforated metal covers and plastic bagging to

prevent damage from abrasion or weather elements.

2.07 ENGINE - GENERATOR CONTROL SYSTEM

A. Panel Type: Provide an engine skid mounted NEMA 12, vibration-isolated 14 gauge

steel control panel.

B. Switches, Alarms, and Monitors:

1. Type: Environmentally sealed, solid-state, microprocessor-based modules for

engine control and alternating current metering.

2. Provide for Automatic/Manual Start/Stop engine control and programmable

alarms with separate safety shutdowns and associated flashing LED indicators

for specified alarms and shutdowns in an alarm module meeting NFPA 110.

3. Alarms and Shutdowns: Provide alarms and shutdowns for:

a. Low Oil Pressure: Alarm and separate shutdown.

b. High Coolant Temperature: Alarm and separate shutdown.

c. Low Coolant Level: Alarm and separate shutdown.

d. Engine Overspeed: Alarm and separate shutdown.

e. Overcrank: Alarm and separate shutdown.

f. Low Main Fuel Tank Level: When belly tank specified, alarm and separate

shutdown.

g. Fuel Tank Secondary Containment Level: When secondary containment is

specified, provide each fuel tank with a secondary containment alarm

which on detection of fuel in the interstitial space between the secondary

containment of day tank, and main tank, annunciates an alarm.




h. Battery charger failure; alarm.

i. Generator on load; indicator.

j. Control switch not in AUTO; alarm.

4. Emergency Stop: Provide emergency stop pushbutton.

5. Start Cycle: Provide adjustable start cycle cranking times, 1-60 second

crank/reset periods; provide controls for a 30 second cranking cycle limit with

lockout; provide three 10 second cranks or a single 30 second crank.

6. Cooldown Timer: Adjustable to 0-30 minutes engine run time after load

disconnected for normal shutdowns.

7. Fuel Control: Provide an energized to run fuel control system operate the fuel

solenoid valve.

8. System Variable Indicator: Provide liquid crystal display digital readout for:

a. Engine oil pressure.

b. Engine coolant temperature.

c. Engine rpm.

d. System direct current volts.

e. Engine running hours.

f. Generator alternating current volts for each phase.

g. Generator alternating current amperes for each phase.

h. Generator frequency.

9. Control System Diagnostics: Provide liquid crystal display digital readout for

system diagnostic codes that include:

a. Loss of engine speed signal.

b. Invalid engine control switch signal.

c. Internal circuit fault.

d. Loss of coolant temperature signal.

e. Loss of data sending unit signal.

f. Unrequested engine shutdown.

g. Invalid programming switch position.

h. Loss of or failure to program settings.

10. Other Devices:

a. Display switch and hold button.

b. Engine control switch marked AUTO, MANUAL, OFF/RESET.

c. Indicator/display test switch.

d. Generator output voltage adjustment potentiometer.

e. Governor raise/lower speed adjust switch.

f. Panel illumination lights and switch.

g. Fault reset switch.

h. Audible alarm for alarms and shutdowns; provide audible alarm bypass

switch and alarm silence switch.

i. Battery charge rate ammeter if not furnished on separate charger.

j. Exciter cutout breaker, manual reset or exciter fuse; if fused, provide spare

fuse.

k. Dry contacts wired to terminal strips for connection to the plant control

system. Signals shall be:

1) Fuel Tank Leak.




2) Low Fuel Level.

3) High Temperature.

4) Low Battery.

l. Two dry single pole double throw contacts that switch when generator is

on for "Generator Running" indication and two dry alarm contacts that

open on "Generator Failure." Prewire the contacts to external terminal

strips at the panel for the purpose of remote alarm and status indication.

m. Provide panel mounted temperature scanner/indicator for generator

bearing and winding temperatures.

C. Generator Control Performance Requirements:

1. Maintain control and monitoring accuracy over the entire operating temperature

range.

2. Alternating current metering accuracy of 0.5 percent current volts and amperes.

3. Alternating current frequency metering accuracy of 0.3 hertz.

4. Other Accuracies:

a. Plus or minus 0.5 volt for direct current volts.

b. Plus or minus 1.0 revolutions per minute for engine speed.

c. Plus or minus 0.1 hour for hour meter.

D. Breakers: Install a generator main line fully rated molded case circuit breaker with

22 kiloamps interrupting capability as a load circuit interrupting and protection

device, as specified herein.

1. Breaker to operate both manually for normal switching function and

automatically during overload and short circuit conditions and as specified for

generator breaker controls.

2. Generator exciter field circuit breakers do not meet the above electrical

standards and are unacceptable for line protection.

2.08 GENERATOR SYSTEM OPERATION

A. Provide control devices and logic to sequentially start, operate, control, test, and stop

the generator system as described. Coordinate control system design so that on loss

of utility power, power is automatically supplied by the generator and on return of

stable utility power, power is automatically switched back to utility power and the

engine shuts down.

B. Engine Start Sequence:

1. Engine shall not start if any of the safety shutdown circuits have been tripped

and not cleared and reset.

2. Automatic Engine Start Sequence:

a. Initiated by a signal from the switchgear control system.

b. Starter Motor: Automatically crank the engine for adjustable times.

C. Emergency Shutdown Sequence: Engine shall shutdown immediately if the

emergency stop button is activated, or any of the specified shutdowns activate.




D. Normal Shutdown Sequence: Local or remote Stop signal shall cause the engine to

run unloaded for an adjustable cool-down period and then stop.

1. Remote stop signal shall be based on sensing the return of utility power for an

adjustable 0 to 15 minute time period before the engine is stopped and return to

utility power is limited. If utility power is lost during the time delay period the

timer shall be reset to zero and the engine shutdown not initiated until the set

delay time expires without an interruption of utility power.

2.09 SKID

A. Skid Requirements: Mount the engine, generator, radiator, and specified accessories

on a common heavy-duty fabricated steel skid, with its associated trailer, suitable for

portable functionality.

B. Skid Construction: Fabricated steel skid to consist of a rigid welded frame of wide

flange members or rails on each side.

C. Vibration Isolators: Mount skid on spring isolators having telescopic top and bottom

housing with vertical stabilizers to resist lateral and vertical forces.


a. California Dynamics Corporation, Type RJSD.

b. Mason Industries, equivalent product.

2. Isolator Construction: Shatterproof ductile iron in accordance with

ASTM A 536, Grade CS-45-12.

3. Calculations: Submit to demonstrate proper isolator capacity, operation, and

vibration protection.

D. Additional Requirements:

1. Acquire all licenses (including but not limited to Arizona Motor Vehicle

Department) for the trailer (with generator) and pay all fees and cost.

2. Design skid components to limit deflection in any element to be low L/240 and

metal stresses to below one-half the allowable metal stress.

3. Submit calculations on skid elements.

2.10 ACCESSORIES

A. Starting System: Provide 24 volt direct current electric starting system with positive

engagement drive.

1. Batteries: Provide a 24 volt lead-acid storage battery set of the heavy-duty

diesel starting type; sufficient capacity for a minimum of 120 seconds total

cranking time without recharging.

2. Battery Rack: Provide a battery rack with necessary cables and clamps; provide

a cover constructed of aluminum angles and mesh to prevent dropped items

from touching the battery poles; provide latches to allow quick removal of the

cover from the rack.

3. Battery Charger: Provide UL approved current limiting battery charger to

automatically recharge the batteries:




a. Charger to float at 2.17 volts per cell and equalize at 2.33 volts per cell.

b. Provide charger overload protection.

c. Charger to have silicon diode full wave rectifier, voltage surge

suppressors, direct current ammeter, direct current voltmeter, and fused

alternating current input.

d. Amperage Output: Not less than 10 amperes.

B. Crankcase Breather Filter:

1. Provide crankcase ventilation system with coalescing filter/trap for blowby;

coalescing filter to be replaceable.

2. When engine manufacturer recommends an open crankcase breather system

route outlet of breather filter to outside at 3 inches above grade and away from

engine components; provide on breather outlet Nelson "EcoVent" or equal,

sized to match engine breather flow.

3. When engine manufacturer recommends a closed crankcase breather system

provide integral crankcase pressure regulator with an automatic internal filter

bypass and bypass indicator; unit to be Racor Model CCV 4500 or equal.

2.11 POWER DISTRIBUTION

A. The generator system is a stand alone system. The generator system shall be

equipped with all power sources as required to be a standalone and fully functioning

system. All internal power distribution shall be part of this generator system

package. The power distribution system shall include the following as a minimum:

1. 100-amp, 120/240-volt, single-phase panel, rated for 10k AIC with a 50-amp

main circuit breaker. Branch circuit breakers shall be as required to feed the

jacket water heater, battery charger, outlets, light fixtures, and other loads as

required.

2. All circuitry as required including conduits and conductors.

2.12 FINISHES

A. Engine, Generator, Tanks, Other Equipment and Accessories: Unless otherwise

specified for individual components, shop-finished with manufacturer's premium

corrosion resistant coating system suitable for corrosive or marine environments;

field touch up with same or compatible coating.


A. Shop Testing: Test equipment as a complete unit together with subsystems. The test

program shall include the following functions:

1. Verification that all set-mounted components are correctly installed and

interconnected. Perform tests with submitted cooling and exhaust system.

2. Verification that each subsystem is complete and functions according to design

criteria; include measurements of temperatures, pressures, and flows for all

components.




3. Individual testing of each protective device and verification of the accuracy of

instrumentation setpoints.

4. Operation of the generator unit from 0 to 100 percent load, starting at no load

and increasing in increments of 25 percent; check at each load point to verify

stable operation, fuel consumption (measure fuel consumption approximately

by measuring supply tank drawdown), engine performance, and generator

performance. Perform load test at 0.8 power factor; provide resistive and

reactive load banks to achieve this. Load test units for 2 hours at each load

prior to shipment.

5. Performance of full load transient tests to verify that voltage and frequency

transient characteristics are within the requirements of this Section.

6. Verification that equipment is free of all vibrations throughout operating range.

7. Provide written report including raw test data, calculated values, and a

certification that all values are normal and within Specifications prior to

shipment of the package.



PART 3 EXECUTION

3.01 EXAMINATION

A. Verify that conditions are satisfactory for installation of products as specified in

Division 1.

B. Factory prototype and factory production tests in accordance with NFPA 110 to be

complete before the equipment is installed.

3.02 INSTALLATION

A. Installation shall be by competent personnel experienced and regularly engaged in

field installation of power generation systems.

B. Mount fuel tank at the elevation relative to the engine as recommended by the engine

manufacturer to achieve proper engine fuel pump suction conditions while avoiding

fuel flooding in the engine return system.

C. In accordance with NFPA 110.


A. Generating System:

1. Full-load test the generating system at the site in the presence of the

ENGINEER for a period of 8 hours, with the primary supplier providing

necessary resistive and reactive load banks to test at 0.8 power factor..




2. Prior to acceptance of the installation, subject equipment to process system

load tests, with available motor load, but not to exceed the generator's

nameplate rating, for a period of 4 hours.

3. Correct defects which become evident during testing.

4. Perform operational testing as specified in Section 16950.

5. Measure flows, pressures and temperatures of fuel, coolant, exhaust gas, and

radiator air at inlets and outlets to system components.

6. Provide test report as specified in Section 16950.



B. Consumables: Primary supplier to provide lubricating oil, grease, ethylene glycol,

chemical water conditioner. CONTRACTOR to provide sufficient fuel for testing.

1. After testing, fuel tanks shall be filled by CONTRACTOR with Number 2

domestic burner fuel.

C. Manufacturer's Field Service:

1. Provide services of a factory-trained representative to inspect installation of the

equipment, make necessary adjustments, place it in initial trouble-free

operation, and instruct OWNER personnel on its operation and maintenance.

2. Upon completion of the installation, start-up to be performed by a factory-

trained dealer service representative.

3.04 TRAINING

A. Provide one organized training session totaling not less than 4 hours. Training is

required during evening or night shift times at the OWNER option.

B. Provide the OWNER with 2 weeks written notice regarding the date of the scheduled

training session.

C. Provide the training session after all required start-up and testing procedures have

been acceptably performed.

3.05 PROTECTION

A. Protect products until acceptance by OWNER.

END OF SECTION




SECTION 16401

EXISTING SERVICE METER AND POWER DISTRIBUTION EQUIPMENT

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 SUMMARY

A. Scope:

1. CONTRACTOR shall provide all labor, materials, equipment, testing,

certification, and incidentals as required to modify the existing service

entrance section to a receive the conductors from the automatic transfer

switch as indicated in the single line diagram Drawings and as specified

herein.

B. Related Sections: CONTRACTOR shall coordinate the requirements of the Work

in this Section along with the requirements of the Sections listed below which

includes, but is not necessarily limited to, Work that is directly related to this

Section.

1. Section 16050, General provisions.

2. Section 16100, Demolition.


A. International Building Code (IBC): 1. International Building Code.

B. La Paz County Building Safety

C. Reference Standards: Comply with applicable provisions and recommendations

of the following, except where otherwise shown or specified:

1. Independent testing and labeling by a UL certified entity.

1.3 SUBMITTALS


1. Manufacturer's sketches and technical information for modifying the existing

service entrance section and power distribution equipment to receive power

conductors.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 MANUFACTURER

A. Company to perform modifications: One of the following:

1. Eaton.




2. The Engineer does not know of any other entity that meets this

Specification.

2.2 MATERIALS

A. Busses:

1. To match the existing Eaton Pow-R-Line switchboard, G.O. No. SPX0362859.

2. A field investigation (prior to the bid) is required to determine all work

required to perform this modification.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 INSTALLATION

A. Perform the following:

1. Remove the existing feeder distribution breakers

2. Intercept the bus and modify as required to install automatic transfer switch

conductors.

3. Install and connect as indicated in single line diagram and as required for a

properly functioning system.

4. Replace cover and patch unnecessary opening.

5. Include all associated material and labor as required for a complete system.

6. All work shall be performed per UL standards.

B. Install equipment in accordance with the manufacturer’s recommendations and as

required per National Electric Code.

C. Hire the services of an independent UL certified entity for testing and labeling the

service entrance section and power distribution equipment after all modifications

have been completed.





SECTION 16412

AUTOMATIC TRANSFER SWITCHES

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 DESCRIPTION

A. Scope:

1. Provide all labor, materials, equipment and incidentals as shown on the

Drawings, specified and required to furnish and install automatic transfer

switches complete and operational.


A. Manufacturer’s Qualifications:

1. Manufacturer shall have a minimum of five years of experience of producing

substantially similar equipment, and shall be able to show evidence of at least five

installations in satisfactory operation for at least five years.

B. Reference Standards: Comply with applicable provisions and recommendations of the


1. UL Standard No. 1008, Automatic Transfer Switches.

2. NEMA 1CS2-447, AC Automatic Transfer Switches.

3. NEMA 1CS1-109, Tests and Procedures.

4. IEEE Standard 472-1974, Guide for Surge Withstand Capability Tests.

5. National Electrical Code (NEC) current adoption.

6. International Building Code (IBC).

7. Buckskin Sanitary District Rules and Regulations.

8. La Paz County Building Safety.

1.3 SUBMITTALS


1. Manufacturer's technical information for automatic transfer switches proposed

for use.

2. Listing of the transfer switches to be furnished with ratings.

B. Operation and Maintenance Manuals:

1. Submit complete installation, operation and maintenance manuals including test

reports, maintenance data and schedules, description of operation and spare parts

information.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 MATERIALS




A. Rating:

1. Switches shall be capable of switching all classes of loads and shall be rated for

continuous duty when installed in a non-ventilated enclosure.

2. Switches shall be three pole with overlapping neutral, 240 volts with ampere

rating as shown on the Drawings.

3. Switches shall have a withstand rating of 65,000 amps at 240 volts.

4. All control wiring shall be Type SIS, rated for 600 volts. All control wire

terminations shall be identified with tubular, sleeve-type markers.

5. Switches shall be enclosed in a freestanding, NEMA 3R. Enclosures shall have a

hinged and latched, gasketed door.

B. Operation:

1. Switches shall be double throw and operated by one, non-fused, momentarily

energized operating mechanism with a minimum transfer time of 400 milli-

seconds.

2. Operating mechanism shall prevent a sustained neutral position.

3. Normal and standby contacts mechanically and electrically interlocked to prevent

simultaneous closing.

4. Mechanical locking of main contacts in each direction shall be accomplished

without the aid of latching solenoids, toggle mechanisms or gear arrangements.

5. An overload or short-circuit shall not cause the switch to go to a neutral

position.

6. Inspection of all movable and stationary contacts shall be possible from the front

of the switch without disassembly of operating linkages and without

disconnection of power conductors. A manual operating handle shall be

provided for maintenance purposes. The maintenance handle shall permit the

operator to stop the contacts at any point throughout the entire travel to properly

inspect and service the contacts when required.

C. Accessories: An integrally mounted control panel with adjustable solid-state or

programmable microprocessor sensing and timing functions shall provide the

following operational characteristics:

1. Time delay on momentary dips in normal source (0.5 to 60 seconds), factory set

at fifteen (15) seconds.

2. Time delay on transfer to emergency for controlled loading of generator (0 to 1

minute), factory set at 0 minutes.

3. Time delay on retransfer to normal (0 to 60 minutes), factory set at 60 minutes.

4. Time delay on engine shutdown after retransfer to normal (0 to 30 minutes),

factory set at twenty (20) minutes.

5. Close differential voltage sensing of all normal source phases (pickup adjustable

from 85 to 100 percent of nominal and dropout adjustable from 75 to 98 percent

of pickup), factory set to pickup at 90 percent and dropout at 85 percent of

nominal.

6. Independent voltage (85 to 100 percent pickup) and frequency (90 to 100

percent pickup), sensing of the emergency source to prevent premature transfer,




factory set to pickup at 90 percent of nominal voltage and 95 percent of nominal

frequency.

7. Test switch (momentary type) to simulate failure of normal source.

8. Two sets of gold-plated single pole, double throw contacts, which operate when

the normal source fails. One set to be used for engine starting and the second set

to be spare.

9. Pilot lights to indicate switch position.

10. Auxiliary contacts (two closed on "NORMAL" and two closed on "EMER-

GENCY") rated ten amps, 120 VAC.

11. All time delay and sensing functions shall be field adjustable over the ranges

indicated and shall operate with minimum drift (not to exceed ± one percent of

set frequency, ± two percent of set voltage, and ± ten percent of set time delay)

over the temperature range of -20°C to +70°C. The control panel shall be

provided with a protective cover and an isolation plug in the wiring harness to

disconnect all the control wires between the control panel and the main transfer

panel.

12. Plant exerciser to automatically exercise generator. Exerciser shall be adjustable

type with minimum of 15-minute increments with switch to select "NO LOAD"

(switch will not transfer) "LOAD" (switch will transfer) exercise period.

13. Two position selector switch to select either automatic or manual retransfer to

normal operation.

14. Pushbutton retransfer to normal, operable only when two position selector switch

(Refer to Paragraph 2.1.C.13., above) is in the "MANUAL" position.

15. Time delay transfer to emergency, adjustable from 0 to 5 minutes, factory set at

one minute.

16. Retransfer to normal time delay, adjustable from 0 to 30 minutes, factory set at

five minutes.

17. An inphase monitor to control transfer and retransfer operations between live

sources so that closure on the alternate source will occur only when the two

sources are approaching or near synchronism (within 15 electrical degrees

maximum) so that inrush currents do not exceed normal starting currents. The

monitor shall function over a frequency difference range of up to ± two Hz with

a maximum operating transfer time of one-sixth of a second. If the voltage of the

load-carrying source drops below 70 percent, the inphase function shall be

automatically bypassed. The monitor shall not require interwiring with the

generator controls or active control of the governor.

18. Overlapping neutral.

D. Electrical and Mechanical Performance: Comply with UL Standard No. 1008 and

NEMA Standard ICS2-447. In addition, performance must meet or exceed the

following requirements and, if so requested, be verified by certified laboratory test

data:

1. Temperature Rise: Measurements shall be made after the overload and endurance

tests.

2. Dielectric: Measurements shall be made at 1960 VAC RMS minimum following

the withstand current rating test.




3. Transient Withstand: Control panel shall pass the voltage surge withstand test in

accordance with IEEE Standard 472-1974 and the voltage impulse withstand test

in accordance with NEMA ICS-1-109.

4. Withstand: UL listed to withstand the magnitude of fault current available at the

switch terminals when coordinated with respective protective devices as shown

on the Drawings at an X/R ratio of 6.6 or less. The main contacts shall not trip

open or weld when subjected to fault currents.

E. Product and Manufacturer: Provide one of the following:

1. Automatic Switch Co.

2. Russelectric.

3. Zenith Controls, Inc.

4. Or Approved Equal

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 INSPECTION

A. Examine the conditions under which the Work is to be installed and notify the

OWNER, in writing, of conditions detrimental to the proper and timely completion of

the Work. Do not proceed with the Work until unsatisfactory conditions have been

corrected.

3.2 INSTALLATION

A. Mount equipment so that sufficient access and working space is provided for ready

and safe operation and maintenance.

B. Securely fasten equipment to walls or other surfaces on which they are mounted.

C. Install in conformance with National Electrical Code.





SECTION 16442

LIGHTING, INSTRUMENTATION AND DISTRIBUTION PANELBOARDS

PART 1 GENERAL

1.01 DESCRIPTION

A. Scope:

1. CONTRACTOR shall provide all labor, materials, equipment and incidentals as

shown on the Drawings, specified and required to furnish and install lighting,

instrumentation and distribution panelboards.


this Section along with the requirements of the Sections listed below which includes, but

is not necessarily limited to, Work that is directly related to this Section.

1. Section 16050, General Provisions.




1. NEC Article 408, Switchboards and Panelboards.

2. NEMA PB1, Panelboards.

3. NEMA 250, Enclosures for Electrical Equipment (1,000 Volts Maximum).

4. UL Standard 50, Electrical Cabinets and Boxes.

5. UL Standard 67, Electric Panelboards.

6. UL Standard 698, Circuit Breaker Panelboard Assembly.

7. UL Standard 943, Ground Fault Circuit Interrupters.

1.03 SUBMITTALS


1. Manufacturer's technical information for panelboards proposed for use.

2. Listing of the panelboards to be furnished with an identification of their

proposed location, and number and rating of branch circuit breakers.

3. Lighting, instrumentation and distribution panelboards load calculations.

PART 2 PRODUCTS

2.01 MATERIALS

A. Panelboards:




1. Rating: Voltage rating, current rating, number of phases, number of wires and

number of poles shall be as shown on the Drawings. Series rated panelboards are not

acceptable.

2. Circuit Breakers: Molded case, bolt-in thermal magnetic type with number of poles

and trip ratings as shown on the Drawings. Series rated breakers are not acceptable.

3. Main and branch circuit breakers shall be fully rated with interrupting capacities as

follows:

a. 65,000 amps for 120/240 volt circuit breakers

4. Bus Bars: 98 percent conductivity copper, tin plated. All panelboards shall have a

solid neutral bar. All panels shall have ground bus.

5. Main: All panelboards shall have a main circuit breaker, unless Drawings specifically

call for main lugs only.

6. Branch circuit breakers connected for sequence phasing.

7. Construction: Code grade steel, NEMA 12, ample gutter space, flush door, flush

snaplatch and lock for dry indoor locations. NEMA 4X stainless steel for outdoor or

damp indoor locations.

8. Trim: Surface or flush, as required.

9. Directory: White card, minimum card stack 90 lb., maximum size 8” x 5”, placed in

a 9” x 5 ½” self adhesive vinyl pocket. Directory information to be a copy of the as-

built panel schedule as provided on the contract drawings.

10. Identification: Nameplate identifying the panel number and voltage.

11. Product and Manufacturer: Provide panelboards of one of the following or equal:

a. Square D Company.

b. General Electric Company.

c. Cutler-Hammer.

d. Or approved equal.

PART 3 EXECUTION

3.01 INSTALLATION

A. Mounting: Install panelboards at locations shown on Drawings. Set cabinets so that top

branch circuit breaker is not over six feet above the floor.

B. Arrange circuits to balance the loads on the panelboards.





SECTION 16970

PANELS AND ENCLOSURES

PART 1 GENERAL

1.01 DESCRIPTION

A. Scope:

1. The CONTRACTOR/Supplier shall provide all labor, materials, equipment

and incidentals as shown on the Drawings, specified and required to furnish,

install, calibrate, test, start-up, commission and place into satisfactory

operation all control panels and/or enclosures.

B. Related works specified elsewhere:

1. The CONTRACTOR /Supplier shall review all Contract Documents to verify

complete electrical and control requirements, including but not limited to the

following:

a. Mechanical and civil drawings and specifications

b. Electrical and instrumentation specifications including but not limited

to the following:

1) Section 16940, Panel Instruments and Devices


A. Reference Standards: Construction of panels and the installation and interconnection

of all equipment and devices mounted within shall comply with applicable provisions

of the following, except where otherwise shown or specified.

1. National Fire Protection Association 79, Annex "D" Standards.


3. National Electrical Manufacturer's Association Standards (NEMA).

4. American Society for Testing and Materials (ASTM).

5. Operational Safety and Health Administration (OSHA) Regulations.

7. State and local code requirements.

8. Where any conflict arises between codes or standards, the more stringent

requirement shall apply.

9. All electrical materials and equipment shall be new and shall bear the label of

the Underwriters' Laboratory (UL), Inc., Factory Mutual (FM) or equivalent

where standards have been established and label service regularly applies.

1.03 SUBMITTALS




A. Refer to Section 16050, General Provisions.

B. Shop Drawing, product data, and etc.

PART 2 PRODUCTS

2.01 GENERAL CONSTRUCTION REQUIREMENTS

A. Provide all electrical and/or pneumatic components and devices, support hardware,

fasteners, interconnecting wiring and/or piping required to make the control panels

and/or enclosures complete and operational.

B. Locate and install all devices and components so that connections can be easily made

and that there is ample room for servicing each item.

C. Components for installation on panel exterior shall be located generally as shown on

the Drawings. Layouts shall be submitted for approval.

D. Where permitted by location and layout as shown on the Drawings, panels and

enclosures shall have full height rear access doors. Where rear doors are not possible,

panels shall have full or half height front access doors.

E. Adequately support and restrain all devices and components mounted on or within the

panel to prevent any movement.

F. Provide sub-panels for installation of all relays and other internally mounted

components.

G. All wiring to panel connections from field instruments, devices, and other panels shall

be terminated at master numbered terminal strips, unless otherwise specified.

H. Provide copper grounding studs for all panel equipment and panel doors.

I. Provide the following convenience accessories inside of each control panel:

1. One 120 VAC, 20A duplex, grounding type receptacle.

2. One 120 VAC fluorescent light fixtures with 40 watt lamp and protective

plastic shield to span across the width of the panel (but not less than

two-thirds).

3. One 120 VAC, 20A, snap switch, to turn on the light, mounted in an outlet

box with a cover and located so that it is easily accessible from access door.

4. Service light with switch and duplex receptacle shall have its own circuit

breaker and separate power feed.

5. All receptacles shall be GFCI type.

6. All devices shall be powered from the enclosure's power system.




J. The bottom 12-inches of free standing panels shall be free of all devices, including

terminal strips, to provide ease of installation and testing.

K. No device on the front shall be mounted less than 36-inches above the operating floor

level, unless otherwise specified.

2.02 IDENTIFICATION

A. Provide laminated plastic nameplates for identification of panels and components

mounted thereon as follows:

1. Nameplates shall be of 3/32-inch thick laminated phenolic type with white

matte finish surface and black letter engraving.

2. Panel identification nameplates to have 1/2 inch high engravings.

3. Panel mounted component (e.g., control devices, indicating lights, selector

switches, etc.) identification nameplates to have 1/4 inch high, engravings.

4. Nameplates shall be attached to the panel face with two stainless steel

self-tapping screws.

5. Nameplate engravings shall include the instrument or equipment tag number

and descriptive title as shown on the Drawings and specified.

B. Tag all internally mounted instruments in accordance with the following requirements:

1. Tag numbers shall be as shown on the Drawings.

2. The identifying tag number shall be provided on a permanent sticker or

permanently etched or embossed onto a stainless steel tag which shall be

fastened to the device housing with stainless steel rivets or self tapping screws

of appropriate size.

3. Where neither of the above fastenings can be accomplished, tags shall be

permanently attached to the device by a circlet of nylon-coated 1/16-inch

diameter stainless steel wire rope.

4. Identification tag shall be installed so that the numbers are easily visible to

service personnel.

5. Front of panel-mounted instruments shall have the tag attached to rear of

device.

C. Tagging of the following items shall be accomplished with the use of adhesive plastic

Brady USA, Inc. labels, RayChem labels, Or Approved Equal.

1. Tag all electrical devices (e.g., relays, timers, power supplies) mounted within

control panels and enclosures.

2. Tag all pneumatic lines.

3. Numerically tag all terminal blocks.

4. Color code and numerically tag wiring at each end.




D. Numerically code terminals on terminal strips using a Brady LS2000 Labeling System,

RayChem labels, Or Approved Equal

E. Color code and/or numerically code wiring as required by applicable standards. Wires

shall be identified at each end with permanent number codes using a Brady LS2000

Labeling System, RayChem labels, Or Approved Equal.

2.03 PANELS AND ENCLOSURES

A. General:

1. Panels and enclosures shall meet the NEMA requirements for the type

specified.

2. The CONTRACTOR/Supplier shall furnish panels and enclosures amply sized

to house all equipment, instruments, front panel mounted devices, power

supplies, power distribution panels, wiring, tubing and other components

installed within. Enclosures shall not be larger than those indicated on the

drawings.

B. Construction Features:

1. Control panels shall be NEMA 4X Stainless Steel 316 for corrosive areas;

indoor or outdoors.

Control panels shall be NEMA 12 for interior non-corrosive areas.

Control panels shall be NEMA 3R for exterior non-corrosive areas.

Panels shall be metallic.

a. Metallic Panels:

1) Panels shall be metallic type construction with a minimum

thickness of 12 gage for all surfaces (except those areas

requiring reinforcement) having a smooth brushed finish.

2) Fast-operating clamp assemblies on three sides of each door.

Outdoor panels shall be pad lockable.

3) Rolled lip around three sides of door and along top of

enclosure opening.

4) Three point latching door handles. Hasp and staples shall not

be provided.

5) Provide a clear plastic, gasketed lockable hinged door to

encompass all non-NEMA 4 front of panel instruments.

6) Provide 3-inch high channel base assembly, with solid bottom,

drilled to mate the panel to its floor pad for free-standing

panel.

7) Floor Pad: Refer to Part 3 of this Section.

C. Electrical Systems:

1. Wiring:




a. Internal wiring shall be Type MTW stranded copper wire with

thermo-plastic insulation rated for 600 V at 90°C for single

conductors, color coded, conforming to the requirements of NFPA

79, and labeled with wire identification.

b. For DC panel signal wiring, use No. 14 minimum AWG shielded.

c. For AC power wiring, use No. 16 minimum AWG. For AC signal and

control wiring, use No. 16 minimum AWG. For wiring carrying more

than 15 amps, use sizes required by NEC and NFPA "79" Standards.

d. Separate and shield low voltage signal wiring from power and control

wiring by a minimum of 6-inches.

e. Group or bundle parallel runs of wire using covered troughs, ensuring

that the separation of high and low voltage wire is maintained.

Maximum bundle size to be 1-inch. Troughs shall have 40 percent

spare capacity.

f Install wire troughs along horizontal or vertical routes to present a

neat appearance. Angled runs are not acceptable.

g. Adequately support and restrain all wiring runs to prevent sagging or

other movement.

h. Terminate all field wiring using forked, insulated, crimp-on connectors

(soldered type not acceptable) at 600 V rated barrier type terminal

strips with screwed connections and permanently affixed numeric

identifiers beside each connection. Identifiers to be heat-shrink labels,

as manufactured by Brady, permanent type, machine printed numbers.

For DC field signal wiring, terminal strips shall be capable of handling

No. 12 wiring (minimum). Provide Phoenix Contact, Entrelec, Allen

Bradley, Or Equal.

i. All wiring shall be installed such that if wires are removed from any

one device, power will not be disrupted to any other device.

j. For internal component-to-component wiring only, compression type

terminal blocks are acceptable.

k. Provide spare terminals equal in number to 20 percent of the terminals

used for each type of wiring (e.g., DC signal and AC power).

l. Provide a separate terminal for grounding each shielded cable.

m. Use separate 5/16 inch diameter copper grounding studs for isolated

instrument signal cable shields and AC power.

n. Where wires pass through panel walls, provide suitable bushings to

prevent cutting or abrading of insulation.

o. When DC power and/or low voltage AC power is required, provide

and install the necessary power supplies and transformers in the panel.

p. All field 4-wire instruments shall be powered from an instrument

lighting panel as shown on the Drawings. Provide circuit breakers to

protect each circuit, with no more than six instruments on a single

circuit. Provide lockable circuit breakers for metering pump circuits.




q. Provide complete wiring diagram showing "as built" circuitry.

Diagram shall be enclosed in transparent plastic and placed in easily

accessible pocket built into panel door.

2. Surge Protection:

a. General: Surge protection shall be provided to protect the electronic

instrumentation system from surges propagating along the signal and

power supply lines. The protection systems shall be such that the

protection level shall not interfere with normal operation, but shall be

lower than the instrument surge withstand level, and be maintenance

free and self-restoring. Instruments shall be housed in suitable metallic

cases, properly grounded. Ground wires for all surge protectors shall

be connected to a good earth ground and where practical each ground

wire run individually and insulated from each other. These protectors

shall be mounted within the instrument enclosure.

b. Product and Manufacturer: Provide one of the following:

1) Phoenix Contact.

2) Advanced Protection Technologies.

3) Comm-Omni International.

4) Or Equal.

PART 3 EXECUTION

3.01 INSTALLATION

A. Unless otherwise noted, install indoor NEMA 12 panels on 4-inch concrete pad.

Extend pad 4-inches beyond outside dimensions of base, all sides.

B. Unless otherwise noted, install outdoor free standing NEMA 4 panels on a reinforced

concrete equipment pad.

END OF SECTION




SECTION 16980

START-UP, COMMISSIONING AND FIELD TESTING

PART 1 GENERAL

1.01 SYSTEM START-UP, COMMISSIONING AND FIELD TESTING

RESPONSIBILITIES

A. CONTRACTOR shall provide all labor, materials, equipment and incidentals as

shown on the Drawings, specified and required to furnish and install all equipment

and coordinate all activities required to perform start-up, commissioning and field

testing of all equipment. Field testing shall include an integrated system field test

and operational availability demonstration.

1.02 SYSTEM CHECK-OUT AND START-UP

A. CONTRACTOR shall perform the following:

1. Conduct a complete system checkout and adjustment, including calibration of

all instruments, tuning of control loops, checking operation functions, and

testing of final control actions. When there are future operational functions

included in this Work, they should be included in the system checkout. All

problems encountered shall be promptly corrected to prevent any delays in

start-up of the various unit processes.

B. CONTRACTOR shall provide all test equipment required to perform the testing

during system checkout and start-up.


PART 3 EXECUTION (NOT USED)


APPENDICES

AppendicesBuckskin Sanitary DistrictWastewater Treatment Plant Improvements

DIVISION 10 – SPECIALTIES DIVISION 11 –EQUIPMENT DIVISION ...

Documents

Transcript of DIVISION 10 – SPECIALTIES DIVISION 11 –EQUIPMENT DIVISION ...